547433
14
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/162
Pagina verder
Operating instructions
Connect
TV
Connect 40 LED 200,
Connect 32 LED
233–34481.023
- 2
english
Colour key function during radio operation
Red button: On/Off screen
Yellow button: Last selecting station
Button functions
Call MediaPortal,
select operating mode or function.
(e.g. Index)
with on-screen display: Info display,
info text appropriate to the content that can assist you
further, should you have any questions about your TV
device;
without on-screen display: Access status display,
with status display open and repeatedly pressing
programme information (if available)
Open DR archive/Video archive
(2
/ Timer list
Press button twice in quick succession:
Show / hide time permanently
Adjust picture format
On/Off PIP (picture in picture)
On/Off EPG (Electronic Programme Guide)
On/Off teletext/MediaText
(1
Call TV menu,
carry out settings
With opened menu: Exit menu;
Terminate inserts
Set operating mode
TV operation
Radio operation (standard assignment)
The assignment of the AUDIO button can be changed
(see page 129).
On/Off of the television set
On/Off device in standby
(Main switch must be turned on)
Selecting stations
OK Call station overview and with
Select station
or
P+/P– Next/ previous channel
or
Select station with numeric buttons
Sound
V+/V– Increase/ reduce volume
Sound on/off
Colour key function during TV operation
Red button: Freeze on/off.
Start HbbTV
(1
or interactive data service,
if this is available.
Green button: Teletext functions
Yellow button: Last selected station
Blue button: Programme information
Overview of the most important functions
(1
Depending on the corresponding settings (see from page 82).
(2
Only for TV sets that contain an integrated hard disc (DR
+
), a connected external hard
disc (USB Recording) or that have an archive available on the network (DR streaming).
3 -
english
1
Sound off/on ...........................................................................................................(page 36)
2
LED display for current operating mode ................................................................(page 129)
3
Switch over to TV mode ..................................................................................(page 20; 129)
4
Switch over to operate recorder
(2
.........................................................................(page 129)
5
DR archive/Video archive
(1
/ Timer list on/off ...........................................................(page 98)
6
Set picture format ....................................................................................................(page 39)
7
Electronic Programme Guide on/off ........................................................................(page 52)
8
Teletext/MediaText
(3
on/off................................................................................(page 54; 82)
9
Menu on/off ............................................................................................................(page 12)
10
V+/V– Increase/ reduce volume ...............................................................................(page 36)
11
Station list on ...........................................................................................................(page 34)
in the menu: Confirm/call ........................................................................................(page 12)
12
Green button: Teletext functions .............................................................................(page 40)
13
Red button: Freeze on/off / Start HbbTV or interactive data service
(3
.....................(page 82)
14
Select station down / Jump
(1
/ Rewind
(1
............................................................(page 90; 99)
15
Direct recording
(1
.....................................................................................................(page 92)
16
Still frame on/off / Interrupt timeshift television
(1
....................................................(page 90)
17
Still frame on / End timeshift
(1
.................................................................................(page 90)
18
Select station up / Jump
(1
/ Fast forward
(1
.........................................................(page 90; 99)
19
Still frame off / Continue timeshift television
(1
/ Highlights
(1
..............................(page 90; 91)
20
Blue button: Programme info on/off .......................................................................(page 40)
21
Yellow button: Switch to the last viewed channel ...................................................(page 40)
22
In the menu / Lists: Select/Set ..................................................................................(page 12)
23
P+/P– Select Station up/down .................................................................................(page 34)
24
Close all displays ......................................................................................................(page 12)
25
Status display on/off / in the menu: context-relevant Info on/off ......................(page 42; 15)
26
PIP on/off (picture in picture) ...................................................................................(page 50)
27
MediaPortal on/off ............................................................................................(page 14; 64)
28
AV selection .............................................................................................................(page 35)
29
Select station directly; in the menu: Enter numbers or letters ..................................(page 34)
30
Set sound mode ......................................................................................................(page 36)
31
Switch over to operate DVD player
(2
.....................................................................(page 129)
32
Switch over to radio mode
(2
..................................................................... (page 21; 56; 129)
33
Switch on/off to standby mode ...............................................................................(page 21)
The key assignment displayed here is valid for the main menu level of the TV set. The key assignment
may vary in certain operating modes (see the corresponding chapter in this operating manual).
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
32
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
33
17
Remote control – TV functions
(1
For equipment with integrated hard disc (DR
+
) or connected
external hard disc, see the Digital Recorder chapter from page
85 onwards.
(2
The assignment of these buttons can be changed (see page 129).
The description refers to the standard setting.
(3
Depending on the corresponding settings (see from page 82).
- 4
english
Acknowledgements
Loewe Opta GmbH
Industriestraße 11
D-96317 Kronach
www.loewe.de
Printed in Germany
Date of issue 12/11-4.0 TB/FP
© Loewe Opta GmbH, Kronach
ID: 7.5.0
All rights including translation, technical modifications and errors reserved.
All rights including translation, tech
n
5 -
english
Contents
Overview of the most important functions ............................................. 2
Remote control – TV functions ................................................................ 3
Acknowledgements .................................................................................. 4
Welcome ................................................................................................... 7
Scope of delivery ..................................................................................... 7
About this operating manual .................................................................. 7
For your safety ......................................................................................... 8
Control unit front side of the device ..................................................... 10
Connections rear side of the device ...................................................... 11
Operating convenience .......................................................................... 12
General information on menu operation .............................................. 12
Operating convenience with wizards .................................................... 13
Overview of wizards .............................................................................. 13
MediaPortal ........................................................................................... 14
The index in the TV set .......................................................................... 15
The info display ..................................................................................... 15
TV menu – Overview diagram ............................................................... 16
Radio menu – Overview diagram .......................................................... 17
Other menus– Overview diagram ......................................................... 17
Initial installation ................................................................................... 18
Installing the TV set ............................................................................... 18
Set covers .............................................................................................. 18
Connecting the TV Set .......................................................................... 18
Bundling the Cables .............................................................................. 20
Preparing the remote control unit ......................................................... 20
Turning the set on/off............................................................................ 21
First installation wizard .......................................................................... 22
TV set as a monitor ............................................................................... 33
Positioning/aligning DVB-T antenna ...................................................... 33
Daily operation ...................................................................................... 34
Select station ......................................................................................... 34
Selecting audio/video source ................................................................. 35
Adjusting the sound .............................................................................. 36
Adjusting the picture ............................................................................. 38
Button functions ................................................................................... 40
Daily operation (continued) ................................................................... 41
Operation without remote control ........................................................ 41
Status display ......................................................................................... 42
Managing stations ................................................................................. 44
TV stations ............................................................................................. 44
Put together / change favourites lists .................................................... 49
Picture in Picture .................................................................................... 50
Picture in Picture (PIP) ............................................................................ 50
iPIP ........................................................................................................ 50
Standard PIP .......................................................................................... 50
Configure Picture in Picture (PIP) mode ................................................. 51
Electronic Programme Guide ................................................................. 52
Electronic Programme Guide – EPG ...................................................... 52
Configuring EPG .................................................................................... 53
Teletext ................................................................................................... 54
Teletext .................................................................................................. 54
Teletext menu ........................................................................................ 55
Digital radio ........................................................................................... 56
Radio mode (DVB radio) ........................................................................ 56
EPG – Electronic Programme Guide (radio) ........................................... 57
Radio mode (Internet radio) .................................................................. 58
Audio playback from external devices ................................................... 59
Other settings ........................................................................................ 60
Parental lock .......................................................................................... 60
Timer functions ..................................................................................... 61
Language .............................................................................................. 61
On-screen displays ................................................................................ 62
Time and date ....................................................................................... 62
Coded Stations ....................................................................................... 63
Conditional Access module (CA module) .............................................. 63
- 6
english
Media
+
.................................................................................................. 64
General information on Media
+
........................................................... 64
Connecting the TV set to your network ................................................ 64
MediaNet .............................................................................................. 64
Help for configuration problems ........................................................... 64
MediaUpdate - additional functions ...................................................... 64
Accessing your media ........................................................................... 65
Media menu .......................................................................................... 66
MediaHome .......................................................................................... 70
MediaNet .............................................................................................. 73
MediaMusic .......................................................................................... 78
MediaPhoto .......................................................................................... 79
MediaVideo ........................................................................................... 80
Interactive data services ........................................................................ 82
HbbTV / MediaText................................................................................ 82
MHEG-5 ................................................................................................ 84
Digital Recorder ..................................................................................... 85
About the Digital Recorder system ........................................................ 85
Settings ................................................................................................. 88
TV viewing with time shift ..................................................................... 90
Archive recording – Direct recording ..................................................... 92
Archive playback ................................................................................... 98
DR+ Streaming .................................................................................... 106
External devices ................................................................................... 112
Connections menu .............................................................................. 112
Gaming mode ..................................................................................... 113
Devices to the connections AV/AVS .................................................... 114
Devices to the HDMI connections ....................................................... 116
Digital Link HD .................................................................................... 117
Devices to the PC IN connection ......................................................... 118
Sound components wizard ................................................................. 119
Connecting Loewe sound system ....................................................... 120
Connecting active loudspeakers .......................................................... 121
Adjusting the speaker system .............................................................. 121
Connecting audio amplifiers ............................................................... 124
Assignment of the digital audio input ................................................. 125
Audio connection in HDMI/DVI devices .............................................. 125
External devices (continued) ................................................................ 125
Serial interface RS-232C (RJ12) ............................................................ 125
The direct way to record ..................................................................... 126
Timer recording with external devices ................................................. 128
Operating Loewe equipment .............................................................. 129
Software update .................................................................................. 130
Basic information ................................................................................ 130
USB stick.............................................................................................. 130
Software download for updates over USB .......................................... 130
Software update via USB storage device ............................................. 131
Software update via the internet ......................................................... 132
Input of characters ............................................................................... 134
USB keyboard ...................................................................................... 134
Button combinations ........................................................................... 134
Character table .................................................................................... 135
Tilting the TV set .................................................................................. 136
Troubleshooting ................................................................................... 137
Technical data ...................................................................................... 140
General data........................................................................................ 140
Electrical data ...................................................................................... 141
Signals via PC IN / HDMI ..................................................................... 141
Connections (max. equipment) ........................................................... 142
MediaHome ........................................................................................ 143
Accessories ........................................................................................... 144
Upgrade kits / conversion kits / cables ................................................. 145
Equipment variants.............................................................................. 146
TV set equipment ................................................................................ 146
Setup possibilities Individual ................................................................ 147
Environment ......................................................................................... 148
Legal notes ........................................................................................... 149
Glossary ................................................................................................ 150
EC Declaration of Conformity .............................................................. 155
Index .................................................................................................... 157
Service .................................................................................................. 160
Contents
7 -
english
Thank you
for choosing a Loewe TV set!
Loewe stands for the highest demands in technology, design and user
friendliness. This applies equally for TV, video and accessories.
In addition to the elegant design and the many different possible colour
combinations and installation possibilities, your Loewe TV set also offers
many technological options.
Loewe Image
+
State-of-the-art Full-HD-LCD-displays with LED-Backlight Technology. The
advantage of the LED-Backlight is in the reduced energy consumption and
high contrast values.
24p films played by a connected HDMI unit can be displayed optimally.
Loewe Sound
+
Loewe Sound
+
contains sound processors that are optimally calibrated
to the TV set and boasts a closed coverage construction type for the
integrated loudspeakers.
Many Loewe TV sets are fitted with a digital multi-channel audio decoder
for impressive 5.1 surround sound.
Loewe Media
+
You can reach the MediaPortal via the MEDIA button on your remote control,
giving you access to all multimedia functions of your TV set.
Loewe DR
+
If the hard disc recorder DR
+
(1
is integrated into your TV set, you can
record TV programmes simply at the press of a button. Programmes
currently being watched can be interrupted, rewound and played back
from the desired point if needed.
Scope of delivery
nLCD TV set
nTable mount (assembled)
nMains cable
nAntenna cable
nVelcro cable ties
nRemote control Assist with two batteries
nTV quick guide
About this operating manual
For best results regarding safety and the longevity of the set, we recom-
mend you read the chapter For your safety (page 8) before switching
it on for the first time.
The functions of the Loewe TV set are largely self-explanatory. However,
should you have any questions, the integrated index and the info display
(see page 15) can assist you further.
The index/glossary from page 150 onwards gives explanations of certain
terms used in the TV set and the operating manual.
Paragraphs which begin with the symbol indicate important instruc-
tions, tips or conditions for the following settings.
Terms which you will find in the menus or printed on the remote control
or TV set are written in bold type.
The necessary control elements are shown in the descriptions to the left
of the text containing the instructions for action.
In addition to the remote control, a PC keyboard can be connected to one of the
USB ports on your TV and then used to control your TV set (see also page 134).
In the operating manual, this symbol indicates places in
which the use of a keyboard is particularly advantageous.
Depending on the connected accessory equipment the menus in the TV
set can differ from those described here.
All the station names, programme contents, the illustrated photos, titles,
albums and album covers in this operating manual are examples.
The operating instructions for your TV set are updated at irregular
intervals. We recommend checking now and then, especially after a
software update.
Interactive data services
In some countries the stations also broadcast interactive data services
with their programmes, leading to the functions of individual buttons
not being available or only so to a limited extent. You can find out more
about this from page 82 onwards.
Welcome
(1
Depending on the type of TV set. (equipment and upgrade options, see page 146.
- 8
english
For your own safety and to prevent unnecessary damage to your device,
read and comply with the following safety instructions:
Proper use and environmental conditions
This TV set is designed exclusively for reception and reproduction of
video and audio signals and is designed for living rooms or office facilities,
and should not be operated in rooms with high humidity, such as a
bathroom, or sauna, or where there is a high concentration of dust (e.g.
workshops). The manufacturer‘s warranty is only valid for use in the specified
permissible environment.
If the set is used outdoors ensure that it is protected against moisture
(rain, splashing water, or dew). High humidity and dust concentrations
cause leak currents in the device, which can cause a shock hazard if the
device is touched, or a fire.
If you have brought the set into a
warm environment from the cold,
then wait for about 1 hour before
switching it on to avoid formation of
condensation.
Do not place any objects filled with
liquids on top of the appliance. Pro-
tect the appliance against dripping
and splashing water.
Candles or naked flames must be kept
away from the appliance at all times
to prevent it from catching fire.
Never place the TV set in a position where it is exposed to vibrations. This
can lead to material overload.
Transporting
Only transport the device in vertical position. Grasp the device on the
upper and lower edges of the housing. If the table stand is not installed
(e.g. if the unit is to be installed on a wall), then under no circumstances
should you set down the TV set on the protruding control unit on the
underside.
If the set has to be put down during packing/unpacking, place the TV
set with the entire front surface lying flat on a soft underlay such as a
blanket or the felt from the packing material.
The LCD screen is made of glass or plastic and can break if not handled
properly.
Always wear rubber gloves to carry the TV set if the LCD screen is dam-
aged and liquid crystal might be leaking out. In the case of skin contact
immediately wash thoroughly with water.
Power supply
The wrong voltage can damage the set. This equipment must only be
connected to a mains power supply which has the same voltage and
frequency as that specified on the rating plate; use the mains cable
provided. The mains plug of the TV set must be easily accessible so that
the device can be disconnected from the mains at any time. When you
unplug the mains plug, do not pull on the cable rather pull on the plug
housing. The cable in the mains plug could be damaged and cause a
short circuit the next time it is plugged in.
Lay out the mains cable in such a manner that it cannot be damaged.
The mains cable must not be kinked or laid over sharp edges, stepped
on or exposed to chemicals; The latter also applies for the entire equip-
ment. A mains cable with damaged insulation can cause electrical shock
and is a fire hazard.
Air circulation and high temperatures
The vent slots on the rear panel of the set must always be kept free.
Please do not place newspapers or cloths on/over the TV.
Ensure that there is at least 10
cm free space on the sides and
above the set for air circulation,
if the set is placed in a cabinet
or on a shelf.
Like any electronic device, your
TV set requires air for cooling.
Obstruction of the air circula-
tion can cause fires.
Prevent metal items
, needles,
paper clips, liquids, wax, or
similar items, from getting into the interior of the device through the
vent slots in the rear panel. Such objects can cause short circuits in the
set, which could possibly cause a fire.
If something should get into the interior of the set then immediately
unplug the mains plug of the device and contact customer service for
more information.
Automatic shutdown (only in Home Mode)
If the TV is not operated for 4 hours (adjustment of volume, programme
change, etc.) the TV will automatically switch to stand-by mode to save
energy. A prompt to terminate this shutdown process appears one min-
ute before expiry of the 4 hours. The automatic shutdown is only active
in the energy efficiency mode Home Mode. Automatic shutdown does
not occur when using the radio without screen display (screen off).
For your safety
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
9 -
english
Note on the LCD screen
The TV set you have purchased with LCD screen satisfies the most rigor-
ous quality requirements and has been inspected relative to pixel errors.
Despite our thorough care when manufacturing the display, it cannot be
100% guaranteed that no subpixel defects will be present due to techni-
cal reasons. Please understand that these types of effects, as long as they
are within the standard of specified limits, cannot be considered as a
device defect in terms of the guarantee.
Avoid displaying still images for long periods of time. It is possible that
a copy of the image may remain.
Cleaning and care
Switch off the TV set at the main switch before cleaning.
Clean the TV set, the screen, and the remote control unit with a soft,
moist, and clean cloth only, without any aggressive or scouring cleaning
agents.
Sets with glass screens may be cleaned with a conventional glass cleaner.
Installation
The set is suitable for different installation solutions. See the instructions
for assembly for the different installation solutions.
Stand the TV set with the table or floor stand only on a level, sturdy,
horizontal base. Particularly ensure that the set does not protrude to the
front when placed in or on pieces of furniture.
Place the TV set in a normal position for use. The TV set may only be
used in an upright horizontal position. It may not be tilted by more than
10 degrees. The TV set must never be operated vertically, lying flat or
hanging overhead from the ceiling.
Set up the device where it is not exposed to direct sunlight and where it
is not exposed to additional warming through heating elements.
Repairs and accessories
Never remove the back of the TV set yourself. Only have your TV device
repaired or serviced by authorised television technicians.
Only use original accessories such as Loewe stands if possible (see Acces-
sories on page 144.
Supervision
Do not allow children to use the TV set without supervision or to play in
the immediate vicinity of the TV set. The set could tip over, be pushed
off or pulled down from the stand surface and injure someone.
Do not allow the switched-on TV set to run unattended.
Volume
Loud music can lead to ear damage. Avoid extreme volume especially
over long periods and when using headphones.
Thunder storms
Pull out the mains plug and all connected antenna cables from the TV
set in a thunderstorm. Overvoltage caused by lightning can damage the
set via the antenna system, as well as via the mains. The mains plug and
all connected antenna cables should also be pulled out during long pe-
riods of absence.
For your safety
±10°
D
- 10
english
Functions of the operating elements
1
Mains switch:
The mains switch is located on the bottom of the set.
Always return the TV set to Standby mode before switching it off
with the main switch.
2
On/Off button:
Switch on from the standby mode
Switch off to the standby mode
3
Display:
red = Standby
green = Operation
orange = Operation without on-screen display
(Radio, EPG data capture, timer recording, software
update or archive recording via USB
(1
).
4
Display DR
+
(2
:
white = Digital Recorder inactive
(no recording, no playback)
green = Digital Recorder active (offset TV viewing or
archive playback)
red = Digital Recorder active
(archive recording)
5
Button M:
Call the menu
in the menu: up/down 
6
Button R:
Radio on/off (back to TV mode)
Switch on the radio from the standby mode
in the menu: down
7
Button +:
Station up
in the menu: to the right
8
Button – :
Station down
in the menu: to the left
Control unit front side of the device
(1
USB recording is only possible for devices without DR
+
(integrated hard disc recorder).
(2
Only for devices with DR+ (integrated hard disc recorder).
DR
+
M
R
+
-
3
1
5
7
8
2
4
6
11 -
english
1
HDMI 1 - HDMI input 1
2
HDMI 2 - HDMI input 2
3
PC IN - VGA/XGA input
4
AV - Euro-AV socket
5
LAN - Network connection
6
USB - USB connection
7
AUDIO IN - Audio input (analogue)
8
AUDIO DIGITAL OUT - Digital audio output
9
AUDIO DIGITAL IN - Digital audio input
10
CENTER IN - Centre audio input (analogue)
11
SERVICE - Service socket
12
ANT-TV - Antenna/cable analogue/digital
(1 (2
12
ANT SAT - Satellite antenna (Sat tuner 1)
(1 (2
12
ANT SAT 2 - Satellite antenna (Sat tuner 2)
(1 (2
13
AUDIO LINK - Surround audio outputs (analogue)
14
CI-COMMON INTERFACE - Common Interface 1 (CI slot 1)
15
CI-COMMON INTERFACE - Common Interface 2 (CI slot 2)
16
HDMI 3 - HDMI input 3
17
USB - USB connection
18
- Headphones connection
19
AUDIO IN L - Audio in left (AVS)
20
AUDIO IN R - Audio in right (AVS)
21
VIDEO IN - Video in (AVS)
22
AVS - S-Video connection (AVS)
23
220-240V~ 50/60Hz – Mains connection
24
IR LINK - Infrared transmitter connection
(1
25
CONTROL - Rotating stand control
(1
26
RS-232C - Serial interface
(1
Connections rear side of the device
(1
Equipment and upgrade options, see page 146.
(2
The position of the aerial sockets depends on the tuner equipment.
1 2
11
9
10
12
13
26
15
4
5
23
3
24
8
19
20
22
21
18
25
6 7
14
17
16
- 12
english
Menu operation (example: TV menu)
Menus for the individual modes (TV, Radio, PIP, EPG, Teletext, MediaPortal
and DR archive/Video archive
(1
) are called with the MENU button.
The menus are displayed at the bottom of the screen. At the top you get
additional information about the selected menu item (see info display on
page 15).
In normal TV mode, without other displays.
MENU: Call TV menu.
 Select Picture,
go to the menu line below.
 Select Brightness,
go to the menu line below.
 Set Brightness.
Return to the Brightness menu line
to make other picture settings.
 Select more ... ,
OK call more ... functions.
 Select Auto format,
go to the menu line below.
 Select on / off.
END: Exit settings and close all on-screen displays.
Menu structure
You can find a diagram of the menu structure in the overview diagrams,
page 16 and after.
General information on menu operation
The operation can be divided basically into two areas: The operation of
dropdown lists (e.g. station list, favourites list, EPG etc.) and the menu
operation (TV menu etc.) for configuring your TV set.
If any questions arise during the operation of your TV set, an appro-
priate info screen can be accessed to help you by pressing the INFO
button (see also info display on page 15).
Selection list (example: Station list)
You move the cursor by pressing the ring (up,
down, left, right).
P+/P– If more selection options are available than will fit
on one screen page page ܬ is displayed. You can
scroll the pages with P+/P–.
OK The OK button calls the selection or confirms the
setting.
With the coloured buttons you can select different op-
tions depending on the application. The assignment of
the coloured keys is shown at the bottom of the screen.
INFO: Additional information about the screen page.
END: Close/exit dropdown list.
Inputs with the numeric buttons
Letters have to be entered for specific functions. When
using the remote control, press the numeric buttons just
as on a mobile phone keypad (0-9) until the desired
symbol is displayed. The available letters are printed on
the individual numeric buttons.
See page 135 for a detailed overview of the available
characters.
OK
a
z
-
P+
P–
STATION LIST
21:00-21:45 Urlaubsparadies - Toskana
HDMI3
HDMI2
HDMI1
PC IN
AVS
AV
0 VIDEO
 'DV(UVWH۽
 =')۽
 :'5.¸OQ ۽
%D\HULVFKHV)6 ۽
KUIHUQVHKHQ ۽
  3KRHQL[ ۽
  %5DOSKD۽
VDW۽
  (LQV([WUD۽
 (LQV)HVWLYDO۽
(LQV3OXV۽
 =')LQIRNDQDO ۽
 =')GRNXNDQDO ۽
 =')WKHDWHUNDQ ۽
 DUWH۽
.LND۽
OK
Scan stations
Change stations
Sort alphabetically
Switch to ...
Select station
Favourites3DJHܬ
Sound Recording Connections Settings G
PICTURE
Here you can adjust among other things: Contrast, colour, brightness,
picture adjustment, sharpness, picture format.
TV MENU
Picture
Picture adjustment ...
Operating convenience
(1
Only for TV sets that contain an integrated hard disc (DR+), a connected external hard
disc (USB recording) or that have an archive available on the network (DR streaming).
13 -
english
Operating convenience with wizards
For many settings your TV set has user guidance with wizards which
guide you through the settings step by step.
Overview of wizards
Initial installation
The initial installation wizard helps you with the initial installation and
connection of any existing equipment (see page 22).
Setting up the antenna
You enter in the antenna wizard which antenna signals are available to
you. The antenna wizard is called in initial installation (see page 22).
You can also call the antenna wizard in the TV menu under Connections
טAntenna DVB ט Antenna DVB-S
(1
or Antenna DVB-T.
Search wizard
If you want to search for new stations after the initial installation, or if you
have set up your antenna for the first time, then you can handle this task
with the help of the search wizard (see page 44).
You will find the search
wizard in the TV menu under Settings
ט Stations ט Search wizard.
Connecting sound components
The sound component wizard ensures that the components which re-
produce the TV sound are correctly registered, connected and set. It is
started automatically at the end of the initial installation wizard but can
also be called separately (see page 119). You will find the sound com-
ponents wizard in the TV menu under Connections ט Sound components.
Programming and managing recordings
The recording wizard helps you when programming a recording using video,
DVD or digital recorder (DR
+
for devices with an integrated hard disc or USB
recording for those without it) see page 126 onwards).
Software update
You can download the latest software for your TV set from the Loewe
Service site and update using a USB stick (see page 130).
Operating convenience
(1
Equipment and upgrade options, see page 146.
- 14
english
MediaPortal
The MediaPortal is the central overview page for your TV set‘s functions.
From here you can gain access to TV channels, local and online media,
digital radio and to the archive of the Digital Recorder
(1
.
Call MediaPortal
MEDIA: Call MediaPortal.
The individual media and various functions are organised
in the MediaPortal.
The number of selectable items varies depending on the
TV equipment, network connection, available media/
media servers and connected appliances.
Select menu item,
OK call.
Description of the individual functions:
TV: Here you call the TV mode of your TV set.
See page 34 for further information.
DVB radio: Use this to open the DVB radio mode of your TV set
to listen to digital radio stations over DVB.
See page 56 for further information.
Internet radio: Use this to open the Internet radio mode of your TV
set to listen to digital radio stations over the Internet.
The menu item only appears if an Internet connection
is available.
See page 58 for further information.
DR archive
(1
/ Using the DR archive, you have access to the recorded
Video archive: programmes on the integrated hard disc (for TV sets
with DR
+
) or to the recordings on a storage device
connected via USB. If the TV set does not have an
integrated hard disc or a storage device connected via
USB, the menu item Video archive will only appear if a
network connection to a Loewe TV set with a shared
DR archive is available.
See page 85 for further information.
MediaHome: Here you have access to your personal memory media,
e.g. to all memory media connected via USB or to net-
works with which your TV set is connected.
See page 64 onwards for further information.
DR+ Streaming
(1
: Here, you can switch off the TV set in the advanced
standby mode for DR
+
Streaming.
The menu item only appears if the TV set is equipped
with an integrated hard disc (DR
+
) and the DR archive
is being shared with other TV sets.
See page 106 for further information.
Index: Here you have access to the index integrated in the TV
set.
See page 15 for further information.
MediaNet: Here you have access to multimedia content in the
Internet as well as a high-quality web browser.
See page 64 onwards for further information.
MEDIA PORTAL
TV
DR+ StreamingMediaHome
DVB radio DR archive
MediaNet
Index
Internet radio
Operating convenience
(1
Depending upon which equipment the TV set has.
15 -
english
Operating convenience
The index in the TV set
The index explains the TV functions and the terms that you may be con-
fronted with when operating the TV set. You can start all the assistants
and many of the operating functions directly from here.
Alphabetic sorting is preceded by the items Menu language, Energy ef-
ficiency, Integrated features and Repeat initial installation.
Call index
MEDIA: Call MediaPortal.
Select Index,
OK call.
You will see an info text for the highlighted keyword in
the info display.
If an OK symbol appears in the marked line, this function
can be called directly with OK.
Selecting a keyword
Enter initial letters with the numeric buttons like with a
mobile phone keypad (see page 12).
or go with:
to the preceding / next letters,
from line to line,
P+/P– Flip forwards or backwards through the pages.
Example: You want to have the TV set switch off automatically at
a specific time:
Select the keyword Switch off ט Automatic, with OK you can
activate the setting and with back again.
The info display
The info display provides an info text appropriate to the on-screen display
that can assist you further with the operation of your TV set. Together
with the index it makes for a comfortable operating system.
An on-screen display is faded in.
The factory setting is that the info display is shown auto-
matically for each menu item. In this case you can tempo-
rarily hide the info texts with the INFO button.
The automatic info display can be hidden via a menu
setting. Then it can be displayed temporarily by pressing
the INFO button.
You will also be able to see that there is an info-text avail-
able from the displayed INFO symbol at the bottom right.
If an info text over several pages is available the number
of available pages and P+P– Page ܬ is displayed in the
Info window. You can scroll through the individual info
pages with P+ and P–.
Permanently display or hide the automatic info display
Once you have become familiar with how to operate the TV set, you can
switch off the automatic info display.
In normal TV mode, without other displays.
MENU: Call TV menu.
 Select Settings,
go to the menu line below.
 Select Miscellaneous,
go to the menu line below.
 Select On-screen displays,
go to the menu line below.
 Select Automatic info,
go to the menu line below: yes / no.
OK
a
z
-
OK
P+
P–
Activate Previous/next letter
6HOHFWOHWWHU3DJHܬ
INDEX
Menu language
Energy efficiency
Integrated features
Repeat initial installation
*
Access code
Automatic dimming - Room
Automatic station programming
You can select your language for operating the TV set.
Picture Sound Recording
SETTINGS
Here, you can search for stations automatically or manually as well as set
the menu language, timer functions, parental lock,
on-screen displays, etc.
TV MENU
Settings
Station ...
t
ions
- 16
english
Settings
TV menu
Picture Sound
Connections
Recording
Recording wizard
Timer list
Pre-record time
Post record time
Sound components
Antenna DVB
AV connecting settings
Miscellaneous
Picture adjustment
Contrast
Colour intensity
Colour temperature
Brightness
Sharpness
Digital Noise Control (DNC)
more...
Image
+
Active
Auto dimming - Room
Auto dimming - Video (VBD+)
Film quality improvement (DMM)
Auto format
Picture format
Move picture up/down
(1
PC IN display
(3
Search wizard
Manual adjustment
Change stations
Select/change favourites
Update station list
automatically
On-screen displays
Time and date
Software update
CA module: xxx
(1
DVB settings
HbbTV mode
Start behaviour
of HbbTV stations
Feature of the TEXT key
Check integrated
hard disk
(5
Format integrated
hard disk
(5
Format external
hard disk
Menu language
Subtitles (DVB)
Audio (DVB)
Energy efficiency
Stations
Parental lock
Timer functions
Language
Miscellaneous
Digital Link Plus
Decoder stations
(4
Remote TV switch on
via Digital Link
Assign digital audio input
Gaming mode
Switch off once
Switch off daily
One-time alarm
Wake up Mon-Fri
Wake up Sat
Wake up Sun
Wake up with
Wake up signal volume
Sound mode
Dolby PLII mode
(1
Sound adjustment
Audio commentary volume
(2
Headphone volume
Loudness
Sound-picture synchronisation
(1
more...
Loudspeaker sound
(1
Headphone sound
(1
Auto volume
AV output signal
Maximum volume
Max. switch on volume
Volume adjustment for
current station
Balance
Auto speech detection
Home Mode
Premium Mode
Shop Mode
TV menu – Overview diagram
(1
Menu items appear depending on the signal source currently selected (DVB or analogue) and/or at definite presettings in the relevant
menus. For individual details, see the corresponding chapter of the operating instructions.
(2
Menu item only appears if the audio commentary is activated and available (see page 43).
(3
Menu item can only be selected if a valid signal is present at the PC IN input.
(4
Menu item only available if a decoder has been selected as Device at connection AV (see page 112).
(5
Menu item only appears in sets with DR
+
.
Operating convenience
17 -
english
Operating convenience
Radio menu – Overview diagram
Other menus– Overview diagram
Radio menu
Sound
Stations
Timer functions
Search wizard
Manual adjustment
Change stations
Select/change favourites
Switch off once
Switch off daily
One-time alarm
Wake up Mon-Fri
Wake up Sat
Wake up Sun
Wake up with
Wake up signal volume
EPG menu
Teletext menu
Preview pages
Sub-title pages
Personal text pages
Character set
Station selection
Newsflash
Reveal
Recording wizard
Settings
Sound mode
Dolby PLII mode
(1
Sound adjustment
Headphone volume
Loudness
more...
Auto volume
Maximum volume
Max. switch on volume
Volume adjustment for
current station
Balance
Auto speech detection
Media menu
Switch on TV when marked
off
on
Station selection
Data capture
no
yes
Sorting
corresponding to station list
chronologically
Photo settings
Music settings
Video settings
Network access
Other
Reset to factory settings
Network settings
- 18
english
Connecting the TV Set
Connecting to the mains
Remove the cover for the connections.
Connect the TV set to a 220-240V mains socket:
First plug the small plug of the power cable into the mains connection
on the back of the TV and then the large mains plug into a mains socket.
Connecting antennas
Cable (analogue) / DVB-C / DVB-T antenna:
Plug the antenna cable of antenna, cable system or room antenna into
the ANT TV socket.
If you want to use analogue cables / DVB-C connection and a DVB-T
antenna together, use an external antenna switch (available from your
dealer).
Satellite antenna DVB-S:
If the TV set is equipped with a Single or Twin satellite tuner (means of up-
grade kit / conversion kit), the ANT-SAT and ANT-SAT2 sockets are available.
Depending on the used satellite system, connect a connecting cable from
the multi-switch or directly from the LNC to the ANT-SAT and ANT-SAT2
sockets of the TV set respectively.
When connecting the TV set to a single cable community antenna, con-
nect the ANT-SAT and ANT-SAT2 sockets directly to the appropriate SAT
antenna socket. Ask your dealer if required.
Installing the TV set
Installation options
Your TV set is supplied equipped with a table stand. Further set-up solu-
tions are available for purchase from your Loewe dealer. Only use Loewe
installation solutions (e.g. wall mounts, floor stand) that are included in
the Accessories – Setup possibilities chapter on page 147.
After selecting an installation option, read the appropriate assembly
instructions.
Installation notes
Choose a place for installing your TV where no bright light or sunlight
shines directly onto the screen. This could cause reflections which impair
the picture.
3 times the screen diagonal can be taken as a guide value or the view-
ing distance (e.g. for 40-inch set approx. 3m for SD signal). The viewing
distance can be reduced with an HD signal.
Set covers
Covers for rear and side connections
To remove the rear cable cover, pull the two recessed handles at the
bottom and drop down the cover.
To fit the cover, insert the lugs at the top edge of the cover into the corre-
sponding cut-outs in the rear panel and push up the cover until it snaps in.
The side cover of the TV set can also be completely removed. For this,
open it as far as it will go and gently pull on the open cover.
The cover detaches from the holder and gives free access to the con-
nection area. To replace the cover, simply push it until it latches back
into place.
DVB-T
DVB-S
an. cable /
DVB-C
Initial installation
R TV
19 -
english
Connecting the TV set to the home network
You can connect your TV set to the home network by a wired connection
(Ethernet, Powerline) or if available
(1
by a wireless radio connection
(WLAN). Please contact your specialist dealer for more information on
Powerline.
For the network adapter configuration, see page 67.
Under no circumstances may the TV set be wired and at the same time
connected by a wireless connection to the same network, e.g. router.
This may cause severe operational faults.
Example for a wired connection
Connect the LAN socket of your TV set to the LAN switch/router of your
home network with a network cable (available from your dealer).
Example for a wireless connection
(1
You can connect the TV set to your home network by a wireless radio
connection via the WLAN antenna inside the set.
Initial installation
LAN switch/router
Homeserver,
e.g. PC
TV set
Wi-Fi router
Homeserver,
e.g. PC
TV set
(1
Equipment and upgrade options, see page 146.
- 20
english
Preparing the remote control unit
Inserting or replacing batteries
Press on the embossed arrow whilst pushing the battery cover down.
Only use leak-proof micro-cells of the LR 03 (AAA) Alkali-Manganese type.
Do not use different types of batteries and old and new batteries together.
The batteries used must not be exposed to excessive heat such as sun-
light, fire or similar!
Pay attention to the correct polarity of + and – when inserting the bat-
teries.
If the batteries are too weak after longer use, the TV set prompts you
to change the batteries.
Dispose of used batteries in an environmentally friendly way (see page 148).
Push the cover back on from below after inserting the batteries.
Adjusting the remote control for operating the TV set
Press the TV button.
See page 129 for how to operate other Loewe appli-
ances and how to reprogramme the remote control
buttons.
AAA LR03
AAA LR03
Initial installation
Bundling the Cables
The cables connected to the TV set can be bundled and fixed to the back
of the housing using the Velcro cable tie provided.
Then fit the cover for the connections (see page 18).
21 -
english
Turning the set on/off
Switching the TV set to standby mode
Press the power switch on the bottom of the set .
The display in the control panel on the front lights up first orange and
then red. The set is now in standby mode.
Switching the TV on/off on the control unit
To switch the TV set into Operating mode or switch it off into Standby
mode, press the middle of the On/Off button for about 2 seconds.
Meaning of the display colour of the LEDs in the On/Off
button:
Red: Standby mode
Green: TV set is switched on
Orange: Radio mode, the device receives EPG data, timer
recording is active or archive recording via USB
is active
(1
.
Switching the set on with the remote control
Press the on/off button
or
numeric buttons
or
TV button
or
OK button – station list is called
or
MEDIA buttonMediaPortal is called.
Switching the set off with the remote control
Press the on/off button.
Before switching off the set with the mains switch, we
recommend you to switch it to standby mode.
Switch on in Radio mode
Press R on the TV control unit.
or:
Press the AUDIO button on the remote control
(radio mode, see page 56).
Display
Initial installation
Mains switch
Control unit
(1
USB recording is only possible for devices without DR+ (integrated hard disc recorder).
M
R
+
-
- 22
english
Home Mode:
The emphasis for home use is on low energy consump-
tion. The automatic dimmer is activated.
Premium Mode:
This mode optimises the settings to a brighter environ-
ment at a higher energy consumption. The automatic
dimmer is activated.
Shop Mode:
The picture settings are aligned to operation in the presen-
tation room. The automatic dimmer is deactivated. If the
ambient brightness diminishes, the energy consumption
is not reduced.
The presetting can be changed later in the TV menu under
Picture ט Picture adjustment ט Presettings (see page
38) or under Settings טEnergy efficiency.
OK proceed.
 Select Location of TV set (national defaults are
adopted).
For certain locations (e.g. Australia), there is
finally a selection screen where you can indi-
cate in which state/territory the device is being
operated.
OK Proceed.
Select the Operating mode.
Use the TV set As TV set:
Continued on the next page.
Use the TV set As monitor only:
Continued on page 33.
OK Proceed.
Energy
efficiency
(continued)
Location of
TV set
Operating
mode
First installation wizard
Initial installation after switching on for the first time
This wizard starts automatically after the set is switched on for the first
time, however it can also be called later manually in the TV index, see
Repeat initial installation on page 15.
If at least one station is locked the access code must be entered before
repeating initial installation (see Parental lock on page 60).
First installation wizard routine
The routine of the first installation wizard depend on the selected settings.
 Select language.
Selecting the language of the user guidance is the
wizard’s first step. Then you simply follow the instructions
on your TV screen.
OK Proceed.
 Select Energy efficiency.
Decide how energy efficiently you want to operate
your TV set. The value for the contrast (and thus the
brightness of the background lighting) is adapted and
the automatic dimmer activated or deactivated (see
page 38) depending on the presetting.
Initial installation
OK
OK
FIRST INSTALLATION WIZARD
Which language do you want to use for operation?
INITIAL INSTALLATION
Language
Sprache D Kieli FIN
Language GB Jezik SLO
Langue F Jazyk SK
Lingua I Lisan TR
Idioma E Språk S
Taal NL Sprog DK
Jazyk CZ Idioma P
˿̦̹̮̮̜
*5΋ΓΧΖ586
-Û]\N3/6SU§N1
Nyelv H
Proceed
OK
Premium Mode Shop Mode
INITIAL INSTALLATION
Energy efficiency
Home Mode
Proceed Back
OK
OK
OK
INITIAL INSTALLATION
Location of TV set (1/2)
A Austria GB United Kingdom
AUS Australia H Hungary
B Belgium I Italy
CH Switzerland IRL Ireland
CZ Czech Republic L Luxembourg
D Germany N Norway
DK Denmark NL Netherlands
E Spain NZ New Zealand
F France P Portugal
FIN Finland PL Poland
Proceed Back
Language
Energy
efficiency
OK
Proceed Back
INITIAL INSTALLATION
Operating mode
As TV set
As monitor only
OK
23 -
english
Network
selection
Settings
Encrypted
stations
Search
method
Supply voltage
OK
INITIAL INSTALLATION
Connect antenna cable(s)
Antenna cable(s) for: to antenna socket(s):
Antenna/cable (analogue) ANT TV ۪
DVB-T ANT TV ۪
DVB-C ANT TV ۪
DVB-S (cable 1) ANT SAT
DVB-S (cable 2) ANT SAT2
Proceed Connect/disconnect
Back
Select antenna cable.
Yellow button: Connect/disconnect antenna cable.
Antenna/cable (analogue):
analogue stations via
cable/antenna
DVB-T: digital terrestrial stations
DVB-C: digital stations via cable
DVB-S (cable 1): digital stations via satellite
DVB-S (cable 2): digital stations via satellite
The selection options for the aerials depend on the
receiver units installed or upgraded at the factory (see
also page 146).
Depending on which antenna(s) was (were) selected, the
appropriate settings are called later during the routine.
OK proceed.
 Select desired languages and alternative
languages for subtitles and audio for DVB
programmes (see page 61).
Set up audio commentary for the visually
impaired (see page 43).
OK Proceed.
Depending on which antennas (DVB-T, DVB-C, DVB-S)
were selected, the appropriate settings appear
below.
Selecting
antennas
Subtitle and
audio
languages
(DVB)
Setting options for DVB-T reception:
If you have not selected a DVB-T antenna in the antenna selection: Con-
tinue with setting options for DVB-C reception on page 24.
If several networks are available over DVB-T, you can
decide which network you want to receive your channels
from.
 Select network,
OK Proceed.
 Select and adapt settings for DVB-T reception.
You can state whether coded stations are to be searched
for in the search/update.
Select yes to save all found
scrambled stations. However, these stations can only
be received in connection with a CA module and the
appropriate Smart Card.
Handling of the CA module is
described on page 63.
If a CA module with a SmartCard is already plugged in for
the station search, all the stations which this module can
descramble are also saved when no is preset.
If you want to run the station search independently of
the channel grid, select frequency search for the search
method.
OK Proceed.
 Select supply voltage no / yes.
Use a DVB-T antenna that requires a supply voltage
(active antenna) and which is not already supplied
via a power adapter, then select yes (5V) for the
antenna’s power supply.
How to align your DVB-T antenna is described on
page 33.
OK Proceed.
OK
INITIAL INSTALLATION
Subtitle and audio languages (DVB)
Favoured subtitle language English ...
Alternative subtitle language German
Favoured audio language English
Alternative audio language German
Audio commentary off
Proceed Back
OK
Initial installation
OK
INITIAL INSTALLATION (DVB-T)
Scrambled stations no yes
Search method Channel search
Proceed
OK
yes (5V)
INITIAL INSTALLATION (DVB-T)
Antenna
Supply voltage
no (0V)
Proceed Back
OK
- 24
english
Network
selection
Settings
Encrypted
stations
Search
method
Start
frequency
Network ID
Symbol rate
QAM
modulation
Setting options for DVB-C reception:
If you have not selected a DVB-C antenna in the antenna selection: Con-
tinue with Setting options for DVB-S reception (see right hand column).
If several networks are available over DVB-C, you can
decide which network you want to receive your channels
from. The normal DVB-C settings are derived from the
selection of the location or network and do not need to
be changed. Exactly which of the following settings are
present is dependent on which network is selected.
 Select network,
OK Proceed.
 Select and adapt settings for DVB-C reception.
You can state whether coded stations are to be searched
for in the search/update.
Select yes to save all found
scrambled stations. However, these stations can only be
received in connection with a CA module and the appro-
priate Smart Card.
Handling of the CA module is described
on page 63.
If a CA module with a SmartCard is already plugged in for
the station search, all the stations which this module can
descramble are also saved when no is preset.
If you want to run the station search independently of
the channel grid, select frequency search for the search
method.
The DVB stations are only searched for in the frequency
range above the start frequency.
Only change these defaults if you are familiar with other
symbol rates and types of modulation or if you have to
specify the network ID for your cable network. In the
case of small cable networks fed directly from the satel-
lite, the rate of 6900 might have to be replaced by 6111.
Your cable provider has the information you need.
OK Proceed.
Setting options for DVB-S reception:
If you have not selected a DVB-S antenna in the antenna selection:
Continue with Setting options for all types of reception on page 30.
The normal DVB-S settings are derived from the selection
of the location and do not need to be changed in most
cases.
 Selecting the satellite system.
Specify how you receive which satellite(s) (single
satellite or type of satellite system). Ask your dealer
if required.
Reception of a single satellite via a connected LNC (LNB).
See page 25 for settings.
Reception of two different satellites with two LNCs (LNBs)
which are connected to the TV set by a 22 kHz switchbox.
See page 25 for settings.
Reception of two different satellites with two LNCs (LNBs)
which are connected to the TV set by a toneburst switch.
See page 25 for settings.
The TV set controls a DiSEqC multiswitch to which up to
four LNCs (LNBs) for different satellites are connected.
See page 26 for settings.
Select setting if the TV set is connected to a DiSEqC
single-cable system (according to EN 50494). Several Sat
receivers can be connected to one Sat cable. See page
27 for settings.
Select setting if the TV set is connected to a single-cable
system (without DiSEqC). Several Sat receivers can be
connected to one Sat cable. Unlike a DiSEqC single-cable
system there are restrictions in the range of certain recep-
tion frequencies in single-cable community systems. See
page 28 for settings.
OK Proceed
(to the appropriate page of the satellite system).
OK
INITIAL INSTALLATION (DVB-C)
Scrambled stations no yes
Search method Channel search
Start frequency 047.0 MHz
Network ID none
Symbol rate 1 (DVB-C) 6875
Symbol rate 2 (DVB-C) 6900
QAM modulation 1 64
QAM modulation 2 256
Proceed
OK
OK
INITIAL INSTALLATION (DVB-S)
Select satellite installation
Single satellite
2 satellites on 22 kHz switchbox
2 satellites on toneburst switch
Max. 4 satellites on DiSEqC multiswitch
DiSEqC one cable communal system
other communal installation
Proceed Back
Select
satellite
installation
Single
satellite
2 satellites
on 22 kHz
switchbox
2 satellites
on toneburst
switch
Max. 4
satellites
on DiSEqC
multiswitch
DiSEqC
one cable
communal
system
other
communal
installation
Initial installation
25 -
english
Setting options for the satellite system (2 satellites on 22 kHz switchbox
/ 2 satellites on toneburst switch):
 Select Satellite 1 / Satellite 2,
 select satellites from list,
OK Proceed.
 Select network.
If several networks are available over DVB-S, you
can decide which network you want to receive your
channels from.
OK Proceed.
 Set LNB frequencies.
Normally, you do not need to change the values for
high and low band, unless the LNC (LNB) of your
satellite system uses a different oscillator frequency
(important for the frequency display).
OK Proceed.
(with Setting options for DVB-S reception (continued)
on page 29).
Setting options for the satellite system (single satellite):
 Select satellite,
OK Proceed.
 Select network.
If several networks are available over DVB-S, you
can decide which network you want to receive your
channels from.
OK Proceed.
 High band no / yes.
Specify here whether the high band of the selected
satellite is to be searched in addition to the low
band.
OK Proceed.
 Set LNB frequencies.
Normally, you do not need to change the values for
high and low band, unless the LNC (LNB) of your
satellite system uses a different oscillator frequency
(important for the frequency display).
OK Proceed.
(with Setting options for DVB-S reception (continued)
on page 29).
Initial installation
OK
Proceed Back
INITIAL INSTALLATION (DVB-S)
LNB frequencies
Low band 9750 MHz
High band 10600 MHz
OK
OK
INITIAL INSTALLATION (DVB-S)
Select single satellite
Astra1 19,2°E Hellas Sat2 39°E
Hot Bird 13°E Hispasat 30°W
Astra2 28,2°E Intelsat10 02 1°W
Astra3 23,5°E Intelsat901 18°W
Atlantic Bird1 12,5 °W Nilesat 7°W
Atlantic Bird2 8°W Pan Am Sat 43°W
Atlantic Bird3 5°W Sirius2/3 5°E
Eurobird1 28,5°E
Telekom2C 5°W
Eurobird 9A 9°E
Telekom2D 8°W
Eutelsat W2 16°E Telestar12 12,5°W
Eutelsat W3A 7°E Thor2/3 0,8°W
Eutelsat W4 36°E Türksat 42°E
Proceed
OK
no
INITIAL INSTALLATION (DVB-S)
High band
yes (with 0/22 kHz)
Proceed Back
OK
OK
INITIAL INSTALLATION (DVB-S)
Satellite selection
Satellite 1 Astra1 19,2°E ...
Satellite 2 Hot Bird 13°E
Proceed Back
OK
INITIAL INSTALLATION (DVB-S)
LNB frequencies
ASTRA1 19,2°E 9750 MHz
Hot Bird 13°E 9750 MHz
Proceed Back
OK
INITIAL INSTALLATION (DVB-S)
LNB frequencies
ASTRA1 19,2°E Low band 9750 MHz
ASTRA1 19,2°E High band 10600 MHz
Hot Bird 13°E Low band 9750 MHz
Hot Bird 13°E High band 10600 MHz
Proceed Back
Select single
satellite
Network
selection
High band
LNB
frequencies
Satellite
selection
Network
selection
LNB
frequencies
(22 kHz
switchbox)
LNB
frequencies
(toneburst
switch)
OK
INITIAL INSTALLATION (DVB-S)
LNB frequencies
ASTRA1 19,2°E 9750 MHz
Hot Bird 13°E 9750 MHz
Proceed Back
OK
Proceed Back
INITIAL INSTALLATION
Network selection
other network
CanalDigitaal
OK
- 26
english
Setting options for the satellite system
(max. 4 satellites on DiSEqC multiswitch):
 Select and adapt settings for the DiSEqC multi-
switch.
The refresh rate determines how often a DiSEqC
command is output. A refresh is only necessary with
cascaded systems.
The control voltage controls the switching of the
polarisation level (horizontal/vertical) in non-DiSEqC
capable components (e.g. control of single LNBs via
DiSEqC multiswitch).
The 22kHz signal controls the switching between high
and low band in the Band setting. The Position setting
controls the selection of the satellites in non-DiSEqC
capable components.
The Toneburst controls the selection of the satellites in
non-DiSEqC but toneburst capable components with the
Position and Option settings.
OK Proceed
 Select Satellite 1 ... Satellite 4,
 select satellites from list,
OK Proceed.
 Select network.
If several networks are available over DVB-S, you
can decide which network you want to receive your
channels from.
OK Proceed.
Initial installation
OK
INITIAL INSTALLATION (DVB-S)
Repeat rate none 1 2
Control voltage 13/18V on
22kHz signal Band
Toneburst off
Proceed Back
OK
INITIAL INSTALLATION (DVB-S)
LNB frequencies
ASTRA1 19,2°E Low band 9750 MHz
ASTRA1 19,2°E High band 10600 MHz
Hot Bird 13°E Low band 9750 MHz
Hot Bird 13°E High band 10600 MHz
Eutelsat W2 16°E Low band 9750 MHz
Eutelsat W2 16°E High band 10600 MHz
Proceed Back
 Set LNB frequencies.
You do not normally need to change the values.
OK Proceed.
(with Setting options for DVB-S reception (continued)
on page 29).
LNB
frequencies
Settings
DiSEqC
multiswitch
Repeat rate
Control
voltage
22kHz signal
Toneburst
Satellite
selection
Network
selection
OK
INITIAL INSTALLATION (DVB-S)
Satellite selection
Satellite 1 Astra1 19,2°E ...
Satellite 2 Hot Bird 13°E
Satellite 3 Eutelsat W2 16°E
Satellite 4 none
Proceed Back
OK
Proceed Back
INITIAL INSTALLATION
Network selection
other network
CanalDigitaal
OK
27 -
english
Setting options for the satellite system
(DiSEqC one cable communal system):
 Select DiSEqC single cable communal installation.
OK Proceed.
 Select satellites from list,
OK Proceed.
 Select network.
If several networks are available over DVB-S, you
can decide which network you want to receive your
channels from.
OK Proceed.
 Set LNB frequencies.
Normally, you do not need to change the values for
high and low band, unless the LNC (LNB) of your
satellite system uses a different oscillator frequency
(important for the frequency display).
OK Proceed.
OK
OK
INITIAL INSTALLATION (DVB-S)
Select DiSEqC single cable communal installation
DELTA SUM-514
DELTA SUM-516
DELTA SUM-518
DELTA SUM-918
DELTA SUM-928
KATHREIN EXR-551
KATHREIN EXR-552
KATHREIN EXR-501
Proceed
OK
INITIAL INSTALLATION (DVB-S)
Satellite selection
Satellite 1 Astra1 19,2°E ...
Proceed Back
OK
Proceed Back
INITIAL INSTALLATION (DVB-S)
LNB frequencies
Low band 9750 MHz
High band 10600 MHz
OK
INITIAL INSTALLATION (DVB-S)
Manual registration (for socket ANT SAT)
Transmission channel 1 2 3 4 5 6
Transmission frequency 1284
PIN protection no
Define/change PIN 0000
Proceed
OK
Initial installation
 Select and adjust settings for the DiSEqC single
cable communal installation.
Select the desired transmission channel and the corre-
sponding transmission frequency.
If your system is designed for it, it is possible to protect
your used transmission data from use by other subscrib-
ers with a PIN.
OK Proceed.
(with Setting options for DVB-S reception (continued)
on page 29).
Manual
registration
(for socket
ANT SAT)
Transmission
channel /frequency
PIN protection
DiSEqC one
cable
communal
system
Satellite
selection
Network
selection
LNB
frequencies
OK
Proceed Back
INITIAL INSTALLATION
Network selection
other network
CanalDigitaal
OK
- 28
english
Setting options for the satellite system
(other communal installation):
 Select satellite,
OK Proceed.
 Select network.
If several networks are available over DVB-S, you
can decide which network you want to receive your
channels from.
OK Proceed.
 Select and adapt settings.
Normally, you do not need to change the values for high
and low band, unless the LNC (LNB) of your satellite
system uses a different oscillator frequency (important
for the frequency display).
If your set is connected to a single-cable system without
external voltage supply, you can connect the antenna
supply (13V or 18V / max. 450mA).
OK Proceed.
(with Setting options for all types of reception on
page 30).
Initial installation
OK
OK
INITIAL INSTALLATION (DVB-S)
Select single satellite
Astra1 19,2°E Hellas Sat2 39°E
Hot Bird 13°E Hispasat 30°W
Astra2 28,2°E Intelsat10 02 1°W
Astra3 23,5°E Intelsat901 18°W
Atlantic Bird1 12,5 °W Nilesat 7°W
Atlantic Bird2 8°W Pan Am Sat 43°W
Atlantic Bird3 5°W Sirius2/3 5°E
Eurobird1 28,5°E
Telekom2C 5°W
Eurobird 9A 9°E
Telekom2D 8°W
Eutelsat W2 16°E Telestar12 12,5°W
Eutelsat W3A 7°E Thor2/3 0,8°W
Eutelsat W4 36°E Türksat 42°E
Proceed
OK
INITIAL INSTALLATION (DVB-S)
LNB frequency 9750 MHz
Supply voltage off
Proceed Back
Select single
satellite
Network
selection
LNB
settings
LNC
frequency
Supply voltage
OK
Proceed Back
INITIAL INSTALLATION
Network selection
other network
CanalDigitaal
OK
29 -
english
Setting options for DVB-S reception (continued):
After you have made the previous settings, you should
receive picture and sound of the selected satellites (only
possible for Astra1 and HOTBIRD).
OK Proceed.
 Select and adapt settings.
If several satellites are received, the following settings
must be made for every satellite. The type of settings
available may differ depending on the selected satellite
or network.
Here you can choose whether high resolution channels
should be prioritised in the channel overview.
The menu item is only available for certain receiving
networks.
You can state whether coded stations are to be searched
for in the search/update.
Select yes to save all found
scrambled stations. However, these stations can only be
received in connection with a CA module and the appro-
priate Smart Card.
Handling of the CA module is described
on page 63.
If a CA module with a SmartCard is already plugged in for
the station search, all the stations which this module can
descramble are also saved when no is preset.
OK
FIRST INSTALLATION WIZARD
You should now receive a picture and sound from the following satellite:
ASTRA1 19,2°E C/N Level
If not, please align your dish correctly. If however it is correctly aligned and
you have an older version you can proceed with .
Proceed Back
OK
If you want to run the station search independently of
the channel grid, select frequency search for the search
method.
The symbol rates are specified by the satellite provider
and do not normally need to be changed.
OK Proceed.
(with Setting options for all types of reception on
page 30).
Initial installation
Search
method
Symbol rates
Test reception
Settings
HD station
preferred
Encrypted
stations
OK
yes
INITIAL INSTALLATION (ASTRA1 19,2°E)
HD station preferred yes
Scrambled stations no
Search method Channel search
Symbol rate 1 (DVB-S) 27500
Symbol rate 2 (DVB-S) 22000
Proceed Back
OK
- 30
english
Setting options for all types of reception:
 Select favoured signal source.
Select the signal source from a list, the station of
which is to be at the top of your station list (starting
with station slot 1).
The listed signal sources depend on the selected
antennas and, if the set is equipped with a satellite
tuner, the type of satellite system used and the
received satellites.
OK Proceed.
 Accept Logical Channel Number no / yes.
In some countries, digital channels (DVB-T, DVB-C,
DVB-S) are transmitted with a prescribed program
number per channel; these are known as “Logical
Channel Numbers” – “LCN”.
If you select yes here, these prescribed channel slots
will be used and the channels of the preferred signal
source will be sorted as per LCN. Depending on the
LCN, spaces or double channel allocations can occur
in the numbering of the channel list (
see page
31).
OK Proceed.
You will see a list of the selected settings. You can go
back in steps with the button to make any changes
to the settings.
Initial installation
OK Start automatic search.
The set now searches for TV and radio stations.
The stations found in the automatic search are divided
into the appropriate station blocks depending on the
previously selected antenna cables (signal sources).
Subsequently the stations can only be re-sorted within
these blocks.
At the beginning of the station list you will find the
block with the stations of the preferred signal source.
Any mixed sorting of stations from different signal
sources is only possible with the favourites list.
 Select bouquet.
If you have selected satellite ASTRA as the source of
DVB-S and further bouquets are available, select the
Bouquet that is valid for you.
OK Proceed.
 Select the region.
Depending on the set’s location, which signal
sources are available, the network that is selected
and the channel, it may be necessary to select the
region (possibly main region/sub region) that corre-
sponds to your TV’s location.
OK Proceed.
continued on next page
p
Favoured
signal source
Logical
Channel
Number
Overview of
settings for
station search
Select
bouquet
(only DVB-S;
if available)
Select region
(if available)
OK
OK
INITIAL INSTALLATION
Favoured signal source
DVB-T
DVB-C
ASTRA1 19,2°E
Antenna/cable (analogue)
Proceed Back
OK
FIRST INSTALLATION WIZARD
Your TV set will perform the automatic search with the following settings:
Location of your TV set United Kingdom
Signal source(s) Antenna/cable (analogue)
DVB-T
DVB-C
DVB-S
Installation satellite Single satellite (ASTRA1 19,2°E)
Favoured signal source ASTRA1 19,2°E
Start automatic search Back
OK
no yes
INITIAL INSTALLATION
Logical Channel Number
Accept Logical Channel Number
Proceed Back
OK
OK
INITIAL INSTALLATION
Select bouquet
TNTSAT C1 (0xc00c)
TNTSAT C2 (0xc00d)
TNTSAT C3 (0xc00e)
TNTSAT C4 (0xc00f)
OK
INITIAL INSTALLATION
Select region
none
Elbonia
Ruritania
31 -
english
The number of found radio stations is displayed.
OK Proceed.
The structure of the radio station list is displayed.
OK Proceed.
 Select Age-related lock.
You can specify an age limit for your TV set here.
DVB broadcasts which have an appropriate age
identification are locked and can only be watched
after entering the access code (see page 60).
In some countries, the yes/no choice is not present
for some channels, and a compulsory age check
must be entered.
OK Proceed.
 Select time / date.
If no values or no correct values have been entered
for the data and time, enter the correct values with
the numeric buttons here.
OK Proceed.
continued on next page
p
 Choose station.
If several channels have the same LCN (Logical Chan-
nel Number), then you can choose here which
channel should be saved into the channel slot.
The channels that were not selected will be sorted in
at the end of the channel list.
It may be that when searching, several channel
slots are affected and this selection process has
to occur several times.
OK Proceed.
 Select the order for the TV channels.
If you receive the HD+ range of channels, then you
can sort all these from the standard HD capable
stations to their correct places in the list of channels,
where otherwise their non-HD capable equivalents
would be.
The selection is only available if encrypted stations ט
yes has been chosen (see page 29).
OK Proceed.
The number of found TV stations is displayed.
OK Proceed.
The structure of the TV station list is displayed.
OK Proceed.
Info
radio stations
Structure radio
station list
Age-related
lock
Time and date
Station
selection if
same LCN
TV station
sorting
(only DVB-S)
Info
TV stations
Structure TV
station list
FIRST INSTALLATION WIZARD
The automatic TV station search and sorting has ended.
966 new TV station(s) has (have) been found.
FIRST INSTALLATION WIZARD: STRUCTURE OF TV STATION LIST
The TV stations found in the automatic search were divided into appropriate
station blocks according to the previously selected antenna cables (signal
sources). The stations can only be reorganised later within these blocks. The
block with the stations of your favoured signal source is at the top of the
station list.
Signal source Associated station numbers
ASTRA1 19,2°E 1- 900
DVB-C 901-1300
DVB-T 1301-1400
Antenna/cable (analogue) 1401-1500
FIRST INSTALLATION WIZARD
The automatic radio station search and sorting has ended.
336 new radio station(s) has (have) been found.
FIRST INSTALLATION WIZARD:
STRUCTURE OF RADIO STATION LIST
The radio stations found in the automatic search were divided into appropriate
station blocks according to the previously selected antenna cables
(signal sources). The stations can only be reorganised later within these blocks.
The block with the stations of your favoured signal source is at the top of the
station list.
Signal source(s) Associated station numbers
ASTRA1 19,2°E 1- 300
DVB-C 301-500
DVB-T 501-700
Antenna/cable (analogue) 701-900
OKOK
INITIAL INSTALLATION
Age-related lock
no yes
Proceed Back
OK
OK
INITIAL INSTALLATION
Station selection if same LCN
France 2 HD
BBC TWO
OK
OK
INITIAL INSTALLATION
TV station sorting
Take HD+ reception into account
Don't take HD+ reception into account
Proceed Back
OK
09
-
INITIAL INSTALLATION
Time and date
Time 09:19:14
Date 26.02.2010
Proceed Back
- 32
english
Select sound components.
This selection indicates which sound components
you want to use to hear your TV sound. Depending
on the selection, the sound component wizard starts
with which you can make further settings.
The sound component wizard is described from page
119 and can also be started at any time outside of
first time operation (TV menu under Connections ט
Sound components).
OK Proceed.
 Select the option.
With the selection, specify whether you want to
configure the available network adapter now. For
Perform now see Media menu from page 66
onwards. For Do not perform or perform later:
OK End of wizard.
Initial installation
Sound playback
via ...
Network
configuration
OK
OK
SOUND COMPONENTS
Sound playback via ...
TV speakers ۪
Speaker system
HiFi/AV amplifier
Sound projector
HiFi/AV amplifier or TV speakers (switchable)
Sound projector or TV speakers (switchable)
Proceed
OK
OK
INITIAL INSTALLATION
Network configuration
Perform now Do not perform or perform later
Proceed Back
OK
33 -
english
Positioning/aligning DVB-T antenna
If you are receiving one or more DVB-T stations with picture and sound
interference then you should change the installation location and align-
ment of the antenna. Ask your dealer to tell you which channels are used
to broadcast the DVB-T stations in your region.
In normal TV mode, without other displays.
A DVB-T station is received and selected.
MENU: Call TV menu.
 Select Settings,
go to the menu line below.
 Select Stations,
go to the menu line below.
 Select Manual adjustment,
OK call manual adjustment.
The signal source is already on DVB-T due to the station
preselection.
Position and align the antenna in such a manner that
maximum values for C/N and Level are obtained.
Blue button: Start search.
Search for DVB-T stations one after another and compare
values for C/N and Level.
Then position/align the antenna to the weakest station
so that maximum values for C/N and Level are obtained.
The value for BER should be as low as possible.
Thereafter perform an automatic search for all DVB-T
stations (see page 44).
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT
Signal source DVB-T DVB-C DVB-S C
a
Channel E05
Frequency 177.50 MHz
Bandwidth 7 MHz
Name
C/N 81
Level 80
BER 0 E-7
Store
Search
SIGNAL SOURCE
Select the area in which you want the broadcaster to search here. You can use
the button to automatically select station by station.
TV set as a monitor
You can also use your TV set just as a monitor, i.e. if you only use it with
a PC. The tuner in the TV set cannot be used in this mode.
You select the option to use the TV set just as a monitor when performing
the initial installation (see page 22).
 Select AV connection.
The selected AV connection is shown when
switching the TV on. To choose other AV connections,
see page 35.
OK Proceed.
Initial setup continues with the Time and date setup (see
page 31).
Initial installation
OK
Proceed Back
INITIAL INSTALLATION WIZARD
Please specify which AV channel your TV set should switch on to.
INITIAL INSTALLATION
AV selection
HDMI3
HDMI2
HDMI1
PC IN
AVS
AV
VIDEO
OK
- 34
english
Select station
Select station with P+ / P–
P+/P– Station up/down.
The status display with station title, progress bar, time and
sound identification signal is shown briefly (see page 42).
If Favourites are selected, you can change to the corre-
sponding station in the Favorites list using P+/P– (see
page 35).
The symbols for the sound identification are described
on page 42.
If there are additional languages or DVB subtitles for
DVB stations, then language and subtitle selection is
shown below the station display.
See also page 43: Selection possibilities for DVB
stations.
Select station using the numeric buttons
1-digit stations
Hold the numeric button down for a little bit longer: The
channel will change immediately.
or:
Press the numeric button briefly, the station changes after
2 seconds (changes immediately in case up to 9 stations
are stored).
2-digit and 3-digit stations
Press first (and second) numeric button briefly.
Hold the last numeric button down for a little bit longer:
The channel will change immediately.
or:
Press all the numeric buttons and the channel changes
two seconds after the last number was entered (up to 99
or 999 saved channels it will change immediately).
4-digit stations
Press all four numeric buttons, the station changes imme-
diately.
If Favourites are selected, you can change to the
corresponding station in the Favourites list using the
numeric buttons (see page 35). Maximum two-digit
station numbers are possible.
If you select an unoccupied station slot, the next avail-
able station is switched to.
Select station with the station list
In normal TV operation, without further displays, no
favourites selected:
OK Call Station list.
P+/P– Scroll in the pages of the station list.
 Jump to the next station block.
 Mark stations.
or:
Input the channel number.
The marker will switch to the selected station. The marked
station is shown as a small picture.
OK The marked station is called.
Blue button: Changes the sorting between numerically
and alphabetically.
.
Input the first letter (see also page 12).
The first station for the specified letters is marked.
Mark stations.
OK The marked station is called.
OK
a
z
-
P+
P–
STATION LIST
21:00-21:45 Urlaubsparadies - Toskana
HDMI3
HDMI2
HDMI1
PC IN
AVS
AV
0 VIDEO
 'DV(UVWH۽
 =')۽
 :'5.¸OQ ۽
%D\HULVFKHV)6 ۽
KUIHUQVHKHQ ۽
  3KRHQL[ ۽
  %5DOSKD۽
VDW۽
  (LQV([WUD۽
 (LQV)HVWLYDO۽
(LQV3OXV۽
 =')LQIRNDQDO ۽
 =')GRNXNDQDO ۽
 =')WKHDWHUNDQ ۽
 DUWH۽
.LND۽
OK
Scan stations
Change stations
Sort alphabetically
Switch to ...
Select station
Favourites3DJHܬ
.
OK
a
z
-
P+
P–
PIP scan
Change stations
Sort numerically
VDW۽
/LYH۽
DUWH۽
$5'۽
AVS
%D\ULVFKHV)6۽
%5DOSKD۽
BR
CNN INT
Switch to ...
Select station
Favourites
'DV(UVWH۽
'6)۽
DVD-REC
D Vierte
(LQV([WUD۽
(LQV)HVWLYDO۽
(LQV3OXV۽
(XURVSRUW۽
HDMI1
HDMI2
3DJHܬ
OK
STATION LIST
21:00-21:45 Urlaubsparadies - Toskana
Daily operation
long
short short long
all short
Sorting
numerically
Sorting
alphabetically
35 -
english
Select station via favourites list
You can save your favourite stations in 6 favourites lists (e.g. for multiple
users). Each favourites list can contain up to 99 stations. After initial instal-
lation, 10 stations from the station list are already stored in the first list.
Change the favourites list to suit your requirements (see Put together /
change favourites lists on page 49).
In normal TV mode, without other displays:
OK calls the station list.
Red button: Calls up the last used favourites list.
P+/P– Scroll in the pages of the favourites list.
Select station directly with numeric buttons. Or:
 Mark stations.
 Select other favourites list.
OK The marked station is called.
Other favourites lists can only be selected if these
contain stations.
Red button: Back to the station list.
Green button: Scan all stations of the currently selected
favourites list.
Yellow button: Change the Favourites lists, see page 49.
Explanation of the favourites lists:
The selection made with the red button (favourites list) is retained until
you switch back to the station list with the red button.
If favourites are selected, the name of the favourites list appears in the
status display after the station name after changing stations.
Explanation of the icons following station names:
ۼ DVB-T station (digital terrestrial via antenna)
۽ DVB-C station (digital via cable)
ۻ DVB-S station (digital via satellite)
۩ Coded station
v CI Plus coded station
ۮ Locked station (see Parental lock on page 60)
Selecting audio/video source
Select the AV source via the AV selection
In normal TV mode, without other displays:
Call AV selection.
 Select desired connection,
OK switch over.
If the selected AV source provides a signal (picture), it
should be visible now.
For the VIDEO selection the set switches to programme
place 0 (signal source antenna/cable (analogue), factory
setting channel E36). The TV set shows the signal of a
provider via antenna (see page 115). The channel can
be changed as required (see page 45).
Select the AV source via station list
In normal TV mode, without other displays:
OK Call the station list.
If the favourites list is displayed, switch to the
station list first.
The connections are always at the beginning of the list
in numerical sorting.
The connections are sorted into the list in alphabetical
order in alphabetic sorting.
Select connection.
OK Switch over.
OK
FAVOURITES
FavouriteList 1
'DV(UVWH ۽
=')۽
:'5.¸OQ ۽
%D\ULVFKHV)6 ۽
KUIHUQVHKHQ ۽
3KRHQL[ ۽
%5DOSKD ۽
VDW۽
(LQV3OXV۽
(LQV([WUD ۽
079۽
9,9$۽
Switch to ...
OK
a
z
-
P+
P–
STATION LIST
21:00-21:45 Urlaubsparadies - Toskana
PIP scan
Change stations
Sort alphabetically
HDMI3
HDMI2
HDMI1
PC IN
AVS
AV
0 VIDEO
 'DV(UVWH۽
 =')۽
 :'5.¸OQ ۽
%D\HULVFKHV)6 ۽
Switch to ...
Select station
Favourites
KUIHUQVHKHQ ۽
  3KRHQL[ ۽
  %5DOSKD۽
VDW۽
  (LQV([WUD۽
 (LQV)HVWLYDO۽
(LQV3OXV۽
 =')LQIRNDQDO ۽
 =')GRNXNDQDO ۽
 =')WKHDWHUNDQ ۽
 DUWH۽
.LND۽
3DJHܬ
OK
OK
AV SELECTION
HDMI3
HDMI2
HDMI1
PC IN
AVS
AV
VIDEO
Switch to ...
Daily operation
- 36
english
Adjusting the sound
Switching sound off/on
Sound off.
Sound on: Press the button again or increase the volume
using V+.
Setting the volume
V+/V– Volume louder / quieter.
The volume bar will be shown briefly if no other menu
is displayed.
Setting the Sound mode
Call Sound mode.
 Select the number of speakers you want to hear.
Additional sound settings
As long as you can still see the volume bar or the
selection of speakers for sound mode:
Call additional sound settings.
 Select sound setting (right column),
 go to the menu line below.
 Make changes.
Sound settings via the TV menu
In normal TV mode, without other displays.
MENU: Call TV menu.
 Select Sound,
go to the menu line below.
 Select desired sound setting (right column),
go to the menu line below.
 Make changes.
Explanations of the sound settings:
Select the number of speakers you want to hear. The
selection depends on the connected sound components
(from page 119) and on the transmitted audio signal.
If the number of speakers appears in brackets, the
sound of missing speakers is transmitted by the existing
speakers (virtual).
The momentarily reproduced audio signal is output with
the ideal number of speakers.
Play centre sound or mono (left/right).
Play front sound (L/R stereo).
Play front and centre sound.
Play front and surround sound.
Play front, surround and centre sound.
Play via an external HiFi amplifier. Selection is only possible
if an amplifier has been selected in the sound components
wizard (see page 124).
Here you can make Dolby Pro Logic II sound settings for
movie and music. Menu item only appears with certain
sound mode settings.
Speech, Classical, Pop, Custom music, and Custom film
sound.
Set the volume of the audio commentary to be relative to
the volume of the programme being transmitted. Should
negative values result (those in the area of -50… -1), the
audio commentary is quieter than the programme sound.
Should positive values result (those in the area of +1…
+50), the audio commentary is louder than the programme
sound. If the value 0 results, then the audio commentary
is at the exactly the same volume as the programme sound.
The menu item only appears if audio commentary is
activated (see page 43) and is offered by the current
station. Additionally, the Loudspeaker sound or Head-
phone sound must be set to normal + audio commentary
must be switched on (see next page).
Adjust the headphones volume.
Proper boost of bass and treble tones at low volume.
If the sound does not exactly match the picture, you
can correct it here. If you move to the left in the bar you
delay the sound in relation to the picture. If you move to
the right you accelerate it in relation to the picture. The
sound is adapted in time steps of 10ms each.
The Sound-picture synchronisation menu item only ap-
pears for DVB stations.
Call with OK (see next page).
Sound mode Dolby PLII mode Sound adjustmen
t
Volume
24
Daily operation
Sound mode ...
optimal
܃܃܃܃܃
Sound mode
optimal
܃
܃
܃
܃
܃
Amplifier܃
Dolby PLII
mode
Sound
adjustment
Audio
commentary
volume
Headphone
volume
Loudness
Sound-picture
synchronisation
more ...
37 -
english
Explanations of the sound settings:
For analogue stations: In the case of programmes with
twin sound, you can select separately between Mono/
Stereo or Sound 1 or Sound 2 for the loudspeakers and
the headphones.
For DVB channels: You can choose here if you wish to
listen to a special soundtrack for the visually impaired over
the speakers. This soundtrack uses an audio commentary
to describe the action taking place on-screen.
The menu item only appears if an audio commentary is
offered by the current channel.
Reduces volume differences, e.g. for advertisements that
are too loud.
You can indicate here which sound is output via the AV
socket for dual sound programmes: Sound 1 (e.g. main
language), sound 2 (e.g. foreign language), or sound 1+2
(both simultaneously).
Determining the maximum volume that can be set.
Specify the volume that is set when switching on the TV
set with the mains switch.
If the volume is higher when switching the TV set to the
standby mode than specified here, then it is reduced
automatically to the fixed maximum switching on volume
when it is turned on again.
The volume can differ according to the individual stations.
If the sound is too loud or too quiet in relation to other
stations, adjust the volume. When the menu is open, you
can select the stations one after another with P+/P– and
adjust every single station conveniently.
Set stereo balance so that the volume impression is identical
on the left and right.
If the automatic speech detection is activated, the sound
of the current programme is automatically output with
optimum comprehensibility when speech is detected.
Daily operation
more ...
Loudspeaker/
Headphone
sound
Auto Volume
AV output
signal
Maximum
volume
max. switch on
volume
Volume
adjustment for
current station
Balance
Auto speech
detection
- 38
english
Adjusting the picture
MENU: Call TV menu.
 Select Picture,
go to the menu line below.
Select the desired picture function,
 go to the menu line below.
 Make changes.
Explanations of the picture settings:
You can switch between three fixed picture setting vari-
ants and the three personal picture values that you have
set here (see page 39).
The contrast setting depends on the brightness of the
room. The brighter the surroundings the higher the
contrast should be set.
The power consumption of the TV set is directly depend-
ent on the value set here (see also page 22).
Set the colour intensity to suit your personal taste. The
colours should appear natural.
Here, you can give the TV picture a warmer or colder hue
according to your personal taste.
Set the brightness so that the black areas of the picture
only just appear black.
Here you can adjust picture sharpness to obtain the best
definition.
With active DNC (Digital Noise Control) you can eliminate
or reduce picture noise.
Call with OK (see right hand column).
Explanations of the picture settings (continuation):
Picture improvement on/off and demo mode for Image
+
Active.
If this auto dimming is active then the television picture
contrast is automatically reduced when the room bright-
ness diminishes (Optical Power Control – OPC). This will
also reduce the power consumption of the TV.
If this automatic dimming (“Video compensating Back-
light Dimming”) is active then, dependant on the current
video content, the background lighting is reduced and
concurrently the video signal is enhanced resulting in
improved contrast to your television picture. This will also
reduce the power consumption of the TV.
DMM reduces jolt in rapid picture object movements and
rolling text displays. This applies especially for movies.
Automatic detection and setting of the picture format
for Cinemascope or widescreen movies.
Set picture format (see page 39).
Move picture vertically (see page 39).
Contrast Colour intensity Colour
t
TV MENU
Picture
Picture adjustment
Personal settings (TV digital) ...
Daily operation
Image
+
Active
Auto dimming
- Room
Auto dimming
- Video (VBD+)
Film quality
impr. (DMM)
Auto format
Picture format
Move picture
up/down
Picture
adjustment
Contrast
Colour intensity
Colour
temperature
Brightness
Sharpness
Digital Noise
Control (DNC)
more ...
39 -
english
Move picture vertically
In normal TV mode without other displays.
Move picture up/down.
To show subtitles or news tickers which have been cut
off, the picture can be moved up or down in the picture
formats Panorama and Zoom (not with high resolution
signal) with the arrow buttons .
Presettings / Personal settings for picture adjustment
MENU: Call TV menu.
 Select Picture,
go to the menu line below.
 Select Picture adjustment,
go to the menu line below.
 Select Presettings or Personal settings.
 For presettings, go to the menu line below.
 Select the desired presetting for the picture.
OK Confirm selection.
Explanations for Picture adjustment:
If you select Presettings, the picture settings for the signal input group
currently active are set to predefined values. See Glossary for an explana-
tion: Signal input groups.
Your own settings for contrast, colour intensity, colour temperature,
brightness, sharpness and digital noise suppression are saved in the
personal values. At the same time, you have your own personal values
for each signal input group.
All picture and sound adjustments can be reset to the default values in
one step for all signal input groups in the index of the TV set under Reset
picture/sound or
Factory settings picture/sound.
Personal settings (TV digital)
TV MENU
Picture
Picture adjustment
Presettings (TV digital)
Home Mode
...
Selecting the picture format
The picture format cannot be altered if an HbbTV
application
(1
is active (see page 82).
Press the Picture format button until the desired picture
format is set or press
 to select the desired picture format.
The Panorama picture format can be set between
proportionally correct and format filling display. Black
bars are visible on the left and right of the picture in
the proportionally correct display.
Switch: Keep the M button on the TV pressed, at the
same time, press the Picture format button on the remote
control briefly.
Reset: Press the same button combination again.
Explanations of the picture formats:
The setting options depend on the transmitted picture
content.
16:9 Proportionally correct display of 16:9 broadcasts.
4:3 Proportionally correct display of 4:3 broadcasts.
Panorama Proportionally correct or format filling display (as-delivered
state) of 4:3 broadcasts on the 16:9 screen. Station logo
and subtitles remain visible.
See above for switching the Panorama mode.
Zoom Proportionally correct display. Maximum picture magni-
fication.
PALplus Is a 4:3-compatible 16:9 picture broadcast supplied by
the station which is detected automatically.
If a high resolution video signal is displayed on the TV set
or fed in via the interfaces PC IN, HDMI1, HDMI2 or
HDMI3, the picture formats 16:9 PC, 16:9 TV, 16:9 Zoom,
4:3 PC, 4:3 TV and 4:3 Zoom can be set.
In the PC formats, the complete picture content will be
shown. In the TV formats a small part of the picture is
cropped. This may be necessary to hide possible interfer-
ence at the edge of the picture, which arises from the
signal supplied.
Panorama
Picture format
Zoom 16:9
4:3
Bild vert. verschieben
2
Move picture up/down
Daily operation
(1
Depending on the settings selected.
- 40
english
Button functions
Every operating mode of the TV set (TV, Radio, MediaPortal, Teletext,
EPG, PIP, and DR archive/Video archive
(1
) has its own menu and own
functions for the coloured buttons.
The function of the coloured buttons is shown at the bottom of the
menus and wizards. Below, some of the function are listed which you
need in TV mode for the daily handling of your TV set.
Coloured buttons in TV mode
In normal TV mode, without other displays.
Red button: Freeze on/off.
If an interactive data service is available (e.g. HbbTV see
page 82 or MHEG-5 see page 84), the red button will
load or start the corresponding application.
Green button: Open the Teletext functions menu
(2
.
You can select
Subtitles
and your Personal text pages via
the Teletext functions menu. The operation of subtitles
depends on the station selected.
Subtitles for analogue stations:
 Select Subtitles,
go to the menu line below.
 Select the size of the teletext subtitles,
OK show teletext subtitles
(display only if subtitles are available).
END: Teletext subtitles off or select off in menu.
Subtitles for DVB stations:
If the DVB station does not provide any subtitles, the
menu item Subtitles is greyed out and cannot be
accessed with OK.
The DVB subtitles can also be selected via the status
display (see page 43).
 Select Subtitles,
OK call.
 Select subtitle mode,
OK show/hide subtitles.
Coloured buttons in TV mode (continuation)
Green button: Open the Teletext functions menu.
 Select Personal text pages,
OK call.
 Select text page,
OK view.
If only one text page is defined, no list will be shown
and the Teletext page will be opened immediately. To
define your personal text pages, see page 55.
Yellow button: Go to the last viewed station.
Use this button to quickly switch back and forth between
two stations.
Blue button: Show programme info.
The programme info of the following programme is
displayed additionally for DVB stations.
Explanation of the symbols in the programme information:
۳ Programme in 16:9 picture format
ܦ Programme in high picture definition (HDTV)
۲ Programme with Dolby-Digital sound
۴ Broadcast of subtitles for the deaf and hard of hearing
۵ Programme with youth protection (see Parental
lock
- Age-related lock on page 60).
The symbols may also appear in combinations.
Subtitles
Personal
text
pages
Detailed info (Teletext) Programme preview (
E
PROGRAMME INFO 14:43
Detailed info (EPG)
1 ARD Stereo
14:30-15:15 Urlaubsparadies Toskana
Urlaubsparadies Toskana
۳
15:15-15:45 Reiseziele dieser Erde
Ägypten
OK
Personal text pages
TELETEXT FUNCTIONS
Subtitles
off ...
TELETEXT FUNCTIONS
Subtitles Personal text pages
OK
TELETEXT FUNCTIONS
Personal text pages
OK
btitles Subti
t
OK
PERSONAL TEXT PAGES
arte 112 News
ZDF 200 Sport
ARD 170 Wetter
-------- --- ----------
-------- --- ----------
-------- --- ----------
View
OK
Daily operation
(1
Only for TV sets that contain an integrated hard disc (DR
+
), a connected external hard
disc (USB recording) or that have an archive available on the network (DR streaming).
(2
If the audio commentary is active, this button will have other functions, see page 43.
41 -
english
Permanent display of time
Press twice in rapid succession:
Time is shown/hidden permanently.
The permanent display of the time can also be set in the
TV menu under Settings ט Miscellaneous ט On-screen
displays ט Permanent clock display (see page 62).
The display position of the time depends on the selected
setting in the On-screen displays menu (ex-factory: bot-
tom). See page 62 for how to change the display
position.
Operation without remote control
Changing the station on the TV set
+ / – Station up/down.
Switching radio on or off or switching to radio
R Radio on or switch between TV and Radio.
Calling the TV menu on the set
M Call Direct control on TV set menu,
– / + select function.
M or R Go to the menu line below,
– / + make changes.
M Move up one menu line,
– / + select other function.
Explanations of the settings:
Switch between TV and radio operation.
Select AV interface.
Set volume.
Set brightness.
Set contrast.
The power consumption of the TV set depends directly
on the value set here (see also page 22).
Set picture format (see also page 39).
Select station +/-.
The Service menu item is provided for service purposes
by dealers only.
۫
Daily operation
AV selection Volume Brightness Con
DIRECT CONTROL ON TV SET
Operating mode
TV ...
Key M: Keys -/+:
Operating
mode
AV selection
Volume
Brightness
Contrast
Picture format
Station
Service
- 42
english
Explanations of the symbols in the status display:
General symbols:
HbbTV mode is on and HbbTV applications are available
Transmitted audio signal:
0RQR Mono audio transmission analogue
VRXQG Two-sound transmission (Sound1/Sound2) analogue
1+1 Two-sound transmission (Sound1/Sound2) digital
6WHUHR Stereo sound transmission analogue
6WHUHR$$& Stereo sound transmission (HEAAC)
ܐ Stereo sound transmission digital (PCM)
۲
'LJLWDO Dolby Digital sound transmission (DD)
۲
'LJLWDO
+
Dolby Digital+ sound transmission (DD
+
)
۲'LJLWDO$$&
+
Dolby Digital AAC
+
sound transmission (HEAAC)
GWV dts sound transmission
03(* MPEG sound transmission
۲
3/,, Dolby Pro Logic II sound transmission
۲
965HI Dolby Virtual Speaker Reference display
۲
96:LGH Dolby Virtual Speaker Wide display
Transmitted audio channels:
܂ DD / dts 1.0 / mono
܆ DD / dts / MPEG 2.0
܉ DD / dts 3.0
܈ DD / dts 4.0
܋ DD / dts 5.0
܍ DD / dts 2.1
܅ DD / dts 3.1
܏ DD / dts 4.1
ۿ DD / dts 5.1
Selected listening mode:
܃ Play centre sound or mono (left/right).
܃ Play front sound (L/R stereo).
܃ Play front and centre sound.
܃ Play front and surround sound.
܃ Play front, surround and centre sound.
If the number of speakers appears in brackets, the
sound of missing speakers is transmitted by the exist-
ing speakers (virtual). The Dolby Virtual speaker (VS
mode) developed by Dolby is activated for the virtual
sound reproduction.
Status display
In normal TV mode, without other displays.
INFO: Show status display.
In the upper two lines, you will see the number and name
of the station, the title and transmission time of the
programme currently showing (if available) and the sound
identification signal.
The bar (if available) indicates the progress of the current
programme.
If information about the current programme is available,
this can be called by pressing the INFO button again; in
this case the button on the right is displayed.
A menu (see page 43), the time and, if activated, the
alarm time and switch-off time appear at the bottom of
the screen depending on the DVB station.
The status bar is also shown automatically every time you
change channels.
The status bar is hidden automatically at the end of the
display time (see page 62 for setting).
If you want to hide the status bar manually before the dis-
play time ends, you can only do this with the END button.
 'DV(UVWHۿ۲'LJLWDO܃
 7RVNDQD
/DQJXDJHVRXQG 6XEWLWOH
۫$ODUPWLPH6OHHSWLPHU
TEXT
Daily operation
43 -
english
Other setting options for DVB stations
You can make general presettings for DVB stations under TV menu ט
Settings ט Miscellaneous ט DVB settings.
Here you can preset whether a subtitle is always to be
displayed as soon as it is offered by the station. A special
subtitle for impaired hearing can also be selected.
Subtitles are not offered by all stations. Many stations only
broadcast subtitles by teletext.
You can activate a special sound for viewers with impaired
vision here (see below).
Select the DVB character set so that the title of the broad-
cast of your favourite received station or the texts of your
CA module are displayed correctly.
Further explanations of the audio commentary
You can set the system here to always play an additional special
soundtrack for the visually impaired whenever one is available. This
soundtrack uses an audio commentary to describe the action taking
place on-screen. The function can be activated and deactivated in the
TV menu (see above) the first time that it is used (see page 23), or by
holding down the green button for a few seconds.
See chapter Adjusting the sound on pages 36 and 37 for more
information on how to configure the audio commentary.
Audio commentary status prompt
Audio commentary is activated (see above).
A quick press of the green button will tell you if audio commentary is
available.
If audio commentary is available:
You will see a corresponding message on the screen. You will also hear
a beep lasting approximately 1.5 seconds.
If audio commentary is not available:
You will see a corresponding message on the screen. You will also hear
three short beeps.
Selection possibilities for DVB stations
Additional selection options are shown in the status display for the
individual programmes (depending on the DVB programme provider).
If during the status display you press one of the coloured
buttons or the TEXT button then the associated selection
menu will be displayed.
The selection line is also displayed automatically when
a new broadcast with different options to the previous
broadcast begins or when you switch stations.
The selection menus are only available as long as the
status display is shown. However you can call them again
by pressing the INFO button.
Red button:
Channel selection for multi-channel providers
Green button: Language/sound
The sound formats on offer and their
designations depend on the programme
being broadcast.
Yellow button: Time selection
Blue button: CA module selection
The CA module selection only appears
when two CA module are plugged in,
which are both able to descramble the
encrypted station.
In this case, you can choose which of the
two CA modules should descramble the
station.
TEXT: Subtitles
The subtitles available depend on the
programme being broadcast
Subtitle
mode
Audio
commentary
DVB character
set
Daily operation
- 44
english
TV stations
Various options for managing stations are available via the TV menu. For
example the description for TV stations. For radio stations the same applies,
except that the Radio menu is called in Radio mode (see also page 56).
Station management is not possible if a programmed timer recording
is still pending.
If at least one station is locked the access code must be entered before
Search/Update (see Parental lock on page 60).
Search/update stations – Search wizard
In the search/update with the search wizard, new stations are searched
for which have not yet been stored.
You have to repeat the initial installation (see page
22) and automatically search for new ones if you
want to delete all the existing stations and automati-
cally search for new ones.
MENU: Call TV menu.
 Select Settings,
go to the menu line below.
 Select Stations,
go to the menu line below.
 Select Search wizard,
go to the menu line below.
In the upper info text the current search settings will now
be displayed:
If you want to change these search settings:
 Select Change search settings,
OKwizard prompts search settings.
If you agree with these settings:
 Select Start search/update,
OKstart search.
Red button: Abort current search/update.
Explanations of some search settings:
Select the country for country-specific defaults and
station sorting.
Select antenna/cable (analogue), DVB-T, DVB-C or DVB-S
(1
here depending on which signal source you want to search
for new stations.
A configuration of DVB-T and DVB-S
(1
antennas can also be
called by the green button (see also page 23 and 24).
Calling up the DVB antenna configuration causes the
Change search settings dialogue to be quit. You must
call up the dialogue again after finishing the configu-
ration.
With selection of set location the conventional TV
standard/colour standard is the default. This should only
be changed if stations with other standards are to be
searched.
You can state whether coded stations are to be searched
for in the search/update.
Select yes then coded stations
are also searched for. However, these stations can only
be received in connection with a CA module and the ap-
propriate Smart Card.
Ask your dealer which Smart Card
you need to receive certain stations. Handling of the CA
module is described on page 63.
If you want to run the station search independently of
the channel grid, select frequency search for the search
method.
With the selection of set location the conventional set-
tings will be preset. Only change this if you know other
symbol rates and modulation types or if you have to
specify the network ID for your cable network (informa-
tion available from your cable network provider).
If you want to run the station search independently of
the channel grid, select frequency search for the search
method.
If you want to run the station search independently of
the channel grid, select frequency search for the search
method.
The symbol rate is specified by the satellite provider and
normally does not need to be adjusted.
Start search/update
SEARCH WIZARD
Your TV carries out the update of the station list (search for new stations; delete
stations no longer broadcast) with the following settings:
Location of TV set United Kingdom
Signal source DVB-C
TV MENU
Settings
Station
Search wizard
Change search settings
OK
Managing stations
(1
Equipment and upgrade options, see page 146.
Set location
Signal source
Antenna/cable:
TV/colour
standard
Encrypted
stations
DVB-T
Search method
DVB-C
Settings
DVB-S
Settings
45 -
english
Search for/update stations – handling of new and no longer found stations
The number of new stations found is displayed after the automatic search/
update has been completed.
OK List of new stations found
 Select station.
Yellow button: Mark / unmark station
Blue button: Mark / unmark all
OK saves the selected stations.
Afterwards, a list of the stations which are saved but
which are temporarily not broadcasting or no longer exist
is displayed, if available.
The number of the memory location used is displayed in
front of the station. Please select the stations you really
want to delete.
 Select station.
Yellow button: Mark / unmark station
Blue button: Mark / unmark all
OK deletes the selected station.
END: Exit the search wizard.
Search/update station – manual search / settings
If you want to adapt the parameters of an existing station, first select
the appropriate station.
MENU: Call TV menu.
 Select Settings,
go to the menu line below.
 Select Stations,
go to the menu line below.
 Select Manual adjustment,
OKcall input box.
You can enter or edit the station data in the following
lines:
Or:
Blue button: Starts Search and searches for next station.
Red button: Stores station.
Only stations for the selected signal source can be
saved which do not yet exist in the station list.
Stations which already exist in the station list for the
selected signal source are displayed with their station
numbers and names on a grey background. These
stations can only be overwritten with the red button.
Explanations of some search settings:
Various settings are possible depending on the selected signal source.
Some settings have already been explained in the initial installation (see
page
22
onwards).
Selection of range in which you want to search for the
station.
Direct input of channel.
Direct input of station frequency.
Input of station TV standard.
Ask your dealer in this regard.
Input of the station colour standard.
Ask your dealer in this regard.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT
Signal source Cable (analogue) DVB-T DVB-C
Channel S21
Frequency 303.25 MHz
Name KiKa
TV standard B/G
Col. standard Automatic
Store
Search
OK
P+
P–
OK
Proceed Mark/unmark station
3DJHܬ Mark/unmark all
SEARCH FOR/UPDATE STATION
Newly found stations
:'5.¸OQ ۽
(LQV)HVWLYDO۽۪
0'56$1+$/7 ۽۪
7HVW5۽۪
$5'2QOLQH.DQDO ۽
$5'7(67۽۪
$5'7(67۽
0'57+5,1*(1 ۽۪
.L.D۽۪
SEARCH WIZARD
All statiRQVPDUNHGZLWKD۪DUHVDYHG
Note: The newly found stations which you have already deleted
DUHQRWPDUNHG
OK
P+
P–
OK
Proceed Mark/unmark station
3DJHܬ Mark/unmark all
SEARCH FOR/UPDATE STATION
Stations no longer found
 6 ۽۪
 7HVW5۽۪
 7927(;7 ۽۪
 $5'2QOLQH ۽
SEARCH WIZARD
The following stored stations were no longer found because they are not
currently broadcasting a programme or no longer exist. Please mark those
you want to delete completely. Those not marked are retained.
Managing stations
Signal source
Channel
Frequency
TV stand.
Col. standard
- 46
english
Change, delete, move, rename, restore station
Change station can also be called via the station list
(page 34).
If at least one station is locked the access code must
be entered before changing stations start-up (see
Parental lock on page 60).
In some TV broadcasting networks (e.g. FreeView) you
are not allowed to move or rename stations. Use
Favourites instead.
Call TV menu.
 Select Settings,
go to the menu line below.
 Select Stations,
go to the menu line below.
 Select Change stations,
OKcall list of stations.
In this menu you can delete, move, rename or restore
stations.
Depending on the signal source and the preset options,
some functions may not work for certain channels (e.g.
move channel, rename channel).
The following section describes how to proceed if you
wish to delete, move, rename or restore channels.
09
-
P+
P–
CHANGE STATIONS
21:00 - 21:45 Urlaubsparadies - Toskana
1 ARD
2 ZDF
3 SAT.1
4 D Vierte
5 RTL
6 VOX
7 S-RTL
8 N-TV
9 DSF
10 EinsPlus
11 9Live
12 RTL2
13 WDR 3
14 BR
15 HR
16 MDR 3
17 KIKA
18 PHOENIX
19 BR-ALPHA
20 3SAT
21 KABEL 1
 'DV(UVWH۽
 =')۽
Restore stations
Move
Select station
Delete
3DJHܬ
Managing stations
Delete station
Change station is opened (see left-hand column).
or numeric buttons:
Select the appropriate station.
Red button: Starts Delete station.
Select several stations to be deleted if necessary,
OK to execute the delete or
Red button to cancel deletion.
Move station / Change order
Change station is opened (see left-hand column).
Stations can only be resorted within the signal source
block.
You cannot use these functions to sort through channels
with LCN. In this case, the Move function is greyed out.
or numeric buttons:
Select the appropriate station.
Yellow button: Starts Move station.
 Mark several stations if needed,
OK selection ended,
Select insertion position from which the selected
stations are to be inserted,
OK to execute the move or
Yellow button to cancel the move.
09
-
P+
P–
OK
OK
CHANGE STATIONS
Move
21:00 - 21:45 Urlaubsparadies - Toskana
1 ARD
2 ZDF
3 SAT.1
4 D Vierte
5 RTL
6 VOX
7 S-RTL
8 N-TV
9 DSF
10 EinsPlus
11 9Live
12 RTL2
13 WDR 3
14 BR
15 HR
16 MDR 3
17 KIKA
18 PHOENIX
19 BR-ALPHA
20 3SAT
21 KABEL 1
 'DV(UVWH۽
 =')۽
Finish mark
Cancel move
Select station
Mark more?
3DJHܬ
47 -
english
Rename station
Change station is opened (see page 46).
DVB stations for which the station name is also broad-
cast cannot be renamed. In this case, the Rename
function is hidden.
or numeric buttons:
Select the appropriate station.
Blue button: Starts Rename station.
Under the first letter of the name you will see a line
indicating the current input position.
Input position one character to the right (also for
blanks).
Input position one character to the left.
Input the letters one after another. When using the
remote control, press the numeric buttons just as on a
telephone keypad until the desired symbol is displayed.
The available letters are printed respectively on the
buttons. See page 135 for a detailed overview of the
available characters.
Green button: Switch upper/lower case letters.
Yellow button: Deletes the character before the input
position.
Blue button: Cancel rename.
OK to save new name.
OK
P+
P–
OK
CHANGE STATIONS
Restore deleted stations
3sat
KIKA
ZDF
=')LQIRNDQDO ۻ
=')GRNXNDQDO ۽
=')LQIRNDQDO ۽
(XURVSRUW ۼ
121$0(ۼ
RTL
Phoenix
BRalpha
NDR FS HH
Restore
Cancel restore
'DV(UVWHۻ
'DV9LHUWH ۻ
57/7HOHYLVLRQ ۻ
9Live
:'5.¸OQ ۼ
VOX
3UR6LHEHQ ۽
6XSHU57/ ۽
n-tv
DSF
RTL2
KABEL1
3DJHܬ
Restore stations
Stations which have been deleted from the station list can be restored.
Change station is opened (see page 46).
The restore station function can only be used if there
are deleted channels present.
Green button: Starts Restore stations.
Select station,
OKstation is restored.
The restored station is sorted in according to its signal
source at the end of the respective signal block.
a
z
-
P+
P–
a
z
-
CHANGE STATIONS
Move
21:00 - 21:45 Urlaubsparadies - Toskana
1 ARD
2 ZDF
3 SAT.1
4 D Vierte
5 RTL
6 VOX
7 S-RTL
8 N-TV
9 DSF
10 EinsPlus
11 9Live
12 RTL2
13 WDR 3
14 BR
15 HR
16 MDR 3
17 KIKA
18 PHOENIX
19 BR-ALPHA
20 3SAT
21 KABEL 1
 'DV(UVWH۽
 =')۽
Delete one character
Cancel rename
Select station
A...Z a...z
3DJHܬ
Managing stations
- 48
english
Managing stations
Automatically update the station list
If yes is selected to the option Accept Logical Channel Number when the
initial setup is performed, then the network provider may change its
station list. You can Allow or Block the station list update on the TV set.
Allow/Block updates
Call TV menu.
 Select Settings,
go to the menu line below.
 Select Stations,
go to the menu line below.
 Select Update station list automatically,
go to the menu line below.
 Select the settings.
If the station list is not up to date, it will be updated
automatically, provided the option Allow is selected.
Updating the station list
A message appears whenever the TV is switched on if the network pro-
vider changes their station list.
When updating,
Allow
must be selected.
 Select the desired procedure.
The station list will be immediately updated. Normally
this occurs in the background without interfering further
with the TV‘s operation. In exceptional cases, it is
however possible that during this process an automatic
station change may be necessary.
The station list will be updated the next time the TV set
is switched off into standby mode.
Updating the station list will be postponed to a later date.
When the TV set is switched on and off, the update
message will appear again.
OK Confirm the selection.
at once
After switch
off to standby
later
Block
TV MENU
Settings
Stations
Update station list automatically
Allow
OK
OK
Update station list
at once
After switch off to standby
later
Proceed
HINT
Because a network provider has changed its station list, it has to be adapted
on your TV set too. Please specify when you wish to do this.
49 -
english
Put together / change favourites lists
Each favourites list can contain up to 99 stations. You can put together
the favourites lists to suit your requirements (e.g. topic lists). Other persons
using this TV set can create their own favourites lists.
The favourites lists also have the advantage that the stations of different
signal sources can be stored in the order you wish.
Change favourites can also be called via the favourites
list (page 35).
MENU: Call TV menu.
 Select Settings,
go to the menu line below.
 Select Stations,
go to the menu line below.
 Mark Select/change favourites,
OKcalls list of all stations and last active favourites list.
Green button: Select the next favourites list.
Rename favourites list
Favourites list (right column) must be selected.
If not, change the list with .
Blue button: Starts Rename favourites list.
Enter new name (same procedure as for rename station,
see page 47).
OK to save new name.
Add station to favourites list
All stations (left column) must be selected.
If not, change the list with .
P+/P– Scroll in the pages of the station list if necessary.

Mark station or select station with the numeric buttons
(
for alphabetical station sorting enter the initial
letter
) which is to be transferred as a favourite to the
favourites list.
OK transfers the station to the favourites list.
The new station is inserted at the end of the favourites
list. Proceed in the same manner with additional
stations.
Delete station from favourites list
Favourites list (right column) must be selected.
If not, change the list with .
Mark station to be deleted.
OK
Removes the marked station from the favourites list.
or:
Red button: Starts Clear favourite list.
OK confirms clear favourites list.
Move / change order of stations in the favourites list
Favourites list (right column) must be selected.
If not, change the list with .

Mark station to be moved.
Yellow button: Starts Move station.
Select insertion position at which the marked
station is to be inserted.
The insertion position can also be selected with
the numeric buttons.
OK to execute the move.
09
-
P+
P–
SELECT/CHANGE FAVOURITES
All stations Stations of FAV.LIST1
Next favourite list
Sort alphabetically
HDMI3/DVI
HDMI2/DVI
HDMI1/DVI
PC IN
AVS
DVD-REC
0 VIDEO
 'DV(UVWH۽
 =')۽
 :'5.¸OQ ۽
%D\HULVFKHV)6 ۽
Select station
Clear favourite list
'DV(UVWH۽
=')۽
:'5.¸OQ ۽
%D\ULVFKHV)6 ۽
KUIHUQVHKHQ ۽
3KRHQL[۽
%5DOSKD ۽
VDW۽
(LQV([WUD ۽
(LQV)HVWLYDO ۽
6$7۽
57/۽
3DJHܬ
OK
Managing stations
- 50
english
Picture in Picture (PIP)
The concurrent display of two different images is referred to as Picture
in Picture.
Restrictions for the PIP mode:
The selection and combination options for main screen/PIP screen
basically depend on the device variant (with/without DR
+
) and the
number of receivers (tuners) of the TV set (see Equipment variants
on page 146).
In the case of TV sets that are only equipped with one DVB-T/C single
tuner, the PIP operation is restricted to AV-PIP (one DVB TV station
and one AV source). If a satellite tuner is fitted subsequently in these
devices, PIP operation is also possible from a digital satellite picture
and picture via antenna/cable (analogue or DVB-T/C).
A concurrent representation of two MPEG4 coded HDTV signals is
not possible.
A concurrent representation of two coded stations is not possible.
Simultaneous display of two analogue stations is not possible.
Picture change and station selection is restricted during recording.
PIP Mode is not accessible as long as an HbbTV application is active
(see page 82).
The PIP operation distinguishes between two functionalities:
iPIP Only in sets with a DR
+
: The TV picture is moved to the
PIP picture when you start the iPIP mode. The station of
the TV picture is now freely selectable. When you exit
iPIP mode the PIP picture becomes the TV picture again
and the PIP window is closed.
An orange frame around the PIP picture shows the iPIP
functionality
Standard PIP Stations freely selectable and changeable for PIP and TV
picture (coloured buttons have PIP-specific meaning, see
right hand column).
A green frame around the PIP picture indicates that the
station selection affects the PIP picture. A white frame
means that the operation refers to the main picture. If the
frame is blue, the station play is active in the PIP picture.
iPIP
Starting and ending iPIP mode
On pressing the PIP button the currently displayed TV
picture becomes the PIP picture. You can select other
stations for the TV picture and still keep an eye on the
PIP picture. You can temporarily shift commercials or
programme sections to the PIP picture in this way.
The PIP picture becomes the TV picture again (PIP off).
Standard PIP
Starting and ending standard PIP mode
Show/hide PIP.
Select the PIP picture
The frame is green,
if not, press the green button.
Select the station as usual.
Select the station for the main picture
The frame is white,
if not, press the green button.
Select the station as usual.
Function of the coloured buttons in standard PIP functionality
The frame is green,
if not, press the green button.
Yellow button: Switches contents of TV picture and PIP
picture.
Blue button: Start/stop PIP scan in the PIP picture.
Picture in Picture
=')۷
17.00-18.30 Flora & Fauna
51 -
english
Change position of Small PIP
Other than the status line, which may possibly be
displayed, no other display is shown on the screen:
Move the PIP into a corner of the screen.
The position of the small picture can also be selected
under Position in the PIP menu (see left hand column).
Switch PIP functionality (iPIP / Standard PIP)
PIP menu is opened.
 Select Functions,
go to the menu line below.
 Select iPIP or Standard PIP.
Configure Picture in Picture (PIP) mode
You can set different parameters for the picture in picture mode in the
PIP menu.
Open the PIP menu
PIP mode started,
if not, press PIP button.
In Standard PIP functionality:
The frame is green,
if not, press the green button.
MENU: Call PIP menu.
Explanations of the setting options in the PIP menu:
Note restrictions for the PIP mode (see page 50).
You can determine the position of the small picture here
(upper left, bottom left, bottom right, upper right).
Without a screen display the position can also be changed
with the menu control buttons (see right hand column).
You can switch the PIP functionality between iPIP and
Standard PIP (also see right hand column).
See page 50 for a more detailed explanation of the
PIP functionality.
TYP
Sie können wählen, ob Sie Ihr Zweitbild als überblendetes Kleinbild oder als
ein die rechte Schirmhälfte füllendes Bild ("Split Screen") sehen wollen.
Standard PIP
TV MENU
Settings
PIP
Functions
iPIP
Picture in Picture
Position
Functions
Functions
POSITION
Here, you can determine the position of the small picture, top left, bottom left,
top right or bottom right. Without a screen display you can also do this with the
"up", "down", "left" and "right" buttons.
TV MENU
Settings
PIP
Position
upper right ...
- 52
english
Adjusting the programme list
The selection is at the top of the specifications,
if not, press the blue button.
Select Date, Time, Stations or Topics.
Select defaults within the respective line.
Example If you are searching for the next news, select today’s date,
17:00 for example for the time, all for station and News
for topics. Then you get a list of all news programmes
from 17.00 h onwards in the programme list below it.
The type of list of programmes in the programme list
depends on the setting of the sorting in the EPG menu
(page 53).
Time entry If the line Time is selected, then you can enter the time
after which the programmes will be displayed, via the
numeric buttons of the remote control. The broadcasts
are sorted according to the order of the station list within
the selected time window.
Stations If a favourites list has been selected, only the programmes
of stations from the favourites list are displayed in the
programme list. A single station can be selected with
...”. The Select single station window is opened. After
selection, only programmes of the selected single station
are displayed.
Hint Before pressing the blue button to leave the upper selec-
tion lines, select one of the preceding lines. If you then
switch back to the programme list, you can change this
menu line with , without having to leave the pro-
gramme list. If you have marked Time, then you can enter
the time, after which the programmes will be displayed,
with the numeric buttons of the remote control.
Electronic Programme Guide – EPG
EPG stands for Electronic Programme Guide and provides you with
on-screen programme details. With the system, as with a printed pro-
gramme guide, you can learn about the current programme. In addition
programmes can be sorted according to certain topics, memorised, and
also recordings can be programmed.
Starting and ending EPG
EPG: Switch EPG on / off.
EPG is only available for DVB stations.
The first time you start EPG, an assistant will guide you
through the necessary presettings.
The display of the programme guide is divided into two
branches. The specifications in the upper section limit
the scope of the stations displayed in the lower section.
Blue button: Switches between the upper default lines
Date, ..., Topics and the lower programme list.
Switching and memorizing with the programme list
You are in the lower programme list,
if not, press the blue button.
 Select station.
OK View / Memorise.
View The programme is in progress. The TV set switches to the
marked programme.
Memorise The programme has not started yet and is memorised. A ۪
will appear in front of the station title. The TV will ask at the
beginning of a programme if it should change the channel
or switch on from the stand-by mode if the corresponding
option of the EPG menu is activated (see page 53).
Programmes can also be noted by the timer overview
(see page 127).
OK
OK
a
z
-
P+
P–
TEXT
Recording
Select date, ..., topics
View
Select time
Detail
3DJHܬ
EPG (ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE) Mon 01.03./16:05
Date
Time
Station
Topics
arte 15:57-16:59 Charmed - Zauberhafte Hexen
Das Erste 16:00-16:10 Tagesschau
ZDF 16:00-16:10 heute - in Europa
WDR Köln 16:00-16:15 WDR aktuell
Bayerisches... 16:00-16:05 Rundschau
hr-fernsehen 16:00-16:30 Schlemmerreise Spanien
MDR FERNS... 16:00-16:15 Hier ab vier
NDR FS HH 16:00-16:30 Tipps und Trends - Der Verbraucher...
SWR Fernse... 16:00-16:05 Baden-Württemberg aktuell
2 ZDF
&KDUPHG=DXEHUKDIWH+H[HQ۲
MON 01.03.
now until 17.00 17.00 18.00 19.00
all
all
P+
P–
Change to programme list
3DJHܬ
arte 15:57-16:59 Charmed - Zauberhafte Hexen
Das Erste 16:00-16:10 Tagesschau
ZDF 16:00-16:10 heute - in Europa
WDR Köln 16:00-16:15 WDR aktuell
Bayerisches... 16:00-16:05 Rundschau
hr-fernsehen 16:00-16:30 Schlemmerreise Spanien
MDR FERNS... 16:00-16:15 Hier ab vier
NDR FS HH 16:00-16:30 Tipps und Trends - Der Verbraucher...
SWR Fernse... 16:00-16:05 Baden-Württemberg aktuell
2 ZDF
EPG (ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE) Mon 01.03./16:05
Mon 01.03.
Tue 02.03 Wed 03.03 Thu 04.03
now
all
all
&KDUPHG=DXEHUKDIWH+H[HQ۲
Date
Time
Station
Topics
Electronic Programme Guide
53 -
english
Configuring EPG
Start the EPG menu
EPG mode is started,
if not, press the EPG button.
MENU: Call the EPG menu.
Explanations of setting possibilities in the EPG menu:
In the station selection you can determine for which
station in the programme guide information is to be
displayed. Programme information is only displayed for
stations with ۪ in the EPG list.
With the coloured buttons you can select or remove sta-
tions or only select the stations from the favourites lists.
Because of the large number of receivable DVB-S
(1
sta-
tions you should restrict the station selection. This reduces
the data entry time and increases the clarity in the EPG.
Marking the stations according to reception ranges:
ۼ Digital terrestrial stations (DVB-T).
۽ Digital cable stations (DVB-C).
ۻ Digital satellite stations (DVB-S)
(1
.
Here you can switch the data entry for the electronic
programme guide (EPG) on and off.
If the data entry is switched on, your TV set tries to update
the database overnight (normally between 2 and 5 am)
or if required two minutes after switching to stand-by
mode. The TV set must be on stand-by for this and not
switched off at the mains switch.
The indicator on the TV set lights orange during data
entry in stand-by mode.
The data are also updated while you are watching the
EPG station.
When yes is set, the switched off TV switches on auto-
matically from the standby mode at the beginning of a
set programme. A screen message appears when switch-
ing on. If this is not confirmed within 5 minutes with the
OK button, the TV switches back off automatically for
safety reasons.
The programmes can be sorted either according to their
start times (chronologically) or according to stations (cor-
responding to station list).
Paging through the programme list
P+/P– Page backwards / forwards.
In the entries for Date and Time, you will see changes in
time as well as in date when paging. Scrolling in the
programme list is also possible when the selection is at
the top of the specifications.
Calling additional information about the programmes
Brief information about many programmes is displayed
below the programme list of the broadcasts.
You can call detailed information with the TEXT button if
this function is offered by the TEXT icon in the lower left.
The symbol explanations are described on page 40.
Programming a recording for a recorder
The selection is in the lower programme list,
if not, press the blue button.
The displayed page of the programme list includes the
desired programme, otherwise browse to it or suitably
limit via the specifications in the lower section.
 Mark the desired programme.
RECORD button: Timer data is called up.
Change or confirm timer data if necessary (see page 126,
“The direct way to record”).
Then a red dot will be displayed in front of this programme
as an identification.
RECORD button: Deletes the already programmed record-
ing of the red marked programme from the timer.
If the timer data have been transferred to an external
recorder, then the timer must also be deleted there.
Data capture Switch on TV when marked Sorting
EPG MENU
Station selection
OK
Electronic Programme Guide
Station
selection
Data capture
Switch on TV
when marked
Sorting
(1
Equipment and upgrade options, see page 146.
- 54
english
Additional page selection possibilities
1st possibility:
Call overview page 100.
2nd possibility:
Directly enter the page number.
3rd possibility:
The page includes 3-digit page numbers.
Mark desired page number.
OK Call the page.
4th possibility:
The page consists of several sub-pages (indicated by
the selection option on the last line).
 Page through sub-pages.
Call TOP table
The table can only be called for stations with the TOP
operating system.
OK Call TOP table.
Mark topic area,
select topic column,
 select topic,
OK call the page.
Teletext
Your TV set supports the two operating systems TOP Text and FLOF.
Up to 2,000 pages are stored so that you have quick access.
Starting and ending teletext
TEXT: Call up teletext.
If provided by the station HbbTV, the MediaText/HbbTV-
Text
(1
will open after pressing the TEXT button again (see
page 82).
The function of the TEXT button can be set (see page 83).
The factory setting is Standard teletext first.
Pressing the TEXT button or END button again ends tele-
text/MediaText.
Page selection with the coloured buttons
Red button: Previous page.
Green button: Next page.
Yellow button: To next topic.
Blue button: To next range of topics.
The coloured bars (with TOP text) or the coloured writing
(with FLOF text) in the last to bottom line show you which
colour button you need to use to select which topic areas
and topics.
Teletext page displays
0 AV: Stop self changing pages.
9: Enlarge page (press several times).
PIP: Show / hide TV picture (full screen/split screen).
OK
Tagesschau . . . . 110/112 Kultur. . . . . . . . . . 500
Wetter. . . . . . . . . . 170 Gesellschaft . . . . . 530
Sport. . . . . . . . . . . 200/600 Lotto/Toto. . . . . . . 666
TV Guide . . . . . . . 300/400 Wirtschaft. . . . . . . 700
Page selection View
Tennis: Auftaktmatch wurde abgebrochen . . . . . . . 204
Formel 1: Neues Reglement für Motoren. . . . . . . . . 213
Fussball: Heimsieg für den Meister . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
+
Inhalt tagesschau
13:00 ARD-Mittagsmagazin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
14:00 Tagesschau
Tagesschau . . . 110/112 Kultur . . . . . . . . . . 500
Wetter. . . . . . . . . . . 170 Gesellschaft . . . . . 530
Sport. . . . . . . . . 200/600 Lotto/Toto. . . . . . . 666
TV Guide. . . . . . 300/400 Wirtschaft. . . . . . . 700
Politik: Die neuen Gesetzesentwürfe. . . . . . . . . . 120
Wird auch der Nahverkehr teurer?. . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Australien: Keine Zugeständnisse . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Tote bei Zugunglück in Schweden . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Tennis: Auftaktmatch wurde abgebrochen . . . 204
Formel 1: Neues Reglement für Motoren. . . . . . . 213
Fussball: Heimsieg für den Meister . . . . . . . . . . . 204
100 100 ARDtext Do 07.09.06 14:14:42
ARD
Text
+
Inhalt tagesschau
13:00 ARD-Mittagsmagazin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
14:00 Tagesschau
Page selection
Tagesschau . . . . 110/112 Kultur. . . . . . . . . . 500
Wetter. . . . . . . . . . 170 Gesellschaft . . . . . 530
Sport. . . . . . . . . . . 200/600 Lotto/Toto. . . . . . . 666
TV Guide . . . . . . . 300/400 Wirtschaft. . . . . . . 700
Seitenauswahl
Politik: Die neuen Gesetzesentwürfe . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Wird auch der Nahverkehr teurer? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Australien: Keine Zugeständnisse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Tote bei Zugunglück in Schweden . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Tennis: Auftaktmatch wurde abgebrochen . . . . . . . 204
Formel 1: Neues Reglement für Motoren. . . . . . . . . 213
Fussball: Heimsieg für den Meister . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
+
Inhalt tagesschau
13:00 ARD-Mittagsmagazin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
14:00 Tagesschau
OK
OK
TOP TABLE
ARD Text
tagesschau
Wetter
Sport 1
Fußball
TV Guide
ARD heute
ARD morgen
Kultur
weitere ...
Wetter
Vorhersage
Staedte
Ballungsr.
Reise
View
p
TV Guide . . . . . . . 300/400 Wirtschaft. . . . . . . 700
+
Inhalt tagesschau
1 2 3 4 5
Teletext
(1
Depending on the settings selected.
55 -
english
Programming timer recordings via Teletext
Teletext is started,
if not, press the TEXT button.
Call the programme pages of the current station.
Green button: Go to the appropriate page.
Select the desired programme,
OK to programme the recording.
Change the appropriate recording data in the following
menu Timer data if necessary (see also page 126, “The
direct way to record”).
OK Confirm.
Changing teletext station
You can change the teletext provider independently of the DVB station
you are watching.
The function is only available if two reception channels are available in
the TV set (see Equipment variants on page 146). The teletext provider
can only be changed if a DVB station was selected as a TV picture
Teletext is started, if not, press the TEXT button.
P+/P– Select next/previous station.
The TV set switches through all the stations in
the Station list (see page 34) or the current
Favourites list (see page 35) one after another.
Or:
MENU: Call Teletext menu.
Select Station selection,
OK call station.
 Select station as in the station list (page 34),
OK call station.
Teletext menu
In the Teletext menu you can activate messages, reveal pages and con-
figure the teletext with the Settings menu function.
Starting the Teletext menu
Teletext is started, if not, press the TEXT button.
MENU: Call the Teletext menu.
Explanations of the Teletext menu functions:
You can select the teletext of a different station here (see
left hand column).
The current page is hidden when you activate Newsflash.
A symbol at the top left indicates that the function is ac-
tive. If the contents of the message are updated and it is
a small newsflash, this is displayed in the TV picture. If it
is a full screen page, the symbol is displayed in blue and
the page can be called with the OK button.
Shows concealed information, e.g. for quiz questions or
VPS pages in the programme preview pages.
A wizard for recording via teletext helps to programme
an external recorder or the integrated Digital Recorder,
see also left column.
Other Teletext menu functions:
Input of the first teletext programme preview page if this
deviates from the factory setting (page 301).
Input of the teletext subtitle pages for every station if this
deviates from the factory setting (page 150).
Define up to six teletext pages which can be opened later
from a list in the menu Teletext functions ט Personal text
pages (in TV mode press green button, see page 40).
Teletext character set can be switched to other languages
(Russian, Greek, Polish and Turkish).
Tagesschau . . . . 110/112 Kultur. . . . . . . . . . 500
Wetter. . . . . . . . . . 170 Gesellschaft . . . . . 530
Sport. . . . . . . . . . . 200/600 Lotto/Toto. . . . . . . 666
TV Guide . . . . . . . 300/400 Wirtschaft. . . . . . . 700
Sit hl
+
Inhalt tagesschau
13:00 ARD-Mittagsmagazin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
14:00 Tagesschau
TELETEXT MENU
Station selection
Newsflash Reveal Recording wizard Settings
OK
Teletext
Station
selection
Newsflash
Reveal
Recording
wizard
Settings
Preview
pages
Sub-title
pages
Personal
text pages
Character set
- 56
english
Radio mode (DVB radio)
The TV set can receive digital radio stations over DVB or over the internet
(see page 58).
In addition you can play the sound from an external device through the
TV set via the audio/AV inputs of the TV set (see page 57).
The AUDIO button has been preset for radio operation in the factory.
To change the configuration see page 129.
Radio mode on
Press AUDIO button on the remote control.
The radio mode that was last selected will be opened
(DVB or internet radio).
Or:
MEDIA: Call MediaPortal.
Select DVB radio,
OK call.
Or:
R on the operating ring on the TV set.
You see and information window about the currently set
station.
If a connection to the internet is already established:
 Change between DVB radio and Internet radio (see
page 58).
Setting the volume
V+/V– Volume louder / quieter.
Other sound settings are the same as for the volume
setting in TV mode (see page 36).
Station switching (DVB radio)
The selection of the stations / favourites is the same as
the procedure in TV mode (see pages 34 and 35).
Press P+/P– or the numeric buttons of the remote control.
Or:
+ / – on the TV set operating ring.
Or:
OK Call station list / favourites.
Sound mode
Call Sound mode.
Other settings as for TV mode (see page 36).
Switching the screen on/off
Red button: Switch off the screen.
Switching off the screen reduces the power consumption
of the TV set.
The LED display on the TV set (see page 10) changes
from green to orange.
Switch on the screen with the remote control:
Red button, AUDIO button or OK button (station list is
opened).
Switch on the screen on the TV set:
Press R on the TV set operating ring.
OK
RADIO DIGITAL 12:45
DVB radio
'/)6WHUHR ܃
12:10 - 13:30 Informationen am Mittag
Berichte, Interviews, Musik
Volume 30
Previous station
Station list
Screen off/on
Digital radio
57 -
english
Radio menu
In the Radio menu, you can set the sound, search for and store radio
stations (automatically or manually), change stations and set switch off/
alarm functions.
The settings are made as described in TV mode.
Call Radio menu
Radio mode switched on,
if not, see page 56.
MENU: Call the Radio menu.
Switch off radio mode
Press TV button or
END button on the remote control.
Or:
R on the operating ring on the TV set.
EPG – Electronic Programme Guide (radio)
You can also use an electronic programme guide for the DVB radio sta-
tions if the radio stations provide programme information.
Starting and ending EPG
Radio mode switched on,
if not, see page 56.
EPG: Switch EPG on / off.
The EPG functions in radio mode are the same as in
TV mode. Read from page 52 onwards for further
information.
EPG configuration (radio)
The EPG settings in Radio mode correspond to those in TV mode (see
page 53). If the EPG menu is called up in Radio mode, only radio sta-
tions will be included in the station selection.
As already indicated under EPG configuration in TV mode (see page 53),
we recommend omitting all radio stations unimportant to you in the EPG
station selection for Radio mode (do not highlight with ۪).
This gives you a clearer overview in the EPG, as there are a large number
of stations for the signal source DVB-S in particular.
The collection of EPG data can also be shorted significantly by this.
Station Timer functions
RADIO MENU
Sound
Sound mode ...
Digital radio
OK
09
-
P+
P–
TEXT
MENU
Bayern 1 16:00-16:06 Nachrichten
Bayern 2 16:00-16:03 Nachrichten
BAYERN 3 16:00-16:04 Nachrichten
BAYERN 4 K... 16:00-16:05 Nachrichten
B5 aktuell 16:00-16:05 Nachrichten
hr1 16:00-16:05 Nachrichten
hr2 16:00-16:05 Nachrichten
hr3 16:00-16:05 Nachrichten
hr4 16:00-16:05 Nachrichten
EPG (Electronic Programme Guide) Mon 31.07./16:05
Date
Time
Station
Topics
MON 31.07.
now until 17.00 17.00 18.00 19.00
all
all
Nachrichten - Welt, Deutschland, Bayern
OK
Select date, ..., topics
Listen
Select time
Detail
3DJHܬ
- 58
english
Radio mode (Internet radio)
The TV set can receive digital radio stations over DVB (see page 56)
or over the internet.
In addition you can play the sound from an external device through the
TV set via the audio/AV inputs of the TV set (see page 57).
The AUDIO button has been preset for radio operation in the factory.
To change the configuration see page 129.
Internet radio is only accessible if a connection to the internet has
been established.
Radio mode on
Press AUDIO button on the remote control.
The radio mode that was last selected will be opened
(DVB or internet radio).
Or:
MEDIA: Call MediaPortal.
Select Internet radio,
OK call.
Or:
R on the operating ring on the TV set.
You see and information window about the currently set
station.The station overview appears the first time you call
up Internet radio (see right column).
If a connection to the internet is already established:
 Change between DVB radio and Internet radio (see
page 56).
Setting the volume
V+/V– Volume louder / quieter.
Other sound settings are the same as for the volume
setting in TV mode (see page 36).
Station list (internet radio)
When playing Internet radio stations, the folder names
specified by the provider “vTuner” are adopted for
display on the TV.
For further operation, see General navigation in the media
overview on page 71.
Sound mode
Call Sound mode.
Other settings as for TV mode (see page 36).
Switching the screen on/off
Red button: Switch off the screen.
Switching off the screen reduces the power consumption
of the TV set.
The LED display on the TV set (see page 10) changes
from green to orange.
Switch on the screen with the remote control:
Red button or OK button (station list is opened).
Switch off radio mode
Press TV button or
END button on the remote control.
OK
:/
:
Local Germany
by Location
by Genre
Popular stations
New stations
All stations
Highlighted stations
Alternative
Ambient
Blues
Business news
Celtic
Christian Contemporary
Classic Rock
Classical
College
INTERNET RADIO
Elements 5
OK
ܕ
RADIO DIGITAL
Internet radio
5RFN$QWHQQH+HDY\0HWDO 6WHUHR ܃
Artist: Judas Priest - Living after midnight
3OD\WLPH
Station list
Screen off/on
Digital radio
59 -
english
Audio playback from external devices
You can play the sound of external AV devices (e.g. MP3 players, DVD
players) in radio mode.
Connecting an external appliance (e.g. MP3 player)
Connect the output (jack) of the MP3 player to the cinch audio in sockets
L/R (white/red) of the TV set.
Select AV input
Radio mode switched on,
if not, see page 56.
OK Open station list.
The AV inputs are listed before the first radio station in
a numerically sorted list.
The selection of the AV inputs is the same as in TV
mode (see page 35).
Start playback on the external device after selecting the
AV input.
OK
OK
a
z
-
STATION LIST
PIP scan
Change stations
Sort alphabetically
AUDIO DIGITAL IN
AUDIO IN
HDMI 3
HDMI 2
HDMI 1
AVS
AV
 %D\HUQ ۽
 %D\HUQ ۽
 %D\HUQ  ۽
 '.8/785 ۽
Switch to ...
Select station
Favourites
 %DNWXHOO ۽
KU۽
KU۽
KU۽
KU۽
 %59HUNHKU ۽
 %SOXV ۽
 0'56SXWQLN ۽
-803۽
 1'5۽
 1RUGZHVWUDGLR ۽
 1RUGZHVWUDGLR ۽
TV set
MP3 player
AUDIO IN L/R
Connection example of an MP3 player
Digital radio
- 60
english
Parental lock
You can select and set various security options to prevent unauthorised use
of the TV set and to protect your children from unsuitable programmes.
Defining the access code (PIN)
MENU: Call TV menu.
 Select Settings,
go to the menu line below.
 Select Parental lock,
go to the menu line below.
Define a four digit access code (PIN) the first time
you open it. The numbers appear in plain text. Note
the access code (PIN) well.
OK Confirm the access code (PIN).
The Parental lock menu is opened.
The four-digit access code (PIN) must be entered when
the parental lock is opened in future. It appears encrypted
(****) when entering for security reasons.
Code number
The code number cancels all entered PINs. It can be used for example if
you have forgotten your PIN. You will find a note about the code number
on page 149. Remove this from the manual and keep it in a safe place.
Explanations of setting possibilities in the Parental lock menu:
The TV set is locked immediately the menu is exited. All
programmes can then only be watched after entering the
access code. The lock can be activated both Immediately
and for a Daily defined period.
The lock remains active until it is switched off in the menu.
You can lock / unlock individual or all of the stations in
the station list specifically.
The lock remains active until it is switched off in the menu.
Some DVB stations also broadcast an age classification.
If the age set here is below the broadcast age limit, the
programme can only be watched after entering the ac-
cess code.
This function enables you to prevent small children from
using your television unsupervised. The buttons on the
front of the television will be locked out and you will
only be able to control the TV using the remote control.
You can change your access code at any time. Enter the
new access code in place of the old one.
All set parental locks (locked stations, age-dependent
locks, locked films in the DR archive/Video archive
(1
) are
cancelled. The current secret code is deleted. When the
parental lock is reactivated all the previous parental locks
are set again automatically.
All currently set parental locks are finally cancelled. The
secret code is deleted.
Protection of minors for CI Plus programmes
Youth-protected broadcasts of programme providers with CI Plus
encoding possibly require you to enter the secret number (PIN) of the
CA module.
We recommend selecting the secret number of the TV set according to
the secret number of the CA module, since the secret number of the CA
module cannot be changed. This means that you must only remember
one secret number.
Lock single stations Age-related lock
TV MENU
Settings
Parental lock
Lock all stations
Immediately ...
TV MENU
Settings
Parental lock
Access code
****
Please enter PIN
09
-
Other settings
Lock all
stations
Lock single
stations
Age-related
lock
Lock direct
control on
TV set
Change
access code
Deactivate
Reset
(1
Only for TV sets that contain an integrated hard disc (DR
+
), a connected external hard
disc (USB Recording) or that have an archive available on the network (DR streaming).
61 -
english
Timer functions
This menu offers you convenient alarm services. Programmed alarms are
also active when the TV set has been switched off to standby.
If the TV set switches on from the standby mode by alarm, a screen
message appears. If this is not confirmed within 5 minutes with the OK
button, the TV switches back off automatically for safety reasons.
The TV set can also be switched off automatically at certain times. A screen
warning appears one minute before automatic switch off. The automatic
switch off can be interrupted by pressing any button.
Call Timer functions
MENU: Call TV menu.
 Select Settings,
go to the menu line below.
 Select Timer functions,
go to the menu line below.
 Select the desired setting.
Explanations of setting possibilities in the Timer functions menu:
The set switches to the standby mode automatically at
the specified time.
If a time is specified which has already passed on the
same day, the set switches off at this time the next day.
The set regularly switches to the standby mode automati-
cally every day at the specified time.
The set alerts you once today at the specified time.
If a time was specified which has already passed on the
same day, the alarm is saved for the next day.
The set regularly alerts you from Monday to Friday at
the set time.
The set alerts you regularly every Saturday at the speci-
fied time.
The set alerts you regularly every Sunday at the speci-
fied time.
Explanations of setting possibilities in the Timer functions menu:
Specify whether the TV set switches on in the event of an
alarm from the standby mode in TV or radio mode with
the respectively last active station.
Set the desired volume of the alarm tone. The alarm
tone is emitted as a continuous tone as a guide during
the setting.
Language
Specify the language for all menus in the TV set in the language menu.
The language for the DVB subtitles and the film language can be set for
DVB programmes.
Call language
MENU: Call TV menu.
 Select Settings,
go to the menu line below.
 Select Language,
go to the menu line below.
 Select the desired setting.
Explanations of setting possibilities in the Language menu:
You can change the menu language here. The menu
language can be changed with the index (see page 15).
If subtitles are provided by the DVB station, you can set
your desired language in advance here. If this is included
in the range of languages of the station, it will be shown
automatically.
You can also specify an alternative language under this
menu item, in case your chosen language is not offered
by the station
Specify your desired film language in advance here.
If this is included in the range of languages of the station,
it will be shown automatically.
You can also specify an alternative language under this
menu item, in case your chosen language is not offered
by the station.
Switch off daily One-time alarm Wake up M
o
TV MENU
Settings
Timer functions
Switch off once
no ...
Subtitle (DVB) Audio (DVB)
TV MENU
Settings
Language
Menu language
OK
Other settings
Switch off
once
Switch off
daily
One-time
alarm
Wake up
Mon-Fri
Wake up Sat
Wake up
Sun
Wake up
with
Wake up
signal
volume
Menu
language
Subtitle (DVB)
Audio (DVB)
- 62
english
On-screen displays
You can select different settings in this menu which affect the on-screen
displays.
Call On-screen displays
MENU: Call TV menu.
 Select Settings,
go to the menu line below.
 Select Miscellaneous,
go to the menu line below.
 Select On-screen displays,
go to the menu line below.
 Select the desired setting.
Explanations of setting possibilities in the On-screen displays menu:
Here you set the duration of the display, e.g. for the
volume or the station display when changing stations.
The duration can be set between 2 and 9 seconds.
You can select between an upper and a lower display posi-
tion so that other displays (subtitles) are not concealed.
Here you set whether or not the change in the volume
should also be displayed visually on the screen.
Select yes here if you want to be able to see the additional
help permanently in the upper part of the screen while
navigating the menu. Also see page 15 for further
information.
The time can be displayed permanently with this menu
item or by pressing the button twice in quick succession
(see also page 41). It is always visible as long as no
other display is made.
If you switch to an HDMI programme place to which
a Digital Link HD-capable device is connected (see also
page 117), a reference to the adapted function of the
remote control always appears when yes is set.
Time and date
If you receive a station with teletext after switching on the TV, the time
and date are recorded automatically. The date may have to be entered
manually for some stations.
Enter the time and date manually if you receive station without teletext.
Call Time and date
MENU: Call TV menu.
 Select Settings,
go to the menu line below.
 Select Miscellaneous,
go to the menu line below.
 Select Time and date,
go to the menu line below.
 Select the desired setting.
Explanations of setting possibilities in the Time and date menu:
If a definite time has been identified by the TV set
(dependent on the channel), certain menu items may
not be available.
Enter the time (00:00 to 23:59) with the numeric buttons
of the remote control.
The current time at the Greenwich Meridian 0 is to be
understood as world time. The time shift in relation to
this time must be given in hours (–11 to +13) (with the
buttonsor the numeric buttons on the remote con-
trol). Summer time is ignored.
Enter the date (day.month.year) with the numeric buttons
on the remote control.
Enter the date on which the time is switched over to
summer time if it deviates from the automatically cal-
culated date.
Enter the date on which the summer time ends if it devi-
ates from the automatically calculated date.
Deviation from Universal Time Date Beginning of
TV MENU
Settings
Miscellaneous
Time and date
Time
14:32:21
On-screen display position Volume Automat
i
TV MENU
Settings
Miscellaneous
On-screen displays
On-screen display time
7 s
Other settings
On-screen
display time
On-screen
display position
Volume
Automatic
info
Permanent
clock display
Automatic
hint after
switch to
HDMI
Time
Deviation from
Universal Time
Date
Beginning of
daylight-saving
time
End of
daylight-saving
time
63 -
english
Conditional Access module (CA module)
In order to receive coded digital stations, a Conditional Access module
(CA module) and a Smart Card must be inserted in the CI slot of your TV
set (see page 11).
The CA module and the Smart Card are not part of the TV set’s scope
of delivery. They are usually available from your dealer. Loewe does not
provide any guarantee for the functioning of the CA module.
The TV set must first recognise and set up the CA module during initial
operation. Therefore, it can take up to a minute until decoding starts
during initial operation.
Inserting the Smart Card into the CA module
Push the Smart Card into the CA module as far as it will go. The side of
the card with the gold chip on it should be pointing towards the thicker
side of the insertion slot (see illustration). Observe the direction of the
arrow printed on the SmartCard.
Inserting the CA module into the TV set’s CI slot
Switch off the TV set’s mains switch.
Remove the cover from the rear of the set.
Insert the CA module carefully into one of the two CI slots, ensuring that
the contact side goes in first. Do not use any force when pushing it in.
Make sure that the module does not go in at an angle. Push the CA
module in as far as it will go.
For Loewe TV sets, CI slots can be built in with an ejector (A) or without
an ejector (B). In the case of CI slots with an ejector, this protrudes
slightly out from the unit when the CA module is correctly installed.
Finally, close the side cover.
Coded Stations
Searching for encrypted stations
The search wizard must only be started if the setting
option no has been selected during first installation in
the search for encrypted stations and no CA-module
was inserted.
MENU: Call TV menu.
 Select Settings,
go to the menu line below.
 Select Stations,
go to the menu line below.
 Select Search wizard,
go to the menu line below.
Select Change search settings,
OKwizard guides you through the search settings.
See page 44 for a description of the search settings.
Calling CA module information
This menu is only available for digital stations and when
a CA module is plugged in.
MENU: Call TV menu.
 Select CA module: xxx,
OKcall information.
The content of this menu depends on the provider of the
CA module.
The CA module information can also be called up in the
TV menu under Settings טOther ט CA module: xxx (xxx
corresponds to the CA module provider).
Removing the CA module
Switch off the TV set’s mains switch.
Remove the cover from the rear of the set.
For CI slots with an ejector (A), press the ejector button on the corre-
sponding module slot and the CA module will be released. Pull the CA
module out of the unit.
For CI slots without an ejector (B), just pull the CA module out of the CI
slot.
Replace the cover.
Smart Card
CA module
Contact side
(A) (B)
- 64
english
Media
+
General information on Media
+
MediaHome gives you access to photos, videos and music from your per-
sonal storage media, e.g. from storage media connected via USB and from
media servers in your home network to which your TV set is connected.
MediaNet delivers multimedia data from the Internet.
Please follow the information in the right column for the Internet
functions.
Connecting the TV set to your network
To receive media via media servers in your home network or via the
Internet, you have to integrate your TV set in your home network.
You can connect your TV set both with a wired connection (Ethernet,
PowerLine) or via a wireless radio connection (WLAN)
(1
. The TV set has
an internal WLAN antenna
(1
. You can find connection examples for both
cases on page 19.
The TV sets are provided with a standard network configuration ex works
(automatic assignment of the IP address, WLAN deactivated
(1
). The TV set
can normally have a wired connection to your home network without any
problems when using these default settings. For a wireless connection
(1
or for integration in special networks, please select the corresponding
settings in the Media menu (see page 66).
Your Loewe TV set supports the UPnP AV standard for data playback in
the home network. You can find more detailed information on this in the
technical data on page 143 and in the glossary from page 150 onwards.
MediaNet
If you wish to use the internet functions, we recommend registering your
TV set on our homepage.
http://support.loewe.tv (International),
http://support.loewe.tv/uk (United Kingdom and Republic of Ireland),
http://support.loewe.tv/au (Australia) or
http://support.loewe.tv/nz (New Zealand)
(under Register now or Register free-of-charge).
Simply follow the steps in the registration process.
The MAC address of your TV set is required for the registration. You can find
this in the index of the TV set under Integrated features – MAC address (TV).
Some of the Internet functions described below may not be available
(see also MediaUpdate chapter below). Loewe does not accept any
liability for the nature and content of receivable Internet services. This
also applies to the Loewe MediaNet portal. With its devices, Loewe
merely provides the technical platform that fundamentally enables
such material to be received. For this reason, Loewe cannot make any
guarantees regarding changes in the nature and content of the material,
particularly with regard to the future.
The content shown in the Recommendations area may change from
time to time without prior notice.
Help for configuration problems
Loewe cannot provide any support for PC hardware and software or
network components owing to the diverse configuration options with
home networks.
Please contact the administrator of your home network and/or special-
ist dealer for support when setting up and for maintenance of network
connections, storage media, media server software and network devices,
e.g. routers.
MediaUpdate - additional functions
Additional functions in the MediaPortal are planned, particularly for Loewe
Media
+
. You can update your TV set yourself. You will find new software
versions on our internet page.
You can find notes on carrying out a software update on page 130.
MEDIA PORTAL
TV
DR+ StreamingMediaHome
DVB radio DR archive
MediaNet
Index
Internet radio
(1
Only for TV sets with WLAN functionality, see table on page 146.
65 -
english
Media
+
Accessing your media
MEDIA: Call MediaPortal.
 Mark desired function,
OK call function.
MediaHome: see page 70.
MediaNet: see page 73.
Playing music and videos, displaying images
The windows for playing music and videos and for displaying photos are
comparable for all cases irrespective of the media source. The relevant
players are therefore grouped together:
MediaMusic (including Internet radio): see page 78.
MediaPhoto: see page 79.
MediaVideo: see page 80.
Quit media
Call MediaPortal and select other function (see left
column).
Or:
Press TV or AUDIO button for changing to TV or radio
mode
(1
.
Oder:
Press END button in the MediaPortal main level to change
to the last active operating mode (TV, radio).
MEDIA PORTAL
TV
DR+ StreamingMediaHome
DVB radio DR archive
MediaNet
Index
Internet radio
(1
The AUDIO key can be assigned another function (see page 129).
- 66
english
Media
+
Media menu
The Media menu is used for making settings to your network adapter
and the various types of media (photo, music, video).
MediaPortal is open.
MENU: Call / close Media menu.
 Select desired menu item,
go to the menu line below.
 Select the desired setting,
OK call.
Network settings: see right column.
Photo settings: see page 69.
Music settings: see page 69.
Video settings: see page 69.
Explanation of the setting possibilities in Network settings menu
You can activate or deactivate the network settings of
your TV set here.
 Select Network access,
go to the menu line below.
 Select the type of access required.
off deactivates all existing network adapters of your TV
set.
On, wired only: Access to the network only via a network
cable. The wireless access is deactivated.
On, wireless only
(1
: Access to the network only via WLAN.
The access via a network cable is deactivated.
On, wireless + bridge function
(1
: Both network adapters
are activated. Wireless Internet access is possible (WLAN).
Internet-enabled devices connected to the network
socket (LAN) (e.g. Loewe MediaCenter, Loewe BluTechVi-
sion Interactive) can use the wireless connection of the TV
set to access the Internet via the WLAN bridge function.
Under no circumstances may the TV set be wired and at
the same time connected by a wireless connection to
the same network, e.g. router. This may cause severe
operational faults!
OK Adopt access type or change Current settings for
the adapter.
Network
access
MEDIA MENU
Network settings
Photo settings Music settings Video settin
g
Network access
MEDIA MENU
Network settings
Network access Other Reset to factory settings
On, wired only
...
(1
Only for TV sets with WLAN functionality, see table on page 146.
67 -
english
Media
+
Configuration of the built-in LAN adapter
Adapter configuration is accessed over the media menu
(see page 66).
You will see an overview of the current settings for the
selected network adapter (for an explanation of the points,
see page 68).
OK Change settings for the network adapter.
 Select type of IP configuration.
Manual: Enter your fixed static IP address manually
(see below).
Automatic: Automatic configuration of the IP address
via DHCP server or via multiple protocols
according to UPnP specification (including
DHCP).
OK Proceed.
If manual has been selected under IP configuration:
 Enter IP, Subnet mask, Gateway and DNS server
addresses in succession with the numeric keys on
the remote control.
OK Proceed.
You will now see an updated overview of the settings for
the network adapter.
OK End of wizard.
Configuration of a wireless adapter (e.g. WLAN bridge adapter)
(1
Adapter configuration is accessed over the media menu
(see page 66).
You will see an overview of the current settings of the
network adapter (similar to the illustration in the left-hand
column).
OK Change settings for the network adapter.
The TV set now searches for wireless routers.
Red button: Stop search.
After the end of the search:
 Select required base station from the options found.
OK Proceed.
If the desired access point is not found:
Red button: Repeat the search. Or:
Yellow button: Specify base station manually, e.g. if the
SSID of the access point is not transferred.
Same procedure as for Rename station,
see page 47.
OK Proceed.
If your wireless network has an encryption, select the
encryption method and then enter the WLAN password
(procedure same as for Rename station, see page 47).
Contact your network administrator if you do not
know the WLAN code.
For encryption types supported, see page 143.
For WEP encryption:
 Select the WEP index,
OK Proceed.
 Select type of IP configuration (see left column).
You will now see an updated overview of the settings for
the network adapter.
OK End of wizard.
OK
NETWORK WIZARD: WIRED
Current adapter settings:
IP configuration Manual
IP address 192.168.2.123
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
Gateway 192.168.2.1
DNS server 1 192.168.2.1
DNS server 2 192.168.2.1
Additional adapter data:
MAC address 00:09:82:11:99:11
Change settings
(1
Only for TV sets with WLAN functionality, see table on page 146.
- 68
english
Media
+
Explanation of the adapter settings
The current assignment method for the IP address of
your TV set.
Your current IP address.
Your current subnet-mask IP address.
(only for IP configuration ט manual)
Your manually set gateway IP address.
(only for IP configuration ט manual)
Your manually set first DNS server IP address.
(only for IP configuration ט manual)
Your manually set second DNS server IP address.
The name of your network.
Indicates the MAC address that is built into the hardware
of your TV set’s wired network adapter (LAN).
Indicates the MAC address that is built into the hardware
of your TV set’s wireless network adapter (WLAN).
Gives you information about the current status of your
wireless connection (save settings, connecting, login
failed, access point not found, not connected, connec-
tion established).
Specifies the signal strength as a percentage.
Explanation of the setting possibilities in Network settings menu
(continued)
This menu contains settings which have to be changed
less frequently.
 Select Other,
OK call other network settings.
 Select desired setting,
 or numeric buttons: Perform changes.
Enter characters (procedure same as Rename stations,
see page 47).
Host name: Give your TV set a name so that it can be
uniquely identified in the network.
Use proxy server: Indicate whether your network access
is to be direct or via a proxy server.
A proxy server is not necessary for most home net-
works.
Contact your home network administrator if you are
unclear about the proxy server settings.
Proxy server name:
(only available if Use proxy server ט yes)
Indicate the name or IP address of the proxy server used.
Proxy port number:
(only available if Use proxy server ט yes)
Indicate the network port number.
Proxy server requires login:
(only available if Use proxy server ט yes)
Specify whether your proxy server requires a special login.
User name and Password:
(only available if Proxy server requires login
p
yes)
Enter your login data for the proxy server.
MENU: Quit Other network settings menu.
The settings for the network adapter revert back to the
factory settings.
Whilst the settings are reverting back to the factory set-
tings, the TV set must not be switched off!
Other
IP
configuration
IP address
Subnet mask
Gateway
DNS server 1
DNS server 2
Network SSID
MAC address
(TV)
MAC address
(WLAN)
Link status
Link quality
MEDIA MENU
Network settings
Other Reset to factory settings
access
OK
Reset to factory
settings
69 -
english
Media
+
Explanation of the setting possibilities in the Photo settings menu
The menu can only be opened when a photo is displayed (see page 79).
Skip to a definite picture or to the start/end of the cur-
rent folder.
Display pictures in optimal size or in original resolution.
Select how long each picture is to be shown during a
slideshow
Three picture transitions can be chosen for the picture
change. You can have alternately running picture transi-
tions.
Select on to have the photo information (file name and
selection of the files in the folder) permanently showing
when in full-screen display or slideshow mode.
Photos in portrait format can be automatically displayed
vertically (with corresponding Exif entry).
You can carry out the picture settings for the photo display
here. The settings correspond to the picture settings in
TV mode (see page 38).
Explanation of the setting possibilities in the Music settings menu
The menu can only be opened when the Music Player is displayed
(see page 78).
You can carry out the audio settings for playing music
here. The settings correspond to the audio settings in TV
mode (see page 36).
Explanation of the setting possibilities in the Video settings menu
The menu can only be opened when the Video Player is displayed
(see page 80).
Set the standard jump width (in minutes) used for jumping
forwards or backwards in the film by pressing the or
keys. Use the numeric button on the remote control
to enter the time (always two-digit for 01 to 16 min.).
If Smart Jump is activated, the jump width can only be
set between 1 and 4 minutes.
Show or hide Smart Jump function (see page 81).
You can make the picture settings for playing videos
here. The settings correspond to the picture settings in
TV mode (see page 38).
You can carry out the audio settings for playing videos
here. The settings correspond to the audio settings in TV
mode (see page 36).
Go to ...
Picture display
Picture change
Picture
crossovers
Photo info
Rotate photos
automatically
Picture settings
Sound settings
Jump distance
Smart Jump
Picture settings
Sound settings
- 70
english
Media
+
A Loewe MediaCenter connected to your home network.
Examples with media servers in your home network. The
exact designation depends on the media server used.
USB storage media on the USB connections of your TV set.
The exact designation depends on the relevant storage
medium.
Please also observe the notes on page 130 regarding
USB sticks!
Unmounting USB storage media
You should unmount USB storage media properly after
use before removing them from the TV set. This avoids
a loss of data.
A USB storage medium is marked in MediaHome.
Green button: Unmount USB storage medium before
removing it.
Once unmounted, the USB storage medium cannot
be used again until it is reinserted!
MediaHome
MediaHome includes both storage media directly connected to the TV
set (e.g. USB sticks) as well as data provided in your home network (e.g.
from a media server on a PC or a network hard drive).
MediaPortal is open.
 Mark MediaHome,
OK activate.
 Mark desired media source.
OK Open highlighted media source. The available
content of the media source is displayed.
The media sources shown here depend on the devices
available/used.
MEDIA PORTAL
TV
DR+ StreamingMediaHome
DVB radio DR archive
MediaNet
Index
Internet radio
MEDIA HOME
DiskStation
USB 2
Media_Server01
USB 1
Media_Server02 TwonkyMedia
Unmount medium before removing
MediaCenter
TwonkyMedia
WMP11
USB
71 -
english
 Repeat procedure if necessary. The content of
the selected folder is still displayed in the right
window, the previous folder structure in the
left window.
 Select media file (example below: music title).
OK Play/display selected media file.
Playing music: see MediaMusic, page 78.
Displaying photos: see MediaPhoto, page 79.
Playing videos: see MediaVideo, page 80.
General navigation in the media overview
The graphics on this page typically show a two-column list view. You
can switch between the views as required (see page 72).
 Select desired folder.
Open marked folder. The content of the folder is
displayed in the right window.
Go back a folder level if necessary.
OK
:/
LOEWE_USB (USB)
:
Elements 3
Change view
Music
Photo
Video
Titles
Artists
Albums
Categories
Playlist
Files
OK
LOEWE_USB (USB)
Music
Photo
Video
:/Music/
Titles
Artists
Albums
Categories
Playlist
Files
Change view
Elements 6
OK
LOEWE_USB (USB)
Alan Parsons Project
Alphaville
Backstreet Boys
Bad Boys Blue
Barclay James Harvest
Bee Gees
Benton Franz
Captain Hollywood Project
Carey Tony
Cocker Joe
Cretu Michael
A
A
A
A
B
A
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
C
B
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
Titles
Artists
Albums
Categories
Playlist
Files
:/Music/Artists/ Elements 38
Change view
Media
+
OK
OK
Prime Time
Let Me Go Home
One Good Reason
Since The Last Goodbye
Don't Answer Me
Dancing On A Highway
You Don't Believe
Pipeline
Ammonia Avenue
Ammonia Avenue
Eve
Eye In The Sky
I Robot
Pyramid
Tales Of Mystery And Imagination
The Turn Of A Friendly Card
Vulture Culture
A
E
A
E
E
E
E
I
E
I
P
I
P
T
P
T
T
T
T
V
T
V
Listen
:/.../Artists/Alan Parsons Project/Ammonia Avenue/
LOEWE_USB (USB)
Album Title
Elements 9
Change view
- 72
english
Change view
You can change the view of the displayed files and folders.
In the media overview:
Yellow button: opens Change view, and:
Green button: Switches over to two-column list view (see
sample figures on page 71).
Yellow button: Switches over to single-column list view
(with picture for the element currently
selected).
Single-column list - example with music titles
Blue button: Switches over to thumbnail view.
Thumbnails - example with photo overview
Playing/displaying data from USB storage media
If a USB storage medium is selected as a source (see page 70), the
following special features apply for actions and the media overview:
nThe uppermost folder level is divided into three fixed categories:
Music
with the subfolders Titles, Artists, Albums, Categories, Playlists,
Files (see below).
Photo
Video
nThe original folder structure of the USB storage medium is retained
in the media overview for Photo and Video. For playing Music, the
available titles are prepared and offered in the above subfolders.
Subfolders in Music mode
Titles: The music titles found on the USB storage medium
are sorted by title name.
Artists: The music titles found on the USB storage medium
are sorted by the respective artist.
Albums: The music titles found on the USB storage medium
are sorted by album name.
Categories: The music titles found on the USB storage medium
are sorted by their respective musical categories
(e.g. Jazz, Classical, Pop, Rock) and displayed cor-
respondingly.
Playlists: Display and play back any play lists that have been
generated on the PC.
Files: The music titles found on the USB storage medium
will be shown without being especially sorted (in
order of file name).
Playing files from the home network
When using a media server in your home network as a source (see
page 70), the names of the folders displayed are specified by the
media server.
For further operation, see General navigation in the media overview on
page 71.
Example: Overview of a media server with the name Twonky Media
Media
+
P+
P–
OK
OK
The Emperor's New Clothes
Dark Diamond
Look Ma, No Hands
American Triangle
Original Sin
Birds
I Want Love
The Wasteland
Ballad Of The Boy In The Red Shoes
Love Her Like Me
Mansfield
This Train Don't Stop There Anymore
LOEWE_USB (USB)
:/.../John, Elton/Songs From The West Coast
Change view
Listen
Page ܬ (1/2)
Elements 13
P+
P–
OK
Loewe_001
Loewe_007 Loewe_008 Loewe_009 Loewe_010 Loewe_011 Loewe_012
Loewe_002 Loewe_003 Loewe_004 Loewe_005 Loewe_006
Change view
View
Page ܬ (1/9)
Slide show
Elements 106:/Photo/LOEWE/Loewe_011
DiskStation (Network)
l O i f di i h h
TkMdi
OK
Music
Photo
Video
TWONKY MEDIA (NETWORK)
By folder
All music
Playlist
Smart playlist
By album
By artist
By genre
Artist/album
73 -
english
MediaNet
Under the menu item MediaNet you will find a continually expanding
platform for interactive TV applications from the Internet. All applications
are optimised for use on the TV. In addition, you can access Internet sites
directly via the integrated Opera browser.
The web browser can also be used without an Internet connection. Thus
you can access local devices which provide a web interface (e.g. router,
home control, home network server).
Call MediaNet
MediaPortal is open.
 Select MediaNet,
OK activate.
The upper section of the MediaNet basis dialog contains
Loewe Recommendations. The middle section displays
your own Favourites (Edit favourites, see page 76).
Depending on the topic selected (see right column), all
the available online content matching the topic is
displayed in the lower section.
 Select the desired online content.
OK Display/play content.
Topic selection
 Go to Topics.
 Select the desired topic.
OK Confirm topic.
The content associated with the selected topic is
displayed in the lower section.
Function of the coloured buttons in the basic MediaNet dialogue
Red button: Edit favourites
Media content from the topic can be
defined as personal Favourites and the
Favourites can also be moved or deleted.
See page 76.
Green button: Internet
You can enter Internet addresses here and
open the associated Internet sites.
See page 74.
Yellow button: Personal area
Using a definable access code, you can
define favourites and call up websites in
the personal section.
See page 75.
Blue button: Configure MediaNet settings.
See page 77.
Media
+
MEDIA PORTAL
TV
DR+ StreamingMediaHome
DVB radio DR archive
MediaNet
Index
Internet radio
MEDIA NET
All Topics
Favourites
Recommendations
Internet Personal area SettingsEdit favourites
Picasa
Legal details
All
Topics
- 74
english
Navigation in websites
P+/P– Scroll the page vertically.
 Select link or text input field,
OK open link or confirm text input.
Letters and numbers can be entered into input fields
on Internet sites either using the numeric buttons or a
USB keyboard.
Same procedure as for Rename station, see page 47.
END: Cancel text input and exit input field.
Yellow button: Zoom website.
Move picture section.
Yellow button: Re-display website at the original size.
Select other website / Quit Internet
TEXT: Return to URL input window.
Or:
Red button: Call History (previously visited websites).
Delete history: see below.
Or:
Green button: Exit Internet and go back to the MediaNet
base dialogue.
Delete history
The address input window is open (see left column).
 Select the trash symbol next to the History
entry to be deleted.
OK Delete an entry or the entire history.
Internet
Green button: Call Internet.
 Select the desired symbols/terms,
OK adopt to input line.
 Go to the input line.
If necessary:
Yellow button: Delete characters to the left of the cursor.
When the Internet address (URL) is completely entered:
OK View the website.
INFO: Display MediaNet info line.
The functions of the coloured buttons are enabled
even without the status line being shown.
Media
+
OK
URL
View Back Delete one character
Legal details
www. .de .org .com .net HISTORY
a
j
s
1
.
,
b
k
t
2
!
:
c
l
u
3
#
;
d
m
v
4
$
=
e
n
w
5
%
?
f
o
x
6
(
@
g
p
y
7
)
-
h
q
z
8
*
_
i
r
/
9
+
~
ז
<
>
0
&
OK
www.loewe.de|
www.loewe.de
MEDIA NET - INTERNET
TEXT
History
Back
Zoom in
Edit internet address
75 -
english
Personal area
In the personal area protected with an access code, you can store websites
as favourites. In addition, the history of websites visited by you is managed
separately from the history in the general Internet section (see page 74).
Yellow button: Call Personal area.
Define a four digit access code (PIN) the first time you
open it. The numbers appear in plain text. Note the access
code (PIN) well.
The access code in the personal section and the PIN
of the parental lock (page 60) are independent of
each other.
The four-digit access code (PIN) must be entered when
the parental lock is opened in future. It appears encrypted
(****) when entering for security reasons.
 Select the desired symbols/terms,
OK adopt to input line.
 Go to the input line.
If necessary:
Green button: Delete characters to the left of the cursor.
Blue button: Add the Internet address to favourites.
For favourites, see right column.
When the Internet address (URL) is completely entered:
OK View the website.
See page 74 for further operation.
Personal area - Favourites
You can save up to four favourite websites in the personal section. These
are displayed in the right part of the user interface under Favourites.
Enter the desired Internet address (URL) (see left column).
 Go to the input line.
If necessary:
Green button: Delete characters to the left of the cursor.
Blue button: Add the Internet address to favourites.
The Internet address (URL) is added to the
Favourites on the right side.
 Select Favourites entry,
OK transfer the Internet address to the input line.
OK View the website.
Delete favourites / history
 Select the trash symbol next to the Favourites
or History entry to be deleted.
OK Delete entry or entire list.
Quit Personal area
TEXT: Return to URL input window.
Or:
Yellow button: Leave personal area and go back to the
MediaNet base dialogue.
Media
+
OK
URL
Legal details
www. .de .org .com .net HISTORY
a
j
s
1
.
,
b
k
t
2
!
:
c
l
u
3
#
;
d
m
v
4
$
=
e
n
w
5
%
?
f
o
x
6
(
@
g
p
y
7
)
-
h
q
z
8
*
_
i
r
/
9
+
~
ז
<
>
0
&
OK
www.loewe.de|
MEDIA NET - PERSONAL AREA
www.loewe.de
www.loewe-uk.com
www.loewe-fr.com
www.loewe.it
VERLAUF
www.loewe.de
www.loewe-es.com
www.loewe.be/be-nl/
View BackDelete one character Add to favourites
- 76
english
Edit MediaNet favourites
The middle section of the basic MediaNet dialogue contains the MediaNet
favourites. You can define and delete these favourites or change their
sequence as desired.
MediaNet is open (page 73).
Red button: Call Edit favourites.
Add entry to favourites
 Select entry under Recommendations or Topics.
Blue button: Add selected entry to favourites.
The entry is added on the left side of the
Favourites.
Change the sequence of MediaNet favourites
 Select entry under Favourites.
Green button: Move selected favourite.
Select the insertion position to which the selected
favourite is to be moved.
Green button: End moving the selected favourite.
Remove entry from MediaNet favourites
 Select entry under Favourites.
Yellow button: Delete selected favourite.
Red button: Quit Edit favourites and go back to the
basic MediaNet dialogue.
All Topics
Favourites
Recommendations
Picasa
Legal details
All
Topics
Add to favouritesBack
MEDIA NET - EDIT FAVOURITES
All Topics
Favourites
Recommendations
Picasa
Legal details
All
Topics
Back Move off
MEDIA NET - EDIT FAVOURITES - MOVE FAVOURITE
All Topics
Favourites
Recommendations
Picasa
Legal details
All
Topics
Back
MEDIA NET - EDIT FAVOURITES
Move favourite Delete favourite
All Topics
Favourites
Recommendations
Picasa
Legal details
All
Topics
MEDIA NET - EDIT FAVOURITES
Back Move favourite Delete favourite
Media
+
77 -
english
MediaNet settings
Here, you can find more setting options for MediaNet.
MediaNet is open (page 73).
Blue button: Call Settings.
 Select the desired setting,
OK call.
Here, you can define/change your MediaNet access code
for the personal area. When changing, first enter the
previous and then the new access code.
Here, you can delete the entire personal section in a single
step (favourites, history and access code). Press the red
button to confirm the procedure.
Select the countries whose online services you want to
receive.
You can delete here the Favourites in the MediaNet basis
dialog (see page 76). Press the red button to confirm
the procedure.
Reset MediaNet to status as at delivery (Favourites in
MediaNet basis dialog, personal area, Internet history).
Press the red button to confirm the procedure.
Blue button: Quit settings and go back to the basic
MediaNet dialogue.
Access code
Personal area
Country
selection
Favourites
Factory
settings
****
Back
You can change your access code to your personal area here.
Mentions légales
MEDIA NET - SETTINGS
OK
Access code Personal area Country selection
Media
+
- 78
english
MediaMusic
A music title is highlighted in the media overview.
OK Play highlighted music title (see right column).
Play music files
A music title is highlighted.
OK Play music title.
PAUSE button: Pause/resume current playback.
PLAY button: If playback is paused:
Continue paused playback.
For playback in progress:
Play title from the beginning.
short: Playback previous / next title.
long: Rewind (speed 2x, 5x, 10x, 20x)
Fast-forward (speed 2x, 5x, 10x, 20x)
OK Return to the music list without ending the current
playback.
STOP button:
End playback and return to the music list.
Explanation of the symbols in the playback window
The symbols at the top right show you information about the current
playback.
ܕPlayback
ܔ
Pause
ܓ
Rewind
ܒ
Fast-forward
_ Replay current title
ܨ Replay all titles in the current folder
ܪ Random play activated
The bar behind the playtime shows you how far the music file has been
played.
Function of coloured buttons during music playback
Red button: Switch screen off/on.
Green button: For music files from local media:
Random play of files in currently selected
folder on / off.
Yellow button: Repeat individual title / all titles / Repeat
off.
For Internet radio:
Switch to the last radio station that was
listened to.
Media
+
OK
OK
Prime Time
Let Me Go Home
One Good Reason
Since The Last Goodbye
Don't Answer Me
Dancing On A Highwire
You Don't Believe
Pipeline
Ammonia Avenue
Ammonia Avenue
Eve
Eye In The Sky
Gaudi
I Robot
Pyramid
Stereotomy
Tales Of Mystery And Ima...
The Turn Of A Friendly Card
Vulture Culture
A
E
A
E
E
E
E
G
E
G
I
G
I
P
I
P
S
P
S
T
S
T
T
T
T
V
T
V
Listen
LOEWE_USB (USB)
Albums Title
:/.../Artists/Alan Parsons Project/Ammonia Avenue/ Elements 9
Change view
ܕ
OK
"Dark Diamond" 6WHUHR܃
Artist: Elton John
Album: Songs From The West Coast
3OD\WLPH 
Random on/off
Repeat title/all/off
Music list
Screen off/on
MUSIC PLAYER
79 -
english
MediaPhoto
A picture is selected in the media overview.
OK View marked picture in full screen mode (see below).
PLAY button: Start slide show (see right column).
Full-screen mode
A picture has been selected.
OK Opens full picture mode.
Portrait photos (with the corresponding entry in the
Exif files) are automatically positioned correctly for
viewing. Rotate photos automatically ט yes must be
selected in the photo settings (see page 69).
Show previous / next picture.
 Rotate picture by 90 degrees to the left/right.
OK Quit full-screen mode and return to overview.
Slide show
PLAY button: Start slide show.
from photo overview: The slide show will begin with
the marked picture.
in full screen mode: Start slide show with displayed
picture.
PAUSE button: Pause slide show.
PLAY button: Continue slide show.
STOP button: End slide show and return to overview.
Media
+
ܕ
2 / 106 <Loewe_2_highres> Slide show
OK
P+
P–
OK
LOEWE_USB (USB)
Loewe_1_highres
Loewe_2_highres
Loewe_3_highres
Loewe_4_highres
Loewe_5_highres
Loewe_6_highres
Loewe_7_highres
Loewe_8_highres
Loewe_9_highres
Loewe_10_highres
Loewe_11_highres
Music
Photo
Video
View
Page חי
3KRWR Elements 106
Change view
- 80
english
Media
+
MediaVideo
A video is selected in the media overview.
OK Play highlighted video (see right column).
Information on high-resolution films in general
Due to technical limitations (e.g. interference, limited bandwidth), inter-
ruptions to playback up to and including complete termination of the
playback may occur when playing high definition film material (HD films)
on 720p format or above (1280 x 720 resolution or above).
Information on high-resolution films via wireless connection
(1
High definition film material (HD films) from format 720p upwards (resolu-
tion 1280 x 720 or higher) should be played back via a wired connection.
If there is a wireless connection, then technical limitations (e.g. fault li-
ability, bandwidth limitations) can cause disruptions in the playback right
up to a complete breakdown of the playback.
Playback
A video is selected.
OK Play highlighted video.
PAUSE button: Pause/resume current playback.
PLAY button: Continue paused playback.
STOP button: Stop current playback and return to over-
view.
Video status bar
The video status bar provides you with further information about the
current playback.
INFO: Display/hide status bar/file information/context
information.
Pressing the INFO button the first time will show the video
status bar. Pressing a second time shows the file informa-
tion for the video. Pressing the INFO button again shows
the context information with operating instructions. The
displayed information is hidden again by pressing again.
END: Close displayed content.
Explanation of status bar symbols
The symbols (in the status bar top right) show you information about
the current playback.
ܕPlayback
ܔ
Pause
ܓ
Rewind (speed 2x, 5x, 10x, 20x)
ܒ
Fast-forward (speed 2x, 5x, 10x, 20x)
_ Replay current title
ܨ Repeat all titles from the current folder
The bar behind the playtime shows you how far the video has been played.
P+
P–
OK
OK
LOEWE_USB (USB)
video1.avi
video2.avi
video2.wmv
video3.avi
video4.avi
video5.avi
video6.avi
video6.wmv
video7.avi
video8.avi
video9.avi
Music
Photo
Video
View
Page חי
9LGHR Elements 17
Change view
ܕ
ܕ
PIP
VIDEO PLAYER
"Flower Exhibition"
Playtime: 02:13 (04:26)
Change size
Repeat title/all/off
Jump to ...
Language/sound
(1
Only for TV sets with WLAN functionality, see table on page 146.
81 -
english
Wind
You can fast-forward/rewind videos to search for desired scenes.
Rewind at double speed.
Speed 2x, 5x, 10x, 20x.
Fast-forward at double speed.
Speed 2x, 5x, 10x, 20x.
PLAY button: Continue playback.
In the case of Internet videos, please wait until these
are buffered in the memory. This can take a few
seconds, depending on the bit rate of the film and
internet speed.
Jump by entering a time
You can jump to any point in the video by entering a time.
Red button: Open Jump to ….
Enter the desired time with the numberic buttons.
OK Jump to the time entered.
Red button: Cancel the jump.
Jump by using the directional arrows
By pressing the buttons quickly, you can jump by the amount set
in the media menu (see page 69).
Skip forwards.
Skip backwards.
Smart Jump
If Smart Jump is activated, the jump width is halved every time you change
the jump direction. The jump width is doubled if you jump more than three
times in the same direction (max. 8 min.).
Repeat
Yellow button: Repeat individual title / all titles / Repeat
off.
The corresponding repeat mode is shown
in the status bar (see page 80).
Select language/sound
Video files can contain several audio tracks.
Green button: Select Language/sound.
 Highlight the desired sound or language and
OK select the audio track.
END: Cancel audio track selection.
Change size
PIP: Change the size of the video window.
You can choose between small or full image settings.
Small image setting shows the video close to the original
resolution. The video status bar is permanently shown
below the image.
The full image setting enlarges the image to fit the entire
screen. The status bar can be set to visible or hidden (see
page 80).
Media
+
OK
LANGUAGE/SOUND
130
129
128
131
ܕ
ܕ
09
-
VIDEO PLAYER
"Flower Exhibition"
Playtime: ??:??:?? (04:26)
Cancel jump
Enter time
- 82
english
HbbTV / MediaText
HbbTV
(1
(Hybrid broadcast broadband television) offers the user exten-
sive multimedia content, e.g. media libraries or additional information
on the programme that is currently playing (if these are available from
the current channel).
MediaText helps you to use the next generation of teletext/videotext
for HbbTV.
MediaText/HbbTV text can either be started directly or through an HbbTV
application.
The TV must be connected to the Internet to use HbbTV/MediaText.
A connection speed of at least 6,000 kbit/s (DSL 6000 or equivalent)
is recommended for smooth playback of videos.
Open HbbTV application
If an HbbTV application is available for the chosen channel after changing
channels, this will be loaded during the automatic start process (see page
83) and a red button symbol will appear. When starting manually, the
application will only be loaded by pressing the red button.
HbbTV is offered by the selected channel.
Connection to the Internet.
HbbTV mode is set to on.
Red button: Load / display HbbTV application.
The appearance, key assignment and available functions
of the HbbTV applications are dependent on the provider.
Under certain circumstances, the recording and
bookmarking functions of the applications may not be
supported.
Loewe takes no responsibility for accessibility, functionality
or content of HbbTV applications.
Hide / close HbbTV application
END: Hide / close HbbTV application.
Depending on the start behaviour set (see page 83),
the HbbTV application will be hidden (automatically) or
closed (manually). In the start behaviour automatically,
you need to press the END button a second time for
closure. You will see a screen message after closing.
Open HbbTV text directly
MediaText/HbbTV text is offered by the selected channel.
Connection to the Internet.
TEXT: Call up “standard” teletext (see page 54).
If you press the TEXT button again, the MediaText/HbbTV-
Text will be called up. The function of the TEXT button
can be set (see page 83).
Navigation within the HbbTV text and how the coloured
buttons are assigned can vary depending on the provider.
Leaving HbbTV text/standard teletext
TEXT: Pressing the TEXT button again ends teletext.
(1
Depending on the settings selected.
Interactive data services
83 -
english
HbbTV mode on/off
When the HbbTV mode is active (factory setting), additional services and
further information (e.g. also from the Internet) can be viewed if these
are offered by the current station.
MENU: Call TV menu.
 Select Settings,
go to the menu line below.
 Select Miscellaneous,
go to the menu line below.
 Select HbbTV mode,
go to the menu line below.
 Set the changes.
If the setting HbbTV mode ט off has been selected,
you can open the DR archive / video archive by press-
ing the red button.
Feature of the TEXT key
With the setting Standard teletext first (factory setting), the standard
Teletext is opened when the TEXT button is pressed for the first time.
Pressing the TEXT button for a second time will then display the Media-
Text. Pressing the button TEXT button for a third time will bring you back
to the TV picture. If MediaText first is selected, the TEXT button will do
the exact opposite.
MENU: Call TV menu.
 Select Settings,
go to the menu line below.
 Select Miscellaneous,
go to the menu line below.
Select Feature of the TEXT key,
 go to the menu line below.
 Select Standard teletext first or MediaText first.
Start behaviour of HbbTV-stations
If the setting HbbTV mode
ט on has been selected (see left column), you
can specify if a available HbbTV application should be loaded automati-
cally after the channel has been changed or if this should only occur
manually after the red button has been pressed once. After loading the
HbbTV application, an on screen instruction is displayed (depending on
the channel that is being viewed).
MENU: Call TV menu.
 Select Settings,
go to the menu line below.
 Select Miscellaneous,
go to the menu line below.
 Select Start behaviour of HbbTV stations,
OK open.
 Choose station.
Blue button: Change whole list / Change items individu-
ally.
Red button: Start HbbTV on the selected channel auto-
matically / Start all automatically.
Green button: Start HbbTV on the selected channel manu-
ally / Start all manually.
Interactive data services
START BEHAVIOUR OF HBBTV STATIONS
Change whole list
 'DV(UVWH۪
=')۪
 57/7HOHYLVLRQ  ۪
6$7۪
 3UR6LHEHQ ۪
 92;۪
  NDEHOHLQV  ۪
DUWH۪
57/۪
 6XSHU57/ ۪
 'DV(UVWH+' ۪
=')+'۪
6WDUWDXWRPDWLFDOO\۪
Start manually (l
DUWH+'۪
$1,;(+'۪
 6HUYXV79+' ۪
 (LQVIHVWLYDO ۪
$675$+'۪
 %D\HULVFKHV ۪
 0'56DFKVHQ ۪
 UEE%HUOLQ ۪
 1'5)61'6 ۪
 :'5.¸OQ ۪
KUIHUQVHKHQ۪
 65)HUQVHKHQ ۪
Start behaviour of HbbTV stations Feature of the TE
X
TV MENU
Settings
Miscellaneous
HbbTV mode
on ...
s
ettings
Check integrated hard disk Format integrated
TV MENU
Settings
Miscellaneous
Feature of the TEXT key
Standard teletext first ...
tations
- 84
english
MHEG-5
In some English-speaking countries, teletext for DVB-T channels is
transmitted in accordance with the MHEG-5 standard. It contains text,
graphics, functions and shortcuts.
This is available in the UK, Ireland and New Zealand, for example.
Opening an MHEG-5 application
If an MHEG-5 application is available for the selected channel after the
channel has been changed, a message will appear on screen to that effect.
Red button: Display the MHEG-5 application.
Depending on what the channel provides, the arrow
keys , the OK button, the colour buttons, the
END button, the TEXT button and sometimes the numeric
buttons are used for MHEG-5 applications.
The appearance, key assignment and available functions
of the MHEG-5 applications are dependent on the
provider.
Loewe takes no responsibility for the accessibility,
functionality or content of MHEG-5 applications.
Opening MHEG-5 teletext
If no message appears informing you of how to switch
to digital teletext when you change channel, press the
TEXT button.
End MHEG-5 application / MHEG 5 teletext
P+/P– Select another channel
or navigate using the on-screen menu.
Interactive data services
85 -
english
About the Digital Recorder system
Using the Digital Recorder of your Loewe TV set you can record programmes onto the integrated hard disc (for TV sets with DR
+
), or onto an external
hard disc connected via USB (USB Recording for TV sets without DR
+
).
The Digital Recorder can also process HDTV signals including the audio and auxiliary signals that they contain.
The various ways in which your Digital Recorder can be used are listed below.
The availability and operation of certain Digital Recorder functions are dependent on the type of equipment present (DR
+
or USB Recording). Refer
to the instructions on the individual pages for more information.
Overview of functions
Digital Recorder function
Loewe TV sets
with integrated hard disc
(DR
+
)
Loewe TV sets
without integrated hard disc
(USB Recording)
Archive recording on the integrated hard disc
z
Archive recording on the USB storage device (external hard disc)
z
View other channels whilst the archive recording is taking place
z
Archive playback from DR
+
z
Archive playback from USB storage devices (external hard disc)
zz
Delay TV in live play mode (timeshift)
z
Subsequent archive recording
z
Delay TV when archive recording is running
zz
View other channels with delay TV whilst the archive recording is taking place
z
Copy recorded programmes onto an external recorder
zz
Copy recorded programmes from DR
+
onto a USB storage device
z
Copy recorded programmes from one USB storage device to another
zz
Permit recorded programmes to be viewed on the network
z
View programmes that have been permitted to be viewed over the network
zz
DR archive view with cover pictures
z
Highlight replay
z
Set/delete manual bookmarks
zz
Hide parts of a recording
z
z
available
not available
Digital Recorder
- 86
english
TV viewing with time shift
In the case of devices with an integrated hard disc, the Digital Recorder
records the TV programme you are currently watching in the background
if DR continuous mode is switched on in the Digital Recorder menu
(factory setting).
Time-shifted operation is perhaps not possible or only to a limited
extent for programmes of stations working with CI Plus encoding
(see page 111).
 7LPHVKLIW
(1
You can stop a TV programme at any time and continue playing it
later with a time shift. The maximum time shift is up to 3 hours. The
recording starts again from the beginning and the old content is
deleted every time you switch stations.
 )DVWQDYLJDWLRQE\MXPSLQJ
You can wind and rewind during a film at just the press of a button.
The jump distance is adjustable.
The Smart Jump function also ensures that the jump width is halved
each time the jump direction is changed or doubled after three jumps
in the same direction (max. 8 minutes). This way you can quickly find
a certain spot of the recording.
 )DVWIRUZDUGDQGUHZLQG
You can fast forward and rewind at three different speeds in the
programme you are viewing with time shift.
 6ORZPRWLRQ
You can play a programme which you are watching with a time offset
at four different slow motion speeds.
 6XEVHTXHQWDUFKLYHUHFRUGLQJ
(1
When viewing a time-shift TV programme, you can archive the whole
programme to the digital recorder’s archive.
 6HWWLQJERRNPDUNV
During a football match, for example, you can flag goals or exciting
scenes. For this, the time shift recording is converted into an archive
recording. At a later viewing you can replay bookmarked sections of
a film as highlights. 30 seconds before and after the set bookmark
are played.
 5HSOD\IXQFWLRQ
(1
When, for example, you are watching live football, you can, at the
touch of a button, rewind by 40 seconds and replay a scene. You
see the live picture at the same time in a PIP picture (not for HDTV
broadcasts).
Digital Recorder archive
You can record movies you want to watch later in the Digital Recorder‘s
archive.
Recordings of CI Plus encoded programmes are perhaps not possible
or only to a limited extent (see page 111).
If EPG or teletext data are available, the Digital Recorder stores the title
and additional information about each programme in the archive.
If additional languages are being transmitted for a DVB broadcast, these
are also recorded. DVB subtitles or teletext subtitles are recorded if the
recording of subtitles has been activated in the Digital Recorder settings.
Display language selection and subtitles as in TV mode.
Start playback of your recordings from the archive.
If bookmarks were set in a recording, these entries are marked accord-
ingly (ܑ). You can start playback so that the bookmarks are played as
highlights (see page 103).
Comfortably select your favourite programme for recording from the EPG
or teletext and watch the programmes later from the Digital Recorder’s
archive.
An automatic Delete Manager always ensures there is sufficient recording
space for new movies (see page 97).
 6RUWWLWOHV
You can have the broadcasts displayed according to time, alphabeti-
cally or by station name. You can therefore quickly find the recording
you want to watch.
 5HQDPHHGLWWLWOHV
You can change the title of a programme in the archive, if necessary.
 3DUHQWDOORFN
Protect your archive against unauthorised access by using the parental
lock feature.
 'HOHWHSURWHFWLRQ
Set the delete protection for a movie to prevent it from being deleted
automatically by the Delete Manager (see page 97).
 &RS\
Using time control, copy films from the archive of the digital recorder
to the external DVD recorder or onto external hard discs.
Digital Recorder
(1
only for TV sets with DR
+
87 -
english
Archive recording
To record encoded programmes, please also read the instructions on
pages 110 and 111.
You can watch another programme
(1
or playback a recorded programme
from the archive when recording a TV programme into the archive. You
can also play back the programme that you’re recording into the archive
or any other programme
(1
with time shift.
 ,PPHGLDWHUHFRUGLQJ
Record interesting programmes directly into the DR archive with the
RECORD button. When viewing time-shift broadcasts (see page 86)
the current broadcast can be saved to the DR archive. The programme
is recorded from the beginning to the end of the time offset recording
or to the end of the set recording time.
 7LPHUFRQWUROOHGUHFRUGLQJ
Comfortably select your favourite programme for recording, from the
EPG or teletext. The timer overview has room for 50 entries. Watch the
programmes later from the Digital Recorder‘s archive.
 6HULDOUHFRUGLQJ
You can conveniently programme series broadcast with alternating start
times.
In some broadcast networks (like UK FreeView) you can even let the
TV set record series and split events automatically depending on the
information provided by the broadcaster. A conflict manager (see
page 97) will also automatically try to find alternate instances of
conflicting recordings if signalled by the broadcaster (e.g. UK FreePlay).
 7LPHVKLIWYLHZLQJZLWKDUFKLYHUHFRUGLQJ
Whilst an archive recording is taking place you can play back the
programme that is being recorded or watch a programme on another
channel
(1
using time shift.
Archive playback
All the recorded programmes can be selected in the archive and played.
During archive playback, another programme can be recorded into the
archive.
 )DVWIRUZDUGDQGUHZLQG
There are three different speeds for winding and rewinding films.
 )DVWQDYLJDWLRQE\MXPSLQJ
You can fast forward and rewind during a film at the touch of a button.
The jump width is adjustable (see page 88).
The Smart Jump function also ensures that the jump width is halved
each time the jump direction is changed or doubled after three jumps
in the same direction (max. 8 minutes). This way you can quickly find
a certain spot of the recording.
 6ORZPRWLRQ
You can use playback at four different slow motion speeds.
 %RRNPDUNV
To find interesting scenes in a movie later, you can manually set the
bookmarks. In addition, there are also automatically set bookmarks every
time a broadcast is changed. You can jump to each of the bookmarks in
succession at the press of a button.
 3OD\LQJKLJKOLJKWV
(1
For recordings with manually set bookmarks you can limit the playback
only to the highlights. You then see the scenes 30 seconds before
and after each set bookmark. If there is more than one bookmark the
highlights are played one after the other.
 &XW+LGHIXQFWLRQV
Unwanted sections at the beginning and ending of a recording are easy
to delete. Set hiding marks
(1
around uninteresting sections to watch a
movie without interruptions or to archive it on DVD.
 &RS\LQJ\RXUUHFRUGLQJV
You should burn recordings that you want to save permanently on
DVD or copy them on an external USB hard disc. Afterwards, you can
delete the recording from the archive.
Copying recordings, which originate from a CI Plus encoded station,
is perhaps not possible or only to a limited extent (see page 111).
Technical information
Switching off the TV set with the mains switch during operation or an
inadvertent disruption to the power supply (e.g. power failure) can cause
damage to the hard disc file system and hence loss of the recorded
broadcasts. Always first switch your TV set to standby mode (press On/
Off button on the remote control or switch-off button in the middle
of the operating eye on the TV set), before switching off at the mains
switch. Do not disconnect the USB storage device
(2
from the TV set
under any circumstances whilst it is being recorded onto or whilst it is
being copied onto.
However, if unexpected problems occur when operating the hard disc,
formatting the hard disc may rectify this. Refer to the instructions on
page 108. Also follow the information for formatting on page 108
when using an external USB disc.
For TV sets with integrated hard disc (DR
+
):
Loewe is not liable for the loss of data on the integrated hard disc (DR
+
)
of your TV set. To avoid data loss, we recommend copying important
recordings to a rewritable DVD or an external storage medium.
Digital Recorder
(1
only for TV sets with DR
+
.
(2
only for TV sets without DR
+
.
- 88
english
Settings
You can make a few settings in the Digital Recorder menu to adapt the
Digital Recorder to your requirements.
Call Digital Recorder menu
Call DR archive / Video archive.
MENU: Call Digital Recorder menu.
 Choose a setting,
switch to the menu line below.
 Set or enter using the
numeric buttons of the remote control.
Explanation of the setting facilities
Select the storage medium whose accessible content is
to be displayed in the archive.
The menu item only appears if several storage devices
are available (for external hard discs and TV devices
that are capable of permitting DR archive programmes
to be viewed on the network, see page 106 onwards).
If DR continuous mode is switched on, the programme
being watched is recorded permanently in the back-
ground.
Factory setting: on.
Adjust the recording quality for recording analogue pro-
grammes. This results in a change in the recording capacity.
Factory setting: high.
Explanation of the setting facilities (continue)
Display DR archive entries with or without covers.
For determining covers, see page 105.
Factory setting: With cover pictures.
If you watch the broadcast during recording (e.g. for di-
rect recording), a cover will automatically be adopted.
A broadcast whose recording is running completely
in the background is initially saved without a cover.
If an entry has been hidden in an archive recording (see
page 100), you can be informed by a screen message
when skipping a hidden area.
Factory setting: yes.
Set the standard jump width (in minutes) used for jumping
forwards or backwards in the film by pressing or .
Use the numeric buttons on the remote control to enter
the time (always two-digit for 01 to 15 min.).
Factory setting: 04 min.
If Smart Jump is activated, the jump width can only be
set between 1 and 4 minutes.
Activate or deactivate Smart Jump function (see page 90).
Factory setting: yes.
A broadcast programmed with the recording type Serial
is recorded only if it begins within the programmed start
time ± series recording tolerance. Use the numeric buttons
on the remote control to enter the time (always two-digit
for 01 to 60 min).
Factory setting: +-30 min.
Serial recording tolerance is ignored when recording a
programme with auto time control (see page 96).
Select here whether subtitles are to be recorded in
continuous operation for DVB stations.
Factory setting: no
(2
.
The TV set can possibly already record decoded pro-
grammes in DR-continuous operation that have been
watched as time-shifted encoded programmes. Recording
the programme directly into the DR archive saves you
having to descramble it later.
Factory setting: no
(3
.
See page 89.
(1
only for TV sets with DR
+
.
(2
for location of TV set DK, FIN, N or S: yes.
(3
for location of TV set NL: yes.
Select memory
medium
DR continuous
operation
(1
Recording
quality
DR archive
view
(1
Inform about
hidden
sections
Jump distance
Smart Jump
Serial
recording
tolerance
Record
subtitles at DR
continous
operation
(1
Descrambling at
DR continuous
operation
(1
DR+ Streaming
settings
TEXT
OK
۩
-
Top-Movie 1
15.09. Sky Cinema HD
Bon(n) jour Berlin
14.09. Phoenix
da capo
31.08. Das Erste
Tagesschau
29.07. 3sat
Individual
00.00. LOEWE.
09:45 - 10:00
DR ARCHIVE free capacity 68:42 hrs
Edit/protect
Delete/copy
Change sorting
Detail View
Timer list
DR continuous operation Recording quali
DIGITAL RECORDER MENU
Select memory medium
Integrated hard disk
...
Digital Recorder
89 -
english
Setting the pre-record and post-record time
You can set a pre-record and post-record time for timer recordings made
without VPS (analogue) or auto time control (DVB) (see also page 110).
This minimizes the risk that a part of the broadcast is not recorded due
to the broadcast starting earlier and/or finishing later.
MENU:
Call TV menu.
 Choose Recording,
switch to the menu line below.
 Set pre-record or post-record time,
switch to the menu line below.
Enter the time using the numeric buttons (always 2-digit:
01 to 15 mins for pre-record time; 01 to 60 mins for
post-record time). Factory setting: pre-record: 00 min,
post-record: 05 min.
DR+ Streaming settings
Enter here whether recorded broadcasts within your TV
set’s DR archive are to be accessible for viewing from
other TV sets (server function).
Setting yes enables you, via the archive, to also view
recordings from other TV sets that have accessible films
within the home network (client function).
&HUDXNTQ35RDS@TMHPTDM@LDENQPTHBJHCDMSHÆB@SHNM
in DR
+
Streaming.
Give a name for your TV set group.
Using different group names enables you to group your
TV sets as required. Only TV sets under the same group
name can exchange data.
IP port numbers are preset ex-factory. Under normal
circumstances they do not require amending.
Set here how long your TV set is to continue to give access
SNÆKLR@ESDQB@KKHMFDR+ Streaming within the MediaPor-
tal (refer also to the operating instructions of the TV set).
This stand-by period is also activated as soon as data
exchange to another TV set has been completed.
Post-record time Recording wizardlist
PRE-RECORD TIME
If you record a programme without VPS, you can enter a time span here
specifying how long before the scheduled time your programmed recording
should start so that programmes which begin too early are recorded
in full.
TV MENU
Recording
Pre-record time
00 min (0 - 15)
DR+ STREAMING SETTINGS
Share the DR archive with other TVs yes
Using the DR archives of other TVs yes
DR device name LOEWE TV
DR device group name Home
IP port number 17123
DR standby 2 hrs
no
Share the DR
archive with
other TVs
(1
Using the DR
archives of
other TVs
DR device
name
(1
DR device
group name
IP port
number
DR standby
(1
Digital Recorder
(1
only for TV sets with DR
+
.
- 90
english
TV viewing with time shift
The Digital Recorder continuous operation (only for TV sets with DR
+
) is
switched on as the factory default setting (see page 88). In this case,
the TV broadcast that you wish to view is automatically recorded in the
background. The maximum time shift is up to 3 hours.
Please also read the instructions on watching time-shifted television
on page 86.
Programmes with copy protection (e.g. Macrovision) cannot be
watched with a time shift for legal reasons.
Interrupt
Press PAUSE button.
The TV image becomes a freeze frame and the DR status
display appears.
At the top you will see the number and name of the
station if EPG or teletext data are available, in addition
to the start and end of the current programme and the
title of the programme.
On the left hand side of the bar you can see the start time
for time shift recording. On the right hand side of the bar
you can see the time at which the time shift recorder will
be full (automatically extends by 30 minutes, up to a max.
3 hours). The bar shows the amount of available record-
ing capacity already used. The time displayed inside the
bar is the time at which the Pause button was pressed.
Continue (time shift viewing)
Press PLAY button.
You can now watch the TV programme with a time shift
from the time you pressed the PAUSE button. The Playback
symbolappears in place of the Pause symbol.
Jump to automatically set bookmarks
With time-shift television, and with the status display showing, you can
skip to automatically set bookmarks or to the start or end of the cur-
rent recording. White bookmarks mark the beginnings and endings of
broadcasts.
Red button: Jump back
Blue button: Jump forwards
Switch to live picture
Press STOP button.
You see the station’s live picture again.
Jumping
You can jump during time shift viewing by briefly pressing the buttons
 in the jump distance set; this enables you to skip uninteresting
sections quickly.
 Jump forwards.
 Jump backwards.
Smart Jump
If Smart Jump is activated, the jump width is halved every time you change
the jump direction. The jump width is doubled if you jump more than
three times in the same direction (max. 8 min.).
: Jump width corresponds to the jump width preset
in the Digital Recorder menu.
: Jump width is less than preset in the Digital Recorder
menu (e.g. after changing the jump direction).
: Jump width is greater than preset in the Digital
Recorder menu (e.g. after jumping three times in the
same direction).
For example, you are searching for the beginning of a broadcast that
has already started.
Press repeatedly to jump back.
If you have jumped past the beginning of the programme,
jump in the opposite direction:
 This jump in the opposite direction is only carried out
for half the jump distance. Jump forward using .
If you have jumped past the start of the programme:
Jump back again. In the process, the jump distance
is cut in half again.
By halving the jump distance when changing direction
again you can find your way to a specific place.
09:5609:45 10:00
Follow me
3KRHQL[6WHUHR܃
09:45-10:00 Bon(n) jour Berlin
DR archive Language/sound
09:5609:45 10:00
3KRHQL[6WHUHR܃
09:45-10:00 Bon(n) jour Berlin
%RRNPDUNז %RRNPDUNטLanguage/sound
09:5809:45 10:00
3KRHQL[6WHUHR܃
09:45-10:00 Bon(n) jour Berlin
DR archive Language/sound
%RRNPDUNט
09:5609:45 10:00
3KRHQL[6WHUHR܃
09:45-10:00 Bon(n) jour Berlin
%RRNPDUNז %RRNPDUNטLanguage/sound
09:4909:45 10:00
3KRHQL[6WHUHR܃
09:45-10:00 Bon(n) jour Berlin
%RRNPDUNז %RRNPDUNטLanguage/sound
Digital Recorder
91 -
english
Fast forward and rewind
During time shift viewing you can fast forward and rewind at three dif-
ferent speeds. Sound is not audible during winding.
Press or for a little longer.
By briefly pressing or , the speed will increase until
you switch back to the first speed.
Playback begins automatically upon reaching the end of
the recording. You are then about 10 seconds behind the
live picture or when rewinding at the beginning of the
time shift recording.
Slow motion
If Pause is active (freeze picture) you can play at four slow-motion speeds.
Sound is not audible during slow motion. When viewing HDTV slow mo-
tion backwards is not possible.
Press PAUSE button.
Press or briefly.
Increase speed:
Press or several times briefly.
The speed increases every time you press the button until
eventually switching back to the initial speed.
Highlight function
You can mark interesting scenes in sports reports for example to watch
these again specially at a later viewing.
You can set bookmarks in time-shift TV or during live viewing.
Press PLAY button for a little longer: Set bookmark.
The time shift recording that is already active in the back-
ground is converted into an archive recording. You will see
a message on the screen. Every time the PLAY button is
pressed down again a little longer, a new bookmark is set.
If there is no teletext or EPG programme information,
the Recording duration menu will appear the first time
you press the PLAY button. Select the desired record-
ing duration and confirm using OK (see page 92).
Recordings which contain manual bookmarks can be
replayed as highlights (see chapter Archive playback on
pages 99 and 103).
Replay function
You can watch interesting scenes of sports reports again for example
(only in live picture).
Press button .
The set jumps back 40 seconds into time shift mode. The
playback flag is yellow (Smart Jump active).
At the same time, the live image is shown as a PIP small
picture (not with HD stations).
Button : Skip forwards 20 seconds.
PIP button: Close PIP picture, without quitting the
time-shift playback.
STOP button: End replay function and return to live
picture.
Switch to a different station
The time offset recording is restarted when you change stations. The
previous time offset recording is deleted.
09:5209:45 10:00
3KRHQL[6WHUHR܃
09:45-10:00 Bon(n) jour Berlin
Language/sound
09:5509:45 10:00
3KRHQL[6WHUHR܃
09:45-10:00 Bon(n) jour Berlin
Language/sound
09:5709:45 10:00
3KRHQL[6WHUHR܃
09:45-10:00 Bon(n) jour Berlin
Language/sound
09:4909:45 10:00
Follow me
3KRHQL[6WHUHR܃
09:45-10:00 Bon(n) jour Berlin
DR archive Language/sound
09:4909:45 10:00
3KRHQL[6WHUHR܃
09:45-10:00 Bon(n) jour Berlin
Language/sound
09:5209:45 10:00
3KRHQL[6WHUHR܃
09:45-10:00 Bon(n) jour Berlin
Language/sound
09:5509:45 10:00
3KRHQL[6WHUHR܃
09:45-10:00 Bon(n) jour Berlin
%RRNPDUNז %RRNPDUNטLanguage/sound
Digital Recorder
- 92
english
Archive recording – Direct recording
For recording encrypted broadcasts, please also refer to the informa-
tion on pages 110 and 111.
Press RECORD button briefly: Start direct recording.
The Recording duration selection is called.
 Select desired recording time.
current programme: The broadcast being watched is
adopted in the DR archive.
??? : Manually enter the recording dura-
tion with the numeric buttons of the
remote control.
OK Confirm. Call Timer data.
Check the timer data, change if necessary and confirm
with OK. The recording is started.
See page 96 for explanations of the setting options in the Timer data
menu.
One Touch Recording
With One Touch Recording, the recording starts immediately at the
press of a button. You only need to specify the recording time. There is
no need to select the recorder (e.g. DVD recorder). The programme is
always recorded onto the integrated hard disc. The programme is always
recorded onto the integrated hard disc
(1
or onto the USB storage device
(2
.
Press RECORD button longer: Start One Touch Recording.
The Recording duration selection is called.
 Select desired recording time,
OK confirm.
When the start of the broadcast has been recorded, the broadcast will
be adopted from the beginning (only when DR continuous operation
is activated, see page 88). Otherwise, recording begins at the point
from which viewing of the broadcast began.
With DR continuous mode activated (see page 88), you can also
adopt a viewed and finished broadcast to the archive provided there
has been no change of broadcast in between. Skip or wind to the
desired broadcast and start the recording with current programme
(see left column).
During the archive recording, the bar showing the recording progress
is red and the REC message is shown for a current archive recording.
Scrambled programmes are recorded according to the presetting in
the Digital Recorder menu ט Descrambling at DR continuous opera-
tion. If yes is set, no other programme can be viewed during direct
recording of a scrambled programme.
If the presetting in Descrambling at DR continuous operation is changed
while you are watching a scrambled programme, the time offset
recording is restarted. The previous recording is deleted.
Setting bookmarks during archive recording
During immediate recording or a running timer recording, you can set book-
marks at interesting sections (press the PLAY buttonfor a little longer). You
will see a screen message. This enables you to find this part of the recording
quickly during playback. You can set up to 15 bookmarks per recording.
Time shift viewing during archive recording
PAUSE button: Change to freeze frame.
The recording is continued in the background.
PLAY button: Continue playback.
You will now see the time-shift archive recording.
Skipping, rapid winding and rewinding and slow motion function as de-
scribed in the chapter TV viewing with time shift (pages 90 and 91).
STOP button: End time shift and return to the live image.
OK
OK
30 60 90 120 180 240 ???
RECORDING DURATION (MIN.)
current programme
confirm
OK
OK
OK
TIMER DATA
09:45 Bon(n) jour Berlin
Parental lock
Set delete protection
confirm
AVRecorder DR
Station 45 Phoenix
Date 05.02.2010
Recording time 09:45 until 10:00
Recording type once only
Digital Recorder
(1
only for TV sets with DR
+
.
(2
only for TV sets without DR
+
.
93 -
english
Watching other stations during archive recording
After you have started the recording, you can switch to another station
(1
.
The second channel can be watched in delay TV whilst a recording is
taking place (time shift during archive recording, see also TV viewing
with time shift on page 90).
If an encrypted programme is recorded with the option Descrambled
recording טyes, the CA module required for decoding is used for
the recording. In this case you cannot watch any other encrypted
programme.
Viewing another movie from the archive during archive recording
After you have started the recording, you can also watch a programme
you have already recorded.
Call DR archive.
Select recording,
OK view film.
The recording process is continued in the background.
If an encrypted programme is recorded with the option Descrambled
recording טyes, the CA module required for decoding is used for
the recording. In this case you cannot watch any other encrypted
programme from the archive.
Switching off the TV set during recording
You can switch off the TV to standby whilst recording. The recording is
continued in the standby mode. The display on the set shows orange.
Never switch the TV set off at the mains and do not pull out the plug
of the TV set out of the socket. Otherwise the recording will be lost!
Subtitles
If subtitles are transmitted, these are recorded.
The recording of subtitles in DR continuous mode must be switched
on in the Digital Recorder menu (see page 88).
Call subtitles in later playback:
INFO: Show status display (see right column)
TEXT: Call subtitle selection.
 Select desired subtitles.
OK Show subtitles.
Stop recording early
You can end a current archive recording prematurely.
Press STOP button.
OK Stop recording.
The recording process is ended. The material recorded up
to this point is saved on the hard disc and can be played
back via the DR archive.
You can also end a running recording by deleting the
entry in the timer overview or in the DR archive. See page
97 for further information.
Status display during time shift and archive recording
INFO: Show status display.
Display with time shift
(1
:
Display with live picture during an archive recording:
Display when viewing with time delay during an archive
recording (channel being recorded is shown):
Display when viewing with time delay during an archive
recording (a channel other than the one being recorded
is shown)
(1
:
09:45
۫
10:0509:51
REC
3KRHQL[6WHUHR܃
 %RQQMRXU%HUOLQ
7LPHVKLIWPLQ
%RRNPDUNז /DQJXDJHVRXQG %RRNPDUNט
09:45
۫
10:05
3KRHQL[6WHUHR܃
 %RQQMRXU%HUOLQ
/LYHSLFWXUH
/DQJXDJHVRXQG
09:45
۫
10:0509:51
3KRHQL[6WHUHR܃
 %RQQMRXU%HUOLQ
7LPHVKLIWPLQ
%RRNPDUNז /DQJXDJHVRXQG %RRNPDUNט
OK
Stop recording Don't stop recording
Digital Recorder
(1
only for TV sets with DR
+
.
09:45
۫
10:0509:51
5(&'DV(UVWH+'
3KRHQL[6WHUHR܃
 %RQQMRXU%HUOLQ
7LPHVKLIWPLQ
%RRNPDUNז /DQJXDJHVRXQG %RRNPDUNט
- 94
english
Archive recording – Timer recording
For recording encrypted broadcasts, please also refer to the informa-
tion on pages 110 and 111.
You can programme timer recordings for the Digital Recorder conveni-
ently using the EPG, teletext or manually. Up to 50 simultaneous timer
entries are possible.
When you have programmed timer recordings, the TV set can only be
switched off to the standby mode. Never switch the TV set off at the mains
and do not pull out the plug of the TV set out of the socket. Otherwise
no timer recordings can be made!
Programmed timers for the Digital Recorder are displayed in the timer
overview.
The code DRטDR appears instead of the programme name in front of
the entry for scrambled recordings still to be descrambled.
For an explanation of the symbols in the timer list see the chapter The
direct way to record on page 126.
Call DR archive.
Red button: Call Timer list.
A red dot with a key symbol appears in front of the entry
for scrambled recordings still to be descrambled.
Programming a timer recording with the EPG
Call EPG.
Flag the broadcast to be recorded.
RECORD button: Programme the recording of a broadcast.
Timer data dialogue is opened.
Check the timer data and change it if necessary.
OK Confirm timer data. The broadcast is entered into
the timer overview.
See page 96 for explanations of the setting options in the Timer data
menu.
In the EPG a red dot is set in front of the title of the programme.
If a broadcast is already marked with a red dot, you can re-delete the pro-
grammed timer entry using the RECORD button. The red dot disappears.
Aktuelle NachrichtenAktuelle Nachrichten
7,0(5/,67
)UL
)ULDUWH۪r*HR5HSRUWDJH
6DW6N\)X¡EDOOOLYH
۰57/8QWHUXQV
ܱ=')KHXWH
7XHVDWZLVVHQVSH]LDO
1HZHQWU\
&KDQJHUHFRUGLQJ
'HOHWHUHFRUGLQJ
TEXT
OK
۩
-
Top-Movie 1
15.09. Sky Cinema HD
Bon(n) jour Berlin
14.09. Phoenix
da capo
31.08. Das Erste
Tagesschau
29.07. 3sat
Individual
00.00. LOEWE.
09:45 - 10:00
DR ARCHIVE free capacity 68:42 hrs
Edit/protect
Delete/copy
Change sorting
Detail View
Timer list
OK
OK
a
z
-
P+
P–
TEXT
Recording
Select date, ..., topics
View
Select time
Detail
3DJHܬ
EPG (ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE) Mon 01.03./16:05
Date
Time
Station
Topics
arte 15:57-16:59 Charmed - Zauberhafte Hexen
Das Erste 16:00-16:10 Tagesschau
ZDF 16:00-16:10 heute - in Europa
WDR Köln 16:00-16:15 WDR aktuell
Bayerisches... 16:00-16:05 Rundschau
hr-fernsehen 16:00-16:30 Schlemmerreise Spanien
MDR FERNS... 16:00-16:15 Hier ab vier
NDR FS HH 16:00-16:30 Tipps und Trends - Der Verbraucher...
SWR Fernse... 16:00-16:05 Baden-Württemberg aktuell
2 ZDF
&KDUPHG=DXEHUKDIWH+H[HQ۲
MON 01.03.
now until 17.00 17.00 18.00 19.00
all
all
OK
OK
TIMER DATA
09:45 Charmed - Zauberhafte Hexen
Parental lock
Set delete protection
confirm
AVRecorder DR
Station 23 arte
Date 05.02.2010
Recording time 15:57 until 16:59
Auto time control no
Recording type once only
Record subtitles no
Digital Recorder
95 -
english
Programming a timer recording via teletext
Call the station on which you want to make a timer recording.
TEXT: Call teletext.
If HbbTV is offered by the channel, then the MediaText/
HbbTV text opens up (see page 82).
In this case, pressing the TEXT button again opens the
“standard” teletext/videotext.
RECORD button: Call first programme preview page.
If not possible, define the preview page in the Teletext
menu ט Settings ט Preview page.
Green button: Select the programme preview page which
contains the programme which you want
to record.
 Flag the time at which the broadcast starts.
OK Programme the recording of a broadcast.
Check the timer data and change it if necessary.
Check the recording time and date for broadcasts which
last past midnight or begin the following day. The data
from the teletext may not be complete.
OK Confirm timer data. The broadcast is entered into
the timer overview.
See page 96 for explanations of the setting options in
the Timer data menu.
Programming a timer recording manually
Call DR archive.
Red button: Call Timer list.
Red button: Call New entry.
 Select Recording.
OK Call Recording wizard.
 Select Manual.
OK Start programming.
Select the station or connection socket to be
recorded.
OK Accept.
The Timer Data menu is displayed.
Check the timer data. Enter the date and recording time
in any case.
OK Confirm. The broadcast is entered into the timer
overview.
OK
300 << Abend > 303
14.00 Tagesschau
14.10 In aller Freundschaft UT . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Zweite Begegnung (D, 2005)
15.00 Tagesschau
15.10 Sturm der Liebe (221) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
16.00 Tagesschau UT
16.10 Eisbär, Affe & Co. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
17.00 Tagesschau um fünf UT
17.15 Brisant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
17.47 Tagesschau
17.55 Verbotene Liebe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
18.20 Marienhof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
18.50 Das Geheimnis meines . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Vaters (19)
19.20 Das Quiz mit Jörg Pilawa . . . . . . . . . . 384
bis 19.50 Uhr
302 302 ARDtext Fr 05. 02. 10 09: 36 : 42
+
Jetzt im TV ARD morgen
Fr 05. 02. 10 Das Erste
Select programme Record
OK
OK
TIMER DATA
17:15 Brisant
Parental lock
Set delete protection
confirm
AVRecorder DR
Station 21 Das Erste
Date 05.02.2010
Recording time 17:15 until 17:45
Recording type once only
Record subtitles no
Aktuelle NachrichtenAktuelle Nachrichten
7,0(5/,67 )UL
)ULDUWH۪r*HR5HSRUWDJH
6DW6N\)X¡EDOOOLYH
۰57/8QWHUXQV
ܱ=')KHXWH
7XHVDWZLVVHQVSH]LDO
1HZHQWU\
&KDQJHUHFRUGLQJ
'HOHWHUHFRUGLQJ
OK
RECORDING WIZARD
Manual
etext Via EPG Via Tele
t
OK
OK
09
-
P+
P–
OK
 KUIHUQVHKHQ ۽
 3KRHQL[۽
 %5DOSKD ۽
 VDW ۽
 (LQV([WUD ۽
(LQV)HVWLYDO ۽
(LQV3OXV۽
=')GRNXNDQDO ۽
=')WKHDWHUN ۽
DUWH۽
6N\&LQHPD+'۽۩
0'57K¾ULQJ۽
HDMI3
HDMI2
HDMI1
PC IN
AVS
AV
0 VIDEO
 'DV(UVWH ۽
 =')۽
 :'5.¸OQ ۽
   %D\ULVFKHV)6۽
Station selection
MANUAL
3URFHHG3DJHܬ
Select station Sort alphabetically
RECORDING WIZARD
Please specify the station you want to record from.
OK
OK
TIMER DATA
**:** Sky Cinema HD
AVRecorder DR
Station 15 Sky Cinema HD
Date 05.02.2010
Recording time **:** until **:**
Descrambled recording no
Decoding overnight yes
Recording type once only
Record subtitles no
Parental lock
Set delete protection
confirm
Digital Recorder
- 96
english
If a DVD recorder was selected as a recording source, start playing
the connected device manually from the beginning of the entered
recording time.
For recording encrypted broadcasts, please also refer to the informa-
tion on pages 110 and 111.
Explanations of the setting options in the Timer data menu
Select the recorder that is to be used. Select DR here to
select the Digital Recorder.
(only available when the selected station can be received
via different signal sources, e.g. DVB-T and DVB-S)
Select the signal source for the recording.
Date of recording.
Time of the recording.
(only available for some analogue stations, see also page
109).
Use VPS data for analogue stations, yes / no.
(only available for some DVB stations and when recording
via EPG, see also page 109).
Use automatic time control, yes / no.
Auto time control must be set to yes to use UK
FreeView+ functionality.
When recording scrambled stations, you can define here
whether the station is to be descrambled during the re-
cording, if possible. If you select yes, you cannot watch
another coded station during recording because the CA
module is used for the recording.
Hint: Select yes if you do not want to watch another coded
station during recording. You are then saved a subse-
quent descrambling.
For a direct recording (page 92) the presetting is
taken from the Digital Recorder menu ט Descrambling
at DR continuous operation (page 88).
When recording from CI Plus scrambled programmes
the auto time control cannot be used due to technical
reasons, if here yes is chosen.
Explanations of the setting options in the Timer data menu (continued)
(only with presetting Descrambled recording ט no).
If you choose the setting yes, the programme will be
automatically decrypted at 02.00 the following day (CA
module must be plugged in). Choose no if you would like
the decryption to take place at another time. Enter the
decryption time of your choosing with the remote control.
(only for recording CI Plus protected broadcasts)
Enter the CA module’s parental-lock PIN. Refer also to
page 111.
Select once only, Mon-Fri, daily or weekly. For timer re-
cordings via EPG Serial is available in addition.
Select whether broadcast subtitles are to be recorded too.
For a direct recording (page 92) the presetting is
taken from the Digital Recorder menu ט Record sub-
titles at DR continuous operation (page 88).
Only allow later playback of this recording after entering
the PIN number (child lock). Press green button.
If a PIN still hasn’t been entered under TV menu ט
Settings ט Parental lock, the Parental lock will at first
be activated.
Protect against automatic deletion by the Delete
Manager. Press yellow button.
Recorder
Station
Date
Recording
time
VPS
Auto time
control
Descrambled
recording
Decoding
overnight
Programme
provider PIN
Recording type
Record
subtitles
Lock movie
Set delete
protection
Digital Recorder
97 -
english
Delete programmed timer entries
Use this function in the timer overview if you want to delete recordings
already programmed or end a running timer recording.
Call DR archive.
Red button: Call Timer list.
Mark the timer to be deleted.
Yellow button: Delete timer entry.
OK Confirm.
The letters of a timer currently active are red. If you
delete this timer, the recording is stopped.
The Delete Manager
The Delete Manager always makes sure there is enough memory space
on the hard disc for new recordings.
When the capacity of the hard disc is almost exhausted the old record-
ings are deleted.
Recordings which have been protected with a delete protection (see
page 105) are not deleted by the Delete Manager. However, you can
still delete these recordings manually.
To avoid data loss, we recommend copying important recordings to a
rewritable DVD.
Delete the recordings from the Digital Recorder after copying.
Loewe is not liable for data loss from the Digital Recorder’s hard disc.
Record conflict
If you wish to programme a new recording which overlaps an timer
recording already saved, the Recording conflict dialogue will open. Here
you define whether only one or both recordings are to be made.
If you decide for both, you have to state which of the two programmes
is to be recorded fully.
Other ways of solving this recording conflict:
Green button:
Change the timer data of the individual
programmes.
END: Reject new timer. The older timer entry is
retained.
Aktuelle NachrichtenAktuelle Nachrichten
7,0(5/,67
)UL
)ULDUWH۪r*HR5HSRUWDJH
6DW6N\)X¡EDOOOLYH
۰57/8QWHUXQV
ܱ=')KHXWH
7XHVDWZLVVHQVSH]LDO
1HZHQWU\
&KDQJHUHFRUGLQJ
'HOHWHUHFRUGLQJ
OK
&RQILUPGHOHWH $ERUWGHOHWH
Digital Recorder
- 98
english
Archive playback
Call DR archive / Video archive.
The remaining free space on the storage device is shown at the top
right-hand corner.
The specified free capacity is an estimated value. The exact remaining
capacity of the hard disc depends on the broadcasts recorded in future
and on the recording quality set in the case of analogue broadcasts
(see page 88).
The progress bar shows you how much of the recording has been
watched.
If other programme data is available from EPG or teletext these are shown
below the archive list for the entry just flagged. Other information about
the recording can be called with the TEXT button, if this is offered.
Blue button: Change sorting of the recordings.
Green button: Sort recordings by date.
Yellow button: Sort recordings alphabetically.
Blue button: Sort recordings by station.
Back to overview. The sorting last selected is retained.
Explanations of the symbols in the archive
s Archive entry with active replay (page 101).
ۮ Archive entry with set parental lock (page 104).
ۯ Archive entry with set delete protection (page 105).
ܑ Archive entry with manually set bookmarks (see right column).
۩ Coded archive entry.
v CI Plus coded archive entry.
Archive entry is entered for transferring/copying in the timer overview
(see page 101, Copying recordings to a connected recorder).
Archive entry is entered for descrambling in the timer overview (see
page 102, Descramble scrambled recording).
Playing from the archive
 Select the recording.
OK Start playback.
The CA module with Smart Card must be plugged in when playing
recordings which are still coded.
Setting bookmarks
While playing an archive recording, you can set bookmarks.
PLAY button (press for a little longer): Set bookmark.
You will see a screen message. The drive display is then faded in and you
will see the set bookmark above the bar for the playback. You can set
up to 15 bookmarks per recording.
Automatically set bookmarks are white. Manually set
bookmarks are blue.
Jumping to bookmarks
INFO: Show status display.
Blue button: Skip to next bookmark.
Red button: Skip to previous bookmark.
Delete individual bookmarks
Red or blue button: Jump to the manually set bookmark
to be deleted.
Press PLAY button for a little longer: Delete bookmark.
TEXT
OK
۩
=
{-
Top-Movie 1
15.09. Sky Cinema HD
Bon(n) jour Berlin
14.09. Phoenix
da capo
31.08. Das Erste
Tagesschau
29.07. 3sat
Individual
00.00. LOEWE.
09:45 - 10:00
DR ARCHIVE free capacity 68:42 hrs
Edit/protect
Delete/copy
Change sorting
Detail View
Highlights
Timer list
00:00 01:0300:17
%RRNPDUNז
Repeat
Highlights
Language/sound
%RRNPDUNט
$UFKLYH 6WHUHR܃
da capo
00:00 01:0300:42
%RRNPDUNז
Repeat
Highlights
Language/sound
%RRNPDUNט
$UFKLYH 6WHUHR܃
da capo
p
00:00 01:0300:27
%RRNPDUNז
Repeat
Highlights
Language/sound
%RRNPDUNט
$UFKLYH 6WHUHR܃
da capo
00:00 01:0300:17
%RRNPDUNז
Repeat
Highlights
Language/sound
%RRNPDUNט
$UFKLYH 6WHUHR܃
da capo
P
PLAY b tt
f littl l D l t b k k
00:00 01:0300:27
%RRNPDUNז
Repeat
Highlights
Language/sound
%RRNPDUNט
$UFKLYH 6WHUHR܃
da capo
Digital Recorder
99 -
english
When playing coded recordings, some of the following functions
might only be possible with limitations.
Playing highlights
(1
If there are manually set bookmarks in the current playback, they can be
played as highlights. 30 seconds before and after the set bookmark are
played. Highlights will be replayed sequentially according to the markings.
INFO: Show status display.
PLAY button: Replay Highlights.
As long as the status display is shown:
Blue button: Jump to the next highlight.
Red button: Jump to the previous highlight.
PLAY button: Jump to the next highlight (also possible
without status display).
STOP button: End highlight replay.
Further information concerning highlight playback can
be found on page 103.
Jumping
By pressing button or you can skip through the broadcast.
Jump forwards.
Jump backwards.
Setting the jump distance: see page 88.
Smart Jump
Smart Jump allows you to search quickly for certain scenes of a recording.
You will find more about this on page 90.
Fast forward and rewind
During time shift viewing you can fast forward and rewind at three dif-
ferent speeds. Sound is not audible during winding. You will find more
about this on page 91.
Pause (freeze picture)
PAUSE button: Switch to freeze picture.
PLAY button: Continue playback.
Slow motion
At an active pause (freeze frame) you can select from four slow motion
speeds (for wind/rewind). There is no sound during slow motion replay.
PAUSE button: Change to freeze frame
Press or briefly.
Increase speed:
Press button several times briefly.
The speed increases every time you press the button until
eventually switching back to the initial speed.
00:00 01:0300:17
%RRNPDUNז
Repeat
Highlights
Language/sound
%RRNPDUNט
$UFKLYH 6WHUHR܃
da capo
00:00 01:0300:17
+LJKOLJKWז
Repeat
Highlights stop
Language/sound
+LJKOLJKWט
$UFKLYH 6WHUHR܃
da capo
Highlight 1
00:00 01:0300:13
%RRNPDUNז
Repeat
Highlights
Language/sound
%RRNPDUNט
$UFKLYH 6WHUHR܃
da capo
00:00 01:0300:17
%RRNPDUNז
Repeat
Highlights
Language/sound
%RRNPDUNט
$UFKLYH 6WHUHR܃
da capo
00:1100:00 00:15
$UFKLYH 6WHUHR܃
da capo
DR archive Delete/hide Adopt as cover picture
00:1100:00 00:15
$UFKLYH 6WHUHR܃
da capo
DR archive Delete/hide Adopt as cover picture
00:1700:00 01:03
$UFKLYH 6WHUHR܃
da capo
00:1700:00 01:03
$UFKLYH 6WHUHR܃
da capo
Digital Recorder
(1
only for TV sets with DR
+
.
- 100
english
Deleting parts of the recording
You can delete sections of a recording from the current position within
the film to the beginning or to the ending.
PAUSE button: During archive playback press at the point
from which, to the start or to the end, the archive record-
ing is to be deleted.
Yellow button: Call Delete/hide.
Red button: Select Delete from here to start.
Green button: Select Delete from here to end.
OK Confirm delete.
In this case, 11 min were deleted from the end of the
broadcast so that the recording length is then just 52 min.
Or:
Red or green button: Abort delete.
Hiding sections of the recording
(1
You can hide sections of an archive recording. The hidden parts are
skipped in the future playback and when copying to a connected recorder.
Press the PAUSE button at the point of the archive play-
back where the hide is to begin.
Yellow button: Call Delete/hide.
Yellow button: Set the start of the section to be hidden.
PLAY button: Continue playback or
 skip/wind to the point where the hide is to end.
Yellow button: Set hiding end.
The hidden area of the recording is shown hatched in the
bar. It will be skipped in future during playing.
If in the settings in the Digital Recorder menu טInform
about hidden sections ט yes is set, you will see a screen
message, if the hidden area has been reached during the
playback.
Blue button during the screen message:
Show hidden area again permanently.
00:1100:00 00:15
$UFKLYH 6WHUHR܃
da capo
DR archive Delete/hide Adopt as cover picture
00:00 01:0300:52
$UFKLYH 6WHUHR܃
da capo
Delete from here to start
Delete from here to end
Set hiding start
Delete bookmark
00:00 01:0300:52
OK
Confirm delete to end Abort delete
$UFKLYH 6WHUHR܃
da capo
00:00 00:5200:52
DR archive Language/sound
$UFKLYH 6WHUHR܃
da capo
00:1100:00 00:15
$UFKLYH 6WHUHR܃
da capo
DR archive Delete/hide Adopt as cover picture
00:00 01:0300:52
$UFKLYH 6WHUHR܃
da capo
Delete from here to start
Delete from here to end
Set hiding start
Delete bookmark
00:00 01:0300:17
Set hiding end
Cancel hiding
$UFKLYH 6WHUHR܃
da capo Hide
00:00 01:0300:17
Set hiding end
Cancel hiding
$UFKLYH 6WHUHR܃
da capo Hide
00:2300:00 01:03
%RRNPDUNז Highlights
Language/sound
%RRNPDUNט
$UFKLYH 6WHUHR܃
da capo
Digital Recorder
(1
only for TV sets with DR
+
.
101 -
english
Deleting bookmarks
You can globally delete all manually set bookmarks.
Manually set bookmarks are blue, automatically set bookmarks are
displayed in white.
PAUSE button: Change to freeze picture.
Yellow button: Call Delete/hide.
Blue button: Delete manually set bookmarks.
PLAY button: Continue playback.
Automatically set bookmarks are not deleted.
In addition, you have the option of deleting the book-
marks via DR archive ט Delete/copy (see page 103).
Repeat playback of recording
You can repeat recorded broadcasts and hence play them in an infinite
loop.
INFO: Show status display.
Yellow button: Repeat film.
You will see a circular arrow on the left of the status
display and in the archive after the name of the broad-
cast (see page 98). The function remains set for this
broadcast even if the playback is interrupted.
Yellow button: Switch off repeat function again.
Copying recordings to a connected recorder
Call archive.
 Flag the recording to be copied.
Yellow button: Call Delete/copy.
Select others if necessary and
OK mark entry.
Or:
Red button: Mark all entries.
Titles to be copied are displayed in blue.
Blue button: Call Copy entry.
 Select AV in the copy menu.
Should be copied over later, change date and time.
OK Confirm.
You will see the archive again. In front of the date of the
recording(s) to be copied, you will now see a red point
for the programmed copying.
The status of copying assignments in progress/pending
can be seen in the timer overview
You cannot watch a DVB station whilst copying. The TV set can,
however, be switched off to the standby mode. It is best to copy at
night when the TV is not in use.
00:1100:00 00:15
$UFKLYH 6WHUHR܃
da capo
DR archive Delete/hide Adopt as cover picture
00:00 01:0300:52
$UFKLYH 6WHUHR܃
da capo
Delete from here to start
Delete from here to end
Set hiding start
Delete bookmark
00:00 01:0300:52
%RRNPDUNז %RRNPDUNט
$UFKLYH 6WHUHR܃
da capo
_
00:00 01:0300:1700:17
%RRNPDUNז
Repeat off
Highlights
Language/sound
Bookmark ט
$UFKLYH 6WHUHR܃
da capo
TEXT
OK
۩
=
-
DR ARCHIVE free capacity 68:42 hrs
Delete/copy
Top-Movie 1
15.09. Sky Cinema HD
Bon(n) jour Berlin
14.09. Phoenix
da capo
31.08. Das Erste
Tagesschau
29.07. 3sat
Individual
00.00. LOEWE.
09:45 - 10:00
Delete entry
Copy entry
Detail Unmark
Mark all entries
Delete bookmark
OK
OK
DR
DR ARCHIVE
Copy
14.09. Phoenix Bon(n) jour Berlin
confirm
Copy to ... AV
Date 16.09.2009
Time 18:00-19:10 (70
min)
Digital Recorder
- 102
english
Copying recordings onto an external hard disc
You can also copy programmes onto a external hard disc, and archive
them or make them available to other Loewe LCD TV sets (even those
without DR
+
).
Call DR archive / Video archive.
Select titles that you want to transfer as described on
page 101.
Blue button: Call Copy entry.
 Select USBx in the Copy menu.
OK Start copying.
Copying to an external hard disc takes place in the background and
at a significantly higher speed. Contrary to copying recordings to a
connected recorder (see page 101), there are no selection restrictions
here regarding the stations. You see a screen message, when copying
has finished.
The status of copying assignments in progress can be seen in the timer
overview.
The TV set must not be switched off with the mains switch during the
copying!
Delete programmed descrambling
You can delete a programmed descrambling of scrambled recordings
at any time.
DR archive is displayed.
Mark the desired programme (red dot with key
symbol).
Yellow button: Call Delete/descramble.
Blue button: Cancel descrambling.
The red dot with key symbol and the entry in the timer
list are deleted.
Descramble scrambled recording
You can start descrambling scrambled recordings manually at any time
(1
.
The CA module with the smart card must be inserted at the time of de-
scrambling. Descrambling should be done as soon as possible because
the probability that the code may become invalid increases with the time
between recording and descrambling.
Proceed similarly to copying from the archive:
DR archive is displayed.
Mark recording to be descrambled.
Scrambled recordings are marked by ۩ in front of the bar.
Yellow button: Call Delete/copy.
Blue button: Call Descramble entry.
Select Integrated hard disk
(2
/ USBx
(3
.
Determine date and time of the descrambling.
OK Confirm.
You see the DR archive again. You will see a red dot
with key symbol for the programmed descrambling
in front of the date.
No other DVB station can be watched during descrambling. But the
TV set can be switched off to standby mode. It is best to descramble
at night when the TV is not in use.
You will find the recording descrambled in the DR archive after suc-
cessful descrambling (without a ۩ before the bar).
The time and date of the descrambling can be changed subsequently
in the timer list (see page 94).
(1
Please also read the instructions on pages 110 and 111 concerning the han-
dling of encoded programmes.
(2
only for TV sets with DR
+
.
(3
only for TV sets without DR
+
.
OK
OK
DR ARCHIVE
Copy
14.09. Phoenix Bon(n) jour Berlin
confirm
Copy to ... USB1 AV
OK
OK
DR ARCHIVE
Descramble
15.09. Sky Cinema HD Top-Movie 1
confirm
Store at ... Integrated hard disk
Date 16.09.2009
Time 03:00-05:15 (135
min)
Digital Recorder
103 -
english
Viewing highlights from the archive
(1
Call DR archive.
 Highlight recording with manually set bookmarks.
Recordings with manually set bookmarks are high-
lighted with ܑ.
PLAY button: View Highlights.
The highlights are played in sequence.
Deleting recordings from the archive
DR archive is displayed.
 Flag the recording to be deleted.
Yellow button: Call Delete/copy.
 Select others if necessary and
OK confirm.
Red button: Mark all entries.
Titles to be deleted are displayed in blue.
Yellow button: Call Delete entry.
OK "NMÆQLCDKDSD.
The recording(s) is/are deleted.
The DR archive is displayed again.
Delete bookmarks
DR archive is displayed.
Select the recording for which you want to delete
the bookmarks.
Recordings with manually set bookmarks are
flagged with ܑ in front of the bar.
Yellow button: Call delete/copy.
 Select others if necessary and
OK confirm.
Or:
Red button: Mark all entries.
The selected titles are displayed in blue.
Green button: Delete bookmark.
All manually set bookmarks from the marked entries are
deleted. Automatically set bookmarks are not deleted.
TEXT
OK
۩
=
{-
Top-Movie 1
15.09. Sky Cinema HD
Bon(n) jour Berlin
14.09. Phoenix
da capo
31.08. Das Erste
Tagesschau
29.07. 3sat
Individual
00.00. LOEWE.
09:45 - 10:00
DR ARCHIVE free capacity 68:42 hrs
Edit/protect
Delete/copy
Change sorting
Detail View
Highlights
Timer list
TEXT
OK
۩
=
-
DR ARCHIVE free capacity 68:42 hrs
Delete/copy
Top-Movie 1
15.09. Sky Cinema HD
Bon(n) jour Berlin
14.09. Phoenix
da capo
31.08. Das Erste
Tagesschau
29.07. 3sat
Individual
00.00. LOEWE.
09:45 - 10:00
Delete entry
Copy entry
Detail Unmark
Mark all entries
Delete bookmark
TEXT
OK
۩
=
-
DR ARCHIVE free capacity 68:42 hrs
Delete/copy
Top-Movie 1
15.09. Sky Cinema HD
Bon(n) jour Berlin
14.09. Phoenix
da capo
31.08. Das Erste
Tagesschau
29.07. 3sat
Individual
00.00. LOEWE.
09:45 - 10:00
Delete entry
Copy entry
Detail Unmark
Mark all entries
Delete bookmark
Digital Recorder
(1
only for TV sets with DR
+
.
- 104
english
Changing the title of an archive
DR archive is displayed.
Select the title to be changed.
Green button: Call Edit/protect.
Press the blue button for Rename.
Underneath the first letter of the title, you will see a line
which indicates the current input position for the letter.
Input position to the right.
Input position to the left.
In put the characters one after another (if entering using
the number buttons on the remote control, use it as if it
were a telephone keypad; see page 135 for the exact
assignment of the buttons).
Yellow button: Delete character to the left of the cursor.
Green button: Switch between capital letters and small
letters.
OK Conclude the entry.
This saves the change permanently.
Locking/unlocking a movie (Parental lock)
You can lock movies that your children are not permitted to view, for
instance. Viewing is then only possible if the PIN number has been en-
tered beforehand.
DR archive is displayed.
Green button: Call Edit/protect.
Mark the title that is to be locked.
Green button: Call Parental lock.
Enter your access code with the numeric buttons of the re-
mote control. If you define an access code for the first time,
remember it well. Confirm the new access code with OK.
The DR archive opens again.
Green button: Lock movie.
 Select others if necessary.
Green button: Lock movie or Unlock movie again.
A lock symbol ۮ will be displayed before the bar in the
case of locked films.
TEXT
۩
=
-
DR ARCHIVE free capacity 68:42 hrs
Edit/protect
Top-Movie 1
15.09. Sky Cinema HD
Bon(n) jour Berlin
14.09. Phoenix
da capo
31.08. Das Erste
Tagesschau
29.07. 3sat
Individual
00.00. LOEWE.
09:45 - 10:00
Parental lock
Set delete protection
Rename
Detail
TEXT
۩
=
-
DR ARCHIVE free capacity 68:42 hrs
Edit/protect
Top-Movie 1
15.09. Sky Cinema HD
Bon(n) jour Berlin
14.09. Phoenix
da capo
31.08. Das Erste
Tagesschau
29.07. 3sat
Individual
00.00. LOEWE.
09:45 - 10:00
Parental lock
Set delete protection
Rename
Detail
TEXT
۩
=ۮ
-
DR ARCHIVE free capacity 68:42 hrs
Edit/protect
Top-Movie 1
15.09. Sky Cinema HD
Bon(n) jour Berlin
14.09. Phoenix
da capo
31.08. Das Erste
Tagesschau
29.07. 3sat
Individual
00.00. LOEWE.
09:45 - 10:00
Unlock movie
Set delete protection
Rename
Detail
Access code
PARENTAL LOCK
Please enter PIN
****
09
-
Digital Recorder
105 -
english
Viewing a locked movie
Call DR archive.
Mark locked film,
OK View film.
The covers of locked films cannot be read. The detailed
information for the recording cannot be called up. The
cover (for archive view with covers, see page 88) is
replaced by a neutral image with a key symbol. In
addition, the entry receives the symbol ۮ at the end
of the line.
The system requests you to enter your access code (PIN).
After entering the access code the playback of the movie
starts.
Determine cover picture
(1
You can display cover pictures for your recorded broadcasts in the DR
archive (see page 88). The covers can be freely determined by you
during an archive replay:
Jump / wind to the desired location in the recording.
PAUSE button: Switch to freeze picture.
Blue button: Adopt displayed freeze frame as cover picture.
The image will be displayed next to the broadcast in the
DR archive in future (see also page 98).
PLAY button: Continue playback.
Setting/cancelling delete protection
You can provide films with a delete protection to prevent an automatic
deletion by the delete manager (see page 97).
DR archive is displayed.
Green button: Call Edit/protect.
 Select the title for which you want to set/cancel a
delete protection.
Yellow button: Set/Cancel delete protection.
 Select others if necessary.
Yellow button: Set/Cancel delete protection.
The symbol ۯ appears in front of the bar when the delete
protection is activated.
OK
TEXT
۩
=ۮ
-
DR ARCHIVE free capacity 68:42 hrs
Top-Movie 1
15.09. Sky Cinema HD
Bon(n) jour Berlin
14.09. Phoenix
** ****
31.08. Das Erste
Tagesschau
29.07. 3sat
Individual
00.00. LOEWE.
The parental lock is active.
Parental lock
delete/copy
Change sorting
Detail View
Highlights
Timer list
TEXT
۩
ۯ=
-
DR ARCHIVE free capacity 68:42 hrs
Edit/protect
Top-Movie 1
15.09. Sky Cinema HD
Bon(n) jour Berlin
14.09. Phoenix
da capo
31.08. Das Erste
Tagesschau
29.07. 3sat
Individual
00.00. LOEWE.
09:45 - 10:00
Parental lock
Cancel delete protection
Rename
Detail
00:1100:00 00:15
$UFKLYH 6WHUHR܃
da capo
DR archive Delete/hide Adopt as cover picture
Digital Recorder
(1
only for TV sets with DR
+
.
- 106
english
DR+ Streaming
You can make your DR archive entries accessible so that other Loewe
TV sets can view them via the network. It is also possible to interrupt a
current broadcast and “take it” to another TV set (Follow me function,
see page 107).
To use DR
+
Streaming, at least two Loewe TV sets are required with SL
1xx chassis (at least one of which has an integrated Digital Recorder).
The TV sets also need to be connected via a wireless connection
(WLAN) or a cable connection (e.g. Ethernet, PowerLine).
DR
+
Streaming must be activated in the DR+ Streaming settings (see
below).
Archive entries can only be hosted or permitted to be viewed by TV
sets with an integrated hard disc (DR
+
). Playback of archive entries
that have been permitted to be viewed can take place on all TV sets
with Chassis SL1xx (with or without DR
+
) on the network.
The following functions would require write access on the device
that is permitting the programme to be viewed, and are therefore
not available when viewing a DR archive entry over the network (see
right column): child protection, delete protection, rename function,
delete entry or bookmark, set bookmark, partial delete or hide of the
recording.
DR+ Streaming settings
Prior to the first use of DR
+
Streaming, a number of settings are required.
Digital Recorder menu is open (page 88).
 Select DR+ Streaming settings,
OKopen settings options.
For explanations of the settings see page 89.
Play DR archive entry via network
Call DR archive / Video archive.
Select required TV set.
The name of the accessible TV set is shown in the second
line (in this example: LOEWE TV).
 Mark the required archive entry,
OK view archive entry.
See page 98 for further information.
Extended standby mode with DR+ Streaming access
Switching off the accessible TV set ends access to the DR archive. You
can, however, place your TV set in an extended standby mode to enable
access to the DR archive even when the TV set is switched off.
MEDIA: Open MediaPortal.
 Select DR+ Streaming,
OK call.
You will see a message on the screen. After approximately 20 seconds
the TV set will enter extended standby mode. The DR archive will then
be accessible within the network for the period of time set in the DR+
Streaming settings (see page 89).
TEXT
OK
{,-=
,
-
UEFA Champions League - Qualifikation
20.08. Sat.1
Tagesschau
19.08. Das Erste HD
heute
19.08. ZDF HD
Tatort
29.07. 3sat
Individual
00.00. LOEWE.
09:45 - 10:00
DR ARCHIVE free capacity 59:14 hrs
LOEWE TV
Edit/protect
Delete/copy
Change sorting
Detail View
Timer list
MEDIA PORTAL
TV
DR+ StreamingMediaHome
DVB radio DR archive
MediaNet
Index
Internet radio
Digital Recorder
107 -
english
Copy recordings from an accessible TV set
You can copy archive entries from an accessible TV set via a network to
the integrated hard disc, or to a storage medium connected to the TV
set’s USB.
At the target TV set:
Call DR archive.
Select required accessible TV set.
Select titles to be copied as described on page 101.
Blue button: Call Copy entry.
If there are multiple storage mediums available,
select the one required.
OK Start the copy procedure.
Copying to the integrated or external hard disc takes place in the
background and at a significantly higher speed. Contrary to copying
recordings to a connected recorder (see page 101), there are no
selection restrictions here regarding the stations. You see a screen
message, when copying has finished.
The status of copying assignments in progress can be seen in the timer
overview.
During copying, neither the accessible TV set nor the target TV set may
be disconnected from the mains! Copying will otherwise be interrupted
and the recording may then be unusable.
Follow me function
The Follow me function enables you to interrupt a current broadcast and
to continue viewing at an alternative TV set from the point of interruption.
DR continuous operation is activated (page 88).
Share the DR archive with other TVs (see page 89)
is activated.
Using the DR archives of other TVs (see page 89) is
activated at the target TV set.
Press PAUSE button.
The TV image becomes a freeze frame and the DR status
display appears.
Yellow button: Activate Follow me.
You will see a message on the screen. An archive record-
ing starts in approximately 20 seconds. The broadcast
is adopted into the DR archive. The set switches off
automatically.
The recording TV set will make the broadcast available to the network
from now. Open the DR archive / Video archive of the TV set on which
you wish to view the broadcast. The broadcast appears in orange during
the current recording.
To play accessible broadcasts on other TV sets, see
page 106.
For further information on general operation see page 98.
TEXT
OK
۩
,
-
IFA 2010 - Highlights
16.09. ZDF HD
Top-Movie 1
15.09. Sky Cinema HD
Bon(n) jour Berlin
14.09. Phoenix
da capo
31.08. Das Erste
Tagesschau
29.07. 3sat
Individual
00.00. LOEWE.
DR ARCHIVE free capacity 68:28 hrs
INDIVIDUAL 55
Edit/protect
Delete/copy
Change sorting
Detail View
Timer list
09:5609:45 10:00
Follow me
3KRHQL[6WHUHR܃
09:45-10:00 Bon(n) jour Berlin
DR archive
Language/sound
OK
OK
DR ARCHIVE
Copy
14.09. Phoenix Bon(n) jour Berlin
confirm
Copy to ... Integrated hard disk USB1
Digital Recorder
- 108
english
Checking the hard disc
You can check the integrated hard disc of the TV set
(1
, e.g. if problems
with the Digital Recorder function occur.
Call TV menu.
 Select Settings,

switch to the menu line below
.
 Select Miscellaneous,

switch to the menu line below
.
 Select Check integrated hard disk,
OKactivate.
Red button: Start check.
After the check, a message will appear on the screen
showing the results of the check and tips on how to
resolve any problems that are present, should there be
any.
After the check, the TV set must be re-started.
Or:
END: Cancel the operation.
Formatting the hard disc
If problems were detected when the hard disc was being tested (see left
column), re-formatting may be able to remedy the problem.
Additionally, you can re-format the hard disc in order to quickly and easily
delete all the data stored on it.
Attention!
Formatting of the hard disk deletes all the data saved on it!
Call TV menu.
 Select Settings,

switch to the menu line below
.
 Select Miscellaneous,

switch to the menu line below
.
 Select Format integrated hard disk
(1
or Format external
hard disk,
OKactivate.
Red button: Start formatting.
After the formatting, the TV set must be re-started.
Or:
END: Cancel the operation.
Note on formatting external USB discs:
The TV set uses the hard disc file system FAT32. The file system NTFS is
not supported. PCs with the operating system Microsoft Windows only
support a total hard disc volume of 32GB when formatting on FAT32.
Larger hard discs are automatically reduced in their capacity by this.
Format external USB discs that you wish to use with the TV set as de-
scribed above.
ATTENTION
If the formatting of the hard disc is confirmed by pressing the button
then the TV switches itself off and then back on, and the formatting of the
herd disc starts automatically. Attention! This process will delete all data
stored on the hard disc.
Do you really want to format the hard disc?
Start formatting No, cancel the operation
Digital Recorder
ATTENTION
The hard disk check can be launched by pressing the confirmation key
and can take up to 20 minutes?
Start check No, cancel the operation
(1
only for TV sets with DR
+
.
109 -
english
Further information
VPS and automatic time control
Your TV set can use the supporting technologies VPS (Video Programming
System) and automatic time control for recording a broadcast.
VPS serves for monitoring the start and end time of the broadcast with
analogue stations. The VPS time indication is compared by the digital
recorder with the start time programmed by the user. If both times cor-
respond the recording is started. However, VPS is not supported by all
stations.
The automatic time control assumes the corresponding monitoring of the
start and end time for DVB stations. The recording is started at the begin-
ning of the broadcast and switched off at the end, even if the start and/
or end time have been changed by the programme provider. Broadcast
interruptions are also taken into account. However, the automatic time
control is not supported by all stations.
Digital Recorder
- 110
english
DVB Common Interface standard (CI)
If a programme has been recorded coded, the decoding process is carried
out automatically the next night in the standby mode (when timer data
settings do not differ). Please note that the TV set may not be switched
off at the mains overnight and that the CA module with SmartCard must
be inserted in the CI slot of the TV set.
If the recording is not decoded fairly soon after decoding, it may not be
possible to decode it at all. The longer the time between recording and
decoding, the greater the probability that the code is no longer valid.
Scrambled hard disc recordings appear in the timer list until they are
descrambled (page 94).
You can also start decoding manually (see page 102).
Your programme provider may not support later (time offset) descram-
bling.
You can have programmes from scrambled stations descrambled already
in DR continuous mode. This saves you having to decode directly recorded
scrambled programmes later. An appropriate CA module with SmartCard
must be inserted in the TV set’s CI slot for this.
The playback of encrypted programmes is strongly dependent on
which CA module is used. The playback of encrypted recordings may
sometimes not be possible, or only to a limited extent.
Hint: When possible, record unencrypted programmes or unencrypt
them as soon as possible.
Selection possibilities in the CA module menu and performance ca-
pability of your CA module depend on the type of module used and
the installed software. Consult the manufacturer of the module if you
have any questions.
Digital Recorder
111 -
english
DVB Common Interface Plus standard (CI Plus)
Software update for CI Plus capable CA modules
Every now and then, there will be new system software for your CA
module software. There are two software update types.
Recommended update:
Information on an available update is displayed. You can either run this
or cancel the procedure. If you do not install the update, the informa-
tion will reappear in regular intervals until the update has been installed.
Forced update:
Information on an available update is displayed. The module does not
decode any more until the update has been successfully implemented.
Troubleshooting (CA module)
The following information can help, if problems should occur when
running a CA module:
Switch the TV set off to the standby mode. Remove the CA module from
the TV set. Switch the TV set off completely. Wait a few seconds. Reinsert
the CA module. Switch the TV set on again.
If errors continue to occur, make a note of the displayed two-digit error
code (only for CI Plus capable CA modules). Contact your technical cus-
tomer service. You will find the service addresses on page 160.
Digital Recorder
CI Plus is an advanced development of the DVB Common Interface
Standard. CI Plus slots are in principle downward compatible to the
previous CI standard, i.e. CA modules and Smart Cards according to the
past CI standard can continue to be used in CI Plus slots, as far as the
programme provider permits this.
The regulations of the past standards (see page 27) likewise apply to CI
Plus. There are however further additional regulations.
Programme providers, who use the CI Plus standard, can assign differ-
ent rights for their broadcast programmes. For instance, the programme
provider can restrict or completely prevent recording or later watching of
an encoded programme. If there are such regulations, these also apply
to time-shifted watching of television programmes.
A screen message informs you of this fact, if you would like to record
such a programme. Recording is carried out in such a case (an appropriate
entry is displayed in the DR archive), later watching of the programme
is however not possible at all or only for a limited period (e.g. 10 days).
A possible time limitation of the playback will also appear in the cor-
responding entry in the DR archive.
The provider can also prohibit later decoding of a recorded encoded
programme.
All restrictions mentioned here are the responsibilities of the broad-
caster. The TV simply values the broadcaster set signalling as neutral.
Furthermore, the programme provider can prevent external copying
of protected programmes, e.g. on a DVD recorder (also after possible
decoding).
It could be necessary to enter the parental protection PIN of the CA mod-
ule when programming the data, if you want to record a CI Plus protected
programme, which has been protected against viewing by minors. The
secret number of the TV set is required for watching the programme later.
The appearance of the CA module menu of CI Plus can deviate from the
normal appearance of the TV menu.
- 112
english
Connections menu
Settings for the connection of external appliances are made in this menu.
Calling the connections menu
MENU: Call TV menu.
 Select Connections,
go to the menu line below.
 Select the desired setting.
Explanations of setting possibilities in the Connections menu:
The sound components wizard helps you to configure the
components which are used to reproduce the TV sound.
You will find a description of the sound components
wizard on page 119.
Here you can set the parameters of the DVB-T and the
DVB-S
(1
antenna with the antenna wizard. The setting
options of the DVB antennas are described in the first
time operation routine (from page 22).
See right column for explanations.
See page 113 for explanations.
AV connection settings
In the AV connection settings menu the parameters for the AV and AVS
connection sockets can be adapted.
Calling AV connection settings
MENU: Call TV menu.
 Select Connections,
go to the menu line below.
 Select AV connecting settings,
go to the menu line below.
 Select the desired setting.
Explanations of setting possibilities in the AV connecting settings menu:
Indicate here whether a set and, if yes, which one is con-
nected to the AV socket.
You set the AV standard of the connected appliance to
AV or AVS here.
Normally you leave the setting on Automatic. If the
standard of the connected appliance is not detected
automatically, select the right standard.
Ask your dealer or consult the operating manual of the
connected appliance if necessary.
You set the signal type of the device connected to AV
or AVS here. Normally, you should leave the setting at
Automatic; otherwise select a suitable signal type. You
can find out more from your dealer.
If this function is activated and you switch an AV device
(not at AVS) that outputs a switching voltage to playback,
its picture and sound will be played immediately on all
TV station slots.
External devices
Sound
components
Antenna DVB
AV connecting
settings
Miscellaneous
Antenna DVB AV connecting settings Miscel
TV MENU
Connections
Sound components
OK
AV standard Signal type Allow switchi
n
TV MENU
Connections
AV connecting settings
Device at connection AV
No device ...
Device at
connection AV
AV standard
Signal type
Allow
switching
voltage
(1
Equipment and upgrade options, see page 146.
113 -
english
Connections – Miscellaneous
Various settings (e.g. Digital Link, Decoder etc.) in connection with ex-
ternal appliances are made in this menu.
Calling up other settings for connections
MENU: Call TV menu.
 Select Connections,
go to the menu line below.
 Select Miscellaneous,
go to the menu line below.
 Select the desired setting.
Explanations of setting possibilities in the Miscellaneous menu:
With this function the station data of the TV set can
be transmitted to a connected Digital Link Plus capable
recorder. Only the station data of analogue TV stations
can be transmitted.
Here you can identify analogue stations with encoded
content as decoder stations and set the mode of the sound
encoding of encoded audio signals, so that these are
automatically decoded by a decoder connected to AV.
Menu item only available if a Decoder has been selected
as Device at connection AV (see page 112).
Here you can select whether the TV set is to switch on
automatically from Standby mode, if a tape / disc is to be
played or a screen menu displayed from Digital Link HD
or Digital Link Plus-enabled devices which are connected
to HDMI or AV inputs (see also page 114 and 116).
You can assign the digital audio input socket (AUDIO
DIGITAL IN) to an AV input (AV, HDMI, PC IN etc.) here
(see page 125).
Here you can set a faster display of your activities on the
screen for various inputs of the TV set, e.g. for games
consoles (see right hand column).
Gaming mode
For the inputs of your TV set on which game consoles, PC applications
or even Karaoke machines are operated, we recommend you to activate
the Gaming mode. Your activities are then displayed quicker on the screen
by reducing the complex picture improving techniques. This mode can
be set separately for every input of your TV set.
MENU: Call TV menu.
 Select Connections,
go to the menu line below.
 Select Miscellaneous,
go to the menu line below.
Select Gaming mode,
OK call.
Select socket,
OK Gaming mode for selected socket on/off.
You can recognise AV connections with set Gaming mode
by the symbol ܫ after the connection name.
Switching Games mode on/off via the status display
You can also switch the Games mode for the selected AV input on and
off via the status display.
Call AV selection.
 Select desired connection,
OK switch over.
INFO: Call up status display (if this is no longer shown
after switching to the AV connection).
Green button: Switch Gaming mode for selected connect-
ed on or off according to status.
External devices
Digital
Link Plus
Decoder
stations
Remote TV
switch on via
Digital Link
Assign digital
audio input
Gaming mode
Decoder stations Remote TV switch on via Dig
TV MENU
Connections
Miscellaneous
Digital Link Plus
Start transmission
OK
OK
SET GAMING MODE FOR INPUTS ...
HDMI3
HDMI2
+'0,ܫ
PC IN
AVS
AV
VIDEO
Gaming mode on/off
Gaming mode on
۫
+'0,$9VRXQG܃
- 114
english
Connecting a DVD player to the TV set
A DVD player has been selected in the TV Menu under Connections ט
AV connecting settings ט Device at connection AV (see also page 112).
Switch off all equipment before connecting.
Connect the Euro-AV output of the DVD player to the AV socket of the
TV set.
Use a fully equipped Euro-AV cable (available from your dealer) for this.
Playback from AV device
If the device at AV supports the Digital Link Plus functionality or if in the
TV menu ט Connections ט AV connecting settings ט Allow switching
voltage ט yes, the TV set will automatically switch to the corresponding
AV input after starting the replay at the AV device.
The AV input can also be called manually, however.
Call AV selection.
Select AV,
OK switch over.
Start playback on the connected device.
Devices to the connections AV/AVS
An additional appliance such as a DVD player, VCR/DVD recorder etc. can
be connected to the TV set at the Euro-AV socket AV (see page 11).
The AV input AVS (see page 11) offers the possibility of connecting a
digital camera or a Camcorder for example.
The AV sockets can process different signal types. Which signal type your
accessory device provides can be found in the operating manual of the
appropriate device.
Owing to the large number of AV devices available on the market, we can
only mention a few examples for the connection of accessory equipment
to the AV sockets here.
If the sound of the device connected to an AV socket is to be transmit-
ted digitally, a cinch cable must be plugged between the coaxial digital
output of the accessory equipment and the AUDIO DIGITAL IN socket of
the TV set. In addition, the digital audio input must be assigned to the
appropriate AV socket.
The digital audio input can be assigned to the appropriate AV socket by
the TV menu ט Connections ט Miscellaneous ט Assign digital audio input
(see page 125).
Remote TV switch on via Digital Link
You can select whether the TV set is to switch on automatically from
Standby mode if a disc is played or a screen menu displayed on a Digital
Link Plus-enabled device connected to AV.
You can find the settings in the TV Menu under Connections ט Other ט
Remote TV switch on via Digital Link (see also page 113).
OK
AV SELECTION
HDMI3
HDMI2
HDMI1
PC IN
AVS
AV
VIDEO
Switch to ...
External devices
AV
Connection example of a DVD player
TV set
DVD player
AV
115 -
english
Connecting a DVD recorder to the TV set
A DVD recorder has been selected in the TV Menu under Connections ט
AV connecting settings ט Device at connection AV (see also page 112).
Switch off all equipment before connecting.
Connect the Euro-AV output of the DVD recorder to the AV socket of
the TV set.
Use a fully equipped Euro-AV cable (available from your dealer) for this.
If you want to receive and record analogue stations with the receiver
(tuner) built into the recorder, the recorder must be looped into the
aerial cable.
Connect the DVD recorder as shown in the connection example below.
If you want to record DVB stations with an external recorder, the
internal receiver of the TV set must be used (see Timer recording with
external devices on page 128).
Playback from AV device
Call AV selection.
Select AV,
OK switch over.
Start playback on the connected device.
Connecting Camcorder/camera
Switch off all equipment before connecting.
Connect the AV output of the camcorder to the sound input sockets
AUDIO IN L (white) and AUDIO IN R (red) and the AVS connection of the
side AV sockets of the TV set.
Use the AV cable enclosed with the camcorder for this.
Some camcorders only supply an FBAS signal instead of an S-Video signal
at the AV output. In this case use the VIDEO IN input (yellow).
If your camcorder has an HDMI output, you can also connect the ap-
pliance via the HDMI socket HDMI3 on the side (see connections page
11 or Devices to the HDMI connections page 116).
Playback from AV device
Call AV selection.
Select AVS,
OK switch over.
Start playback on the connected device.
Connection example of a DVD recorder
TV set
DVD recorder
AV
ANT TV
TV set
Camcorder
AUDIO IN L/R
AVS
Connection example of a camcorder
OK
AV SELECTION
HDMI3
HDMI2
HDMI1
PC IN
AVS
AV
VIDEO
Switch to ...
OK
AV SELECTION
HDMI3
HDMI2
HDMI1
PC IN
AVS
AV
VIDEO
Switch to ...
External devices
ANT IN
ANT OUT
AV
R
TV
- 116
english
Devices to the HDMI connections
The HDMI connections (High Definition Multimedia Interface) allow the
transmission of digital video and audio signals from a player (e.g. DVD
player, DVD recorder, Blu-ray player, game console or Set-Top-Box) via
a single cable.
The digital video and audio data are transmitted without data compres-
sion digitally and therefore lose none of their quality.
A maximum of five devices can be connected in cascade to every HDMI
socket. The devices are arranged in the AV menu and in the station list
below the appropriate HDMI socket. If the respective device sends its own
device name, this appears in place of the connection name.
Your TV set can show 24p films, which are output from a connected
HDMI player (e.g. Loewe BluTech Vision Interactive) optimally (see glos-
sary, page 150).
Digital video signals from a DVI player can be also be reproduced by the
HDMI connection using a DVI/HDMI adapter cable. The sound must be
piped in additionally. However, the sound must then be supplied additionally.
HDMI and DVI both use the same copy protection method HDCP.
Connecting the device
Switch off all equipment before connecting.
Connect the device by an HDMI cable (Type A, 19-pole) to one of the
HDMI sockets of the TV set.
An HDMI device is connected to the side HDMI socket (e.g. camcorder)
in the same way as shown in the figure.
If a DVI/HDMI adapter cable is used, the corresponding sound can be
piped through the AUDIO IN (analogue) or AUDIO DIGITAL IN (digital)
socket on the TV set (see also page 125).
Playback from the device
If the device at HDMI supports the Digital Link HD functionality, the TV set
will automatically switch to the corresponding HDMI input after starting
the replay at the HDMI device.
The HDMI input can also be called up manually:
Call AV selection.
Select HDMI socket.
With Digital Link HD-capable devices the device
name may possibly appear in place of the connection
name.
OK Switch over.
Start playback on the connected HDMI device. The best
possible format for the picture is detected and set auto-
matically.
Remote TV switch on via Digital Link
You can select whether the TV set is to switch on automatically from
Standby mode if a disc is played or a screen menu displayed on a Digital
Link HD-enabled device connected to HDMI1 or HDMI2.
You can find the settings in the TV Menu under Connections ט Other ט
Remote TV switch on via Digital Link (see also page 113).
HDMI1
TV set
Blu-ray player
Connection example of an HDMI device (e.g. Blu-ray Player)
OK
AV SELECTION
HDMI3
HDMI2
HDMI1
PC IN
AVS
AV
VIDEO
Switch to ...
External devices
HDMI
117 -
english
Digital Link HD
Digital Link HD (HDMI CEC)
The Digital Link HD (HDMI CEC) system operation allows Loewe television
sets to transmit the remote control signals via the HDMI connection of a
TV set to compatible HDMI devices, such as e.g. Loewe AudioVision. You
can therefore set up a concealed CEC capable HDMI device.
Concealed installation of HDMI devices
For this, first assign the HDMI CEC function with Code 22 to the required
device button (REC, DVD or AUDIO) as described on page 129.
Now assign the Digital Link HD function to the used HDMI device.
Assign HDMI device
The CEC capable HDMI device is connected to one of
the HDMI sockets of the TV set and switched on.
Press required button for 5 seconds.
A selection menu appears on the TV set.
 Select required device from the list.
OK Adopt.
From now on, the commands of the remote control are
communicated from the TV set to the HDMI device, if
the corresponding device button (REC, DVD or AUDIO)
has been pressed previously.
Adjust Geometry (only possible with certain signals)
This allows you to shift the picture (horizontally and vertically) so that it
fills the entire screen.
When connecting a PC to an HDMI socket of the TV set, set the out-
put signal at your PC beforehand so that it corresponds to one of the
signals in the table on page 141.
MENU: Call TV menu.
 Select Picture,
go to the menu line below.
 Select more ...,
OKcall.
 Select PC IN display,
go to the menu line below.
Select the desired setting,
go to the menu line below.
Make settings.
OK
OK
HINT
Here you select the device which you want to switch over your remote control
to with the key. After confirming the selection with OK all remote control
commands are passed on to the selected device via the TV set in future when
you press this key.
SELECT HDMI DEVICE FOR KEY
AUDIO
AudioVision
No device
Adopt
AUDIO
External devices
Picture vertical
MENU TV
Picture
PC IN display
Picture horizontal
66
- 118
english
Devices to the PC IN connection
You can connect a PC to the PC IN socket for example and thus use the
TV screen as a monitor.
When connecting a PCs or accessory device to the PC IN socket of the
TV set, set the output signal on your PC first so that it matches one of
the signals in the table on page 141.
Connecting the device
Switch off all equipment before connecting.
Connect the device to the TV set’s PC IN socket with a VGA cable.
Connect the analogue audio signal of the PC to the AUDIO IN jack on
the TV set with a stereo cable.
Alternatively, connect the digital audio output of the PC or accessory equip-
ment to the AUDIO DIGITAL IN socket of the TV set with a cinch cable.
The digital audio input can be assigned to the PC IN socket by TV menu
ט
Connections
ט
Miscellaneous
ט
Assign digital audio input (see page
125).
If your PC has an HDMI interface, you can also connect the PC via the
HDMI socket to your TV set (see page 116).
Depending on the version of the HDMI connection on the PC, the audio
signal is also transmitted via the HDMI connection.
If this is not the case, connect the analogue or digital sound as described
above. See the appropriate operating manual for further information
about the version of the HDMI interface on your PC.
.
Playback from the device
Call AV selection.
Select PC IN socket,
OK switch over.
PC picture adjustment (only possible with certain signals)
In this menu you can set the position (vertical, horizontal) and the phase
length of your PC.
MENU: Call TV menu.
 Select Picture,
go to the menu line below.
 Select more ...,
OKcall.
 Select PC IN display,
go to the menu line below.
Select the desired setting,
go to the menu line below.
Make settings.
Connecting units with component connection (YPbPr / YUV)
External units with component connection YPbPr (often informally re-
ferred to as YUV; see also Glossary on page 154) can be connected to
the PC IN socket of the TV set using a VGA adapter. The VGA adapter is
available as an accessory from your Loewe dealer.
The other units are connected as described in the left column.
OK
AV SELECTION
HDMI3
HDMI2
HDMI1
PC IN
AVS
AV
VIDEO
Switch to ...
External devices
Connection example of a PC
PC
PC IN
AUDIO
IN
TV set
Picture vertical Phase position
TV MENU
Picture
PC IN display
Picture horizontal
66
VGAAUDIO
119 -
english
Sound components wizard
The sound components wizard helps you to configure the components
that are used to reproduce the TV sound. For sound reproduction, you
can configure the TV loudspeakers, active loudspeakers, loudspeaker
systems, Loewe Individual Sound Projector SL
(1
as well as analogue and
digital HiFi/AV amplifiers.
TV sets that are equipped with an integrated digital multi-channel audio
decoder can output sound signals with up to six channels (5.1 surround
sound) via the AUDIO LINK interface irrespective of whether the sound
signal comes from an external device (DVD player, Blu-ray player) or from
a DVB station.
For settings for loudspeaker systems and active speakers at the AUDIO
LINK interface of the TV set, see page 120 onwards.
For sound formats supported by the digital audio decoder, see page 141.
Sound reproduction in TV sets with an integrated digital multi-channel
audio decoder
Sound reproduction via the built-in TV speakers (factory
setting).
Sound reproduction via a loudspeaker system or active
loudspeakers (see page 120).
Sound reproduction via an external analogue or digital
audio amplifier (see page 124).
Sound reproduction via a sound projector, e.g. Loewe
Individual Sound Projector SL. For further information,
refer to the operating instructions of the sound projector.
Sound reproduction optionally via an external analogue
or digital audio amplifier (see page 124) or via the built-
in TV loudspeakers. The sound reproduction can be
changed using the button ܃.
Sound reproduction optionally via a sound projector or
via the built-in TV loudspeakers. The sound reproduction
can be changed using the button ܃.
External devices
OK
OK
SOUND COMPONENTS
Sound playback via ...
TV speakers ۪
Speaker system
HiFi/AV amplifier
Sound projector
HiFi/AV amplifier or TV speakers (switchable)
Sound projector or TV speakers (switchable)
End of wizard
TV speakers
Speaker system
HiFi/AV
amplifier
Sound
projector
(1
HiFi/AV-
amplifier or TV
speakers
(switchable)
Sound projector
or TV speakers
(switchable)
(1
(1
Only with retrofitted serial interface (RJ12) (see page 125 and equipment and
upgrade possibilities on page 146).
- 120
english
Connecting
Switch off all devices before connecting.
Subwoofer with AUDIO LINK interface (see connection diagram):
The subwoofer is connected to the TV set via the AUDIO LINK interface.
Use the AUDIO LINK cable provided with the subwoofer.
Subwoofer without AUDIO LINK interface (not illustrated):
Plug the adapter cable to the AUDIO LINK interface of the TV set. Connect
the cinch connections of the adapter cable to the 6-pin cinch connections
of the subwoofer.
The cubic plug cable connects the master connection on the subwoofer
to the cubic plug of the adapter cable.
The adapter and cubic plug cable are available from your dealer (see
Accessories, page 145).
Connecting Loewe sound system
Setup
The arrangement of speakers and TV set can look like the illustration
below:
The front and surround speakers should be installed symmetrically to the
TV set and to your sitting position.
You can place the subwoofer anywhere on the floor. We recommend
placing it in front asymmetrically next to the TV set.
If a centre speaker is used, it should be placed centrally below the TV set.
For the settings in the sound components wizard enter the distances of
the centre speaker, and the front and surround speakers to your sitting
position. This guarantees a natural spatial image of the sound.
Installation example for a Loewe sound system
Connection Loewe sound system (Subwoofer) to the TV set
AUDIO LINK cable
TV set
Subwoofer
External devices
Front
left
Surround
left
TV speakers
as center
Subwoofer
Front
right
Surround
right
AudioLink
Line In
Speaker
Out
Left
Center
Right
Left Right Left Right
Left
Phase
Equalizer
Crossover
Frequency
Bass
Intensity
180°
-3dB
+6dB
50Hz
250Hz
min
max
Subw Right
Rear
Front
Front Rear
121 -
english
Connecting active loudspeakers
If you want to use another similar speaker system or active speakers,
you can connect these to the AUDIO LINK interface of the TV set with
an adapter cable.
A comparable speaker system is connected in a similar way to that de-
scribed above for “subwoofer without AUDIO LINK interface”.
The adapter cable is available from your dealer (see Accessories, page 145).
Connecting active speakers
Switch off all devices before connecting.
Plug the adapter cable into the AUDIO LINK interface of the TV set. Con-
nect the cinch connections of the adapter cable to the connections of
the corresponding active speakers.
The cinch connections of the adapter cable are labelled:
R for Front right SR for Surround right
L for Front left SL for Surround left
C for Centre SUB for Subwoofer
The connections on the adapter cable are preamplifier outputs. Therefore,
only active speakers may be connected directly to the adapter cable.
Adjusting the speaker system
Calling the sound components wizard
In normal TV mode, without other displays.
MENU: Call TV menu.
 Select Connections,
go to the menu line below.
 Select Sound components,
OK calls the sound components wizard.
Sound playback via ... speakers system
Enter here that you want to hear the TV sound over a speaker system.
If you connect active speakers, please use the setting Speaker system.
 Mark Speaker system,
OK to continue.
If nothing has been set yet, the factory settings or other-
wise the last set values are displayed.
continued on the next page
p
OK
OK
SOUND COMPONENTS
Sound playback via ...
TV speakers
6SHDNHUV\VWHP۪
HiFi/AV amplifier
Sound projector
HiFi/AV amplifier or TV speakers (switchable)
Sound projector or TV speakers (switchable)
Proceed
SOUND COMPONENTS WIZARD
Please specify here via which sound components you want to listen to your TV
sound. If you select a "Speaker system", this must be connected to the
AUDIO LINK socket on the back of the TV set (with an additional adapter if
necessary).
If your TV has no built-in speakers, the sections relating to "TV-speakers" may
not be selected.
TV TV
90Hz
90Hz
4,0m 4,0m
TV TV
0dB 0dB
TV TV
OK
SOUND COMPONENTS
Speaker system
Configuration/modification
Proceed
SOUND COMPONENTS WIZARD
Please specify whether you want to change the illustrated setting of your
speaker system or whether all existing settings are to be reset to the values
of the delivery state.
Components Distances Level
Reset to factory settings
OK
Adapter cable
TV set
Connection of active speakers to the TV set
External devices
Front
right
Front
left
Surround
left
Surround
right
Centre
Subwoofer
R
SR
SL
L
C
SUB
R
SR
SL
C
SUB
L
- 122
english
If you want to set up or change a speaker system:
 Select Configuration/modification,
OK call selection.
 Select Complete,
OK continue to connect and set the front speakers.
 Select External speakers or TV speakers,
go to the menu line below and
set the lower limit frequency of the external front
speakers in 10 Hz steps.
Select the start value of the frequency response of the
speakers for the right setting (e.g. 50Hz for the
specification “Frequency response 50-20.000Hz”). See
the technical data of the speakers for the value.
You can replace the external front speakers by the TV
speakers if necessary. In this case, select TV speakers.
Then transmit the sound of the front speakers.
OK continue to connect and set the surround speakers.
 Select yes for external speakers.
If no surround speakers are connected, these can be
simulated using the front and centre speakers.
Go to the menu line below and
set the lower limit frequency of the surround
speakers in 10 Hz steps.
Select the start value of the frequency response of the
speakers for the right setting.
OK continue to connect and set the centre speaker.
 Select whether the TV speakers or an External
speaker is to reproduce the centre sound or no if
no centre speaker is connected.
If no centre speaker is connected, the front speakers
also transmit the centre sound parts additionally.
for External speakers or TV speakers go to the
menu line below and
set the lower limit frequency of the centre speaker
in 10 Hz steps.
Select the start value of the frequency response of the
speakers for the right setting.
OK continue to connect the Subwoofer.
 yes is the selection for subwoofer.
If no subwoofer is connected, the front speakers
additionally transmit the sound parts intended for the
subwoofer as far as possible.
OK
OK
SOUND COMPONENTS
Configuration/modification of speaker system
Complete
Connections only
Distances only
Levels only
SOUND COMPONENTS WIZARD
Please specify here whether you want to completely reconfigure a speaker
system or whether you want to limit the configuration to changing the speaker
connections, the speaker distances from the listening position or the individual
speaker levels in relation to each other.
Select
40Hz
40Hz
OK
Proceed
SOUND COMPONENTS WIZARD
Please specify here whether you want to connect
external front speakers. In this case, their lower
limit frequency must be entered in Hz (see
instruction manual and technical data of the
speakers).
TV speak
e
SOUND COMPONENTS
Connect front speakers
External speakers
40 Hz
k
ers
90Hz
90Hz
OK
Proceed
SOUND COMPONENTS WIZARD
Please specify here whether you want to connect
external front speakers. In this case, their lower
limit frequency must be entered in Hz (see
instruction manual and technical data of the
speakers).
SOUND COMPONENTS
Connect front speakers
External speakers
90 Hz
External devices
continued on the next page
p
123 -
english
OK continue to set the
Distance to left front speaker.
Measure the distances from your listening position to
the front, surround, and centre speakers respectively.
The digital audio decoder calculates delay times from
this for the loudspeaker signals, so that these reach
the listener simultaneously.
Set the distance between the left front speaker
and your listening position in 10 cm steps.
OK continue respectively to the other speakers and
 adjust the distance.
After setting the distance for the centre speaker ...
OK continue to Adjust speaker level.
 Adjust the volume for each speaker.
 Select speakers manually.
For balanced audio reproduction all speakers should be
set at the same volume level. A noise signal will be
reproduced automatically on each speaker in succession.
Adjust every speaker to equal perceived volume from
your listening position
.
OK continue to Subwoofer phase.
Switch to a station with music with P+/P– or start playback
with music on a DVD player.
Test both values ( and 180º) and select the one
with which you get a clearer bass reproduction
from your listening position.
OK to confirm the setting and exit the wizard.
This ends the sound components wizard for connecting
and setting up a speakers system.
4,2m 4,0m
1,0m 0,9m
2,7m
OK
Proceed
SOUND COMPONENTS WIZARD
Please enter the distance of the left front speaker
from your listening position here.
SOUND COMPONENTS
Distance to left front speaker
2 m
0dB 0dB
0dB 0dB
OK
Proceed Preceding/next loudspeaker
SOUND COMPONENTS WIZARD
You hear a sound from every speaker one after
another. But you can also select the speakers
manually with the menu control buttons up/down.
Set the volume for the respectively active speaker
shown in blue so that you get approximately
the same volume impression from
all the speakers.
SOUND COMPONENTS
Adjust speaker level
0 dB
OK
180°
SOUND COMPONENTS WIZARD
Here you can reverse the phase of your subwoofer. Test both values in
music reproduction and then select the one with which you get a better
bass reproduction.
SOUND COMPONENTS
Subwoofer phase
End of wizard
External devices
- 124
english
AUX IN
R
L
SR
R
SUB
C
L
SL
DIGITAL IN
Connecting digital audio amplifiers
Continuation of the left column above ...
For digital audio transmission: Select yes.
Connect the digital audio output of the TV set AUDIO DIGITAL OUT with
the digital audio input of the amplifier via a cinch cable:
Sound formats, amplifier type and other settings, see explanations of the
setting possibilities (left hand column).
Connecting analogue audio amplifiers
Continuation of the left column above ...
For digital audio transmission: Select no.
Connect the analogue audio output of the TV set to the analogue audio
input of the amplifier with a stereo cinch cable with the AUDIO LINK
adapter cable (see accessories on page 145):
For selecting the amplifier type and making other settings, see explana-
tions of the setting possibilities (left hand column).
Connecting audio amplifiers
The sound components wizard permits configuration of different audio
amplifiers (stereo amplifiers, surround amplifiers, analogue or digital) with
different digital audio formats (Dolby Digital, dts, MPEG, and stereo/PCM).
See the operating manual of the audio amplifier for more information.
MENU: Call TV menu.
Select Connections,
go to the menu line below.
Select Sound components.
OK calls the sound components wizard
Mark the HiFi/AV amplifier.
OK Proceed.
Select whether the sound is to be transmitted digi-
tally or analogue to the the amplifier. Continue,
depending on the amplifier, see right column.
Explanations of the setting possibilities:
Settings for the sound projector: See operating manual
of the sound projector.
Select setting when an amplifier is connected and the TV
speakers are not used.
Select setting when an amplifier is connected and the TV
speakers are used. The sound can be switched between
the amplifier and the TV speakers in the listen mode
selection.
Specify sound formats which can be decoded with the digital
amplifier (see operating manual of the used amplifier).
Select either stereo or surround amplifier.
For every connected surround amplifier, select whether
the TV loudspeakers are to be used as centre speaker.
If so, establish a connection between the centre output
of the amplifier and the centre input of the TV set
CENTER IN with a cinch cable.
Attention: Do not use the centre speaker connection of
the amplifier, use the centre pre-amp output instead!
OK
OK
SOUND COMPONENTS
Sound playback via ...
TV speakers
Speaker system
HiFi/AV amplifier ۪
Sound projector
HiFi/AV amplifier or TV speakers (switchable)
Sound projector or TV speakers (switchable)
Proceed
External devices
AUDIO
DIGITAL
OUT
TV set
Digital amplifier
Analogue amplifier
TV set
AUDIO
LINK
HiFi/AV
amplifier
HiFi/AV
amplifier or TV
speakers
(switchable)
Sound
formats
Type of
amplifier
TV loudsp. as
centre speaker
125 -
english
Audio connection in HDMI/DVI devices
External devices with DVI connection
If an external device with DVI interface is connected via a HDMI/DVI
adapter to one of the HDMI sockets of the TV set, you can connect the
digital sound of the external device to the digital audio input socket
AUDIO DIGITAL IN.
The assignment of the digital audio input to the corresponding HDMI
socket of the TV set takes place as described in the column on the left.
If you want to use the analogue sound of the external device, connect
it to the AUDIO IN socket.
External devices with HDMI connection
If external devices with an HDMI interface are connected to one of the
HDMI sockets of the TV set, no assignment of the audio input is necessary
because the digital transmission of picture and sound takes place via a
single connection in HDMI.
Serial interface RS-232C (RJ12)
You can connect either the Loewe Individual Sound Projector SL or a home
network system of different manufacturers (e.g. AMX, Crestron) to your
TV set via the upgradable RS-232C (RJ12) interface.
Please consult your dealer for configuration of the RS-232C (RJ12) interface
and further information about the different home networking systems.
Assignment of the digital audio input
In order to be able to hear the digital sound of an external device con-
nected to an AV input, an AV input can be assigned to the digital audio
input socket AUDIO DIGITAL IN. By switching to this AV input, the digital
audio signal at the AUDIO DIGITAL IN input is communicated to the integral
digital multi-channel audio decoder and the digital audio output socket
AUDIO DIGITAL OUT. You will then hear the digital sound of the assigned
AV input instead of the analogue sound if available.
Connecting devices to the digital audio input
For the digital audio playback from an external device, e.g. the DVD player,
you have to feed the digital audio signal to the TV set.
The external digital audio signal can be reproduced via the digital multi-
channel audio decoder integrated in the TV set, via an externally connected
digital audio amplifier or via a Loewe Individual Sound Projector SL
(1
.
If an external audio amplifier or Loewe Individual Sound
Projector is used, this must be registered in the sound
components wizard (see page 124).
MENU: Call TV menu.
Select Connections,
go to the menu line below.
Select Miscellaneous,
go to the menu line below.
Select Assign digital audio input,
go to the menu line below.
Select AV input.
To connect a DVD player to the digital audio input of the
TV set for example, connect the digital output socket of
the DVD player (DIGITAL OUT) via a cinch cable to the
AUDIO DIGITAL IN socket on the TV set.
Connection example for a DVD player, see right hand
column.
to AVS to HDMI1 to HDMI2 to
H
TV MENU
Connections
Miscellaneous
Assign digital audio input
to AV
no
External devices
AUDIO
DIGITAL
IN
TV set
DVD player
AV
DIGITAL
OUT
AV
(1
Only with retrofitted serial interface (RJ12) (see right hand column and equipment
and upgrade possibilities on page 146).
- 126
english
The direct way to record
You can programme timer recordings via the integrated Digital Recorder (if
installed) or connected recorders on the TV set. The recording wizard is in-
tegrated at several places for programming a recording. You will find further
information on recording with the digital recorder from page 92 onwards.
Programming a timer recording with the EPG
You are in EPG mode; if not, press the EPG button.
 Mark the desired broadcast.
RECORD button: Call Timer data (see right hand column).
Programming a timer recording via teletext
You are using the teletext mode; or if not, press the TEXT
button. If HbbTV text opens instead of the standard
teletext (see page 82), press the TEXT button again.
RECORD button: Call the programme pages of the current
station.
Green button: Go to the appropriate page.
Select desired broadcast,
OK calls Timer data (see right hand column).
Entering the Timer data
After selecting the station you wish to record, timer data
will be displayed.
The setting options for the timer data differ depending
on the recorder selection, whether an analogue or DVB
station is to be recorded or via which route (EPG, Teletext)
the recording has been programmed.
Change Timer data if required or,
OK confirm.
Setting possibilities in the Timer data menu:
Selection of the recorder used (AV, DR
(3
).
Day of recording.
Time of recording.
Use VPS data for analogue stations, yes/no
(1
.
If recording encoded stations
(3
you can define here whether
the station is to be encoded during the recording, if possible.
If you choose the setting yes, the programme will be
automatically decrypted at 02.00 the following day
(3
(CA
module must be plugged in).
Here you can indicate the PIN of the programme provider
for your CI plus CA module in order to enable decrypted
recording
(3
of a station protected with parental control.
Use automatic time control, yes/no
(2
.
The recording is performed precisely at the time, even if
the beginning/end time of the programme provider has
changed.
Select once only, Mo–Fri, daily, weekly or Serial
(2(3
.
Select whether broadcast subtitles are to be recorded
(3
.
OK
OK
TIMER DATA
17:15 Brisant
Recorder AV DR
Station 01 Das Erste
Date 22.01.10
Recording time 17:15 until 17:45
Auto time control no
Recording type once only
confirm
OK
300 << Abend > 303
Select programme Record
14.00 Tagesschau
14.10 In aller Freundschaft UT . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Zweite Begegnung (D, 2005)
15.00 Tagesschau
15.10 Sturm der Liebe (221) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
16.00 Tagesschau UT
16.10 Eisbär, Affe & Co. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
17.00 Tagesschau um fünf UT
17.15 Brisant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
17.47 Tagesschau
17.55 Verbotene Liebe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
18.20 Marienhof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
18.50 Das Geheimnis meines . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Vaters (19)
19.20 Das Quiz mit Jörg Pilawa . . . . . . . . . . 384
bis 19.50 Uhr
302 302 ARDtext Do 05. 10. 06 09: 36 : 42
+
Jetzt im TV ARD morgen
Do 05. 10. 06 Das Erste
OK
OK
a
z
-
P+
P–
TEXT
Recording
Select date, ..., topics
View
Select time
Detail
3DJHܬ
EPG (ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE) Mon 01.03./16:05
Date
Time
Station
Topics
arte 15:57-16:59 Charmed - Zauberhafte Hexen
Das Erste 16:00-16:10 Tagesschau
ZDF 16:00-16:10 heute - in Europa
WDR Köln 16:00-16:15 WDR aktuell
Bayerisches... 16:00-16:05 Rundschau
hr-fernsehen 16:00-16:30 Schlemmerreise Spanien
MDR FERNS... 16:00-16:15 Hier ab vier
NDR FS HH 16:00-16:30 Tipps und Trends - Der Verbraucher...
SWR Fernse... 16:00-16:05 Baden-Württemberg aktuell
2 ZDF
&KDUPHG=DXEHUKDIWH+H[HQ۲
MON 01.03.
now until 17.00 17.00 18.00 19.00
all
all
External devices
Recorder
Date
Recording time
VPS
Descrambled
recording
Decoding
overnight
Programme
provider PIN
Auto time
control
Recording type
Record
subtitles
(1
only available with some analogue stations.
(2
only available when recording via EPG.
(3
only for devices with an integrated hard disc (DR
+
) or a connected external hard disc
(USB recording), see page 92 onwards.
127 -
english
Programming the timer with the timer overview
All programmed recordings, marked programmes and copy orders
(1
are
listed in the timer overview. You can also programme new recordings,
mark other programmes and copy
(1
pre-recorded programmes from the
DR archive to an external recorder with the timer overview.
Call DR archive
(1
.
Red button: Call Timer list.
Red button: New entry (see right hand column).
Green button: Change recording.
Yellow button: Delete recording.
Blue button: Delete memo.
Explanation of the symbols in the timer list:
Record
۰ Repeated recording (daily, weekly or Mon-Fri)
ܱ Serial recording
(1
Decoding order (later decoding of an encrypted recorded
programme
(1
)
۪ Marked programme (see page 52)
New entry: Programme timer recording manually
Timer list is opened.
Red button: Call New timer entry.
Select Recording,
OK call.
Select Manual.
For programming a timer recording Via EPG or Via
Teletext see page 126.
OK Call Station selection.
Select station.
OK Call Timer data.
Entry of the timer data see page 126.
After confirming the timer data the new recording is
transferred to the timer overview.
New entry: Memorize programme using the timer overview
Timer list is opened.
Red button: Call New timer entry.
Select Memo.
OK EPG is opened.
Note desired programme as described in Switching and
memorizing with the programme list (page 52).
New entry: Copying DR archive entries
(1
Timer list is opened.
An external recorder is registered.
Red button: Call New timer entry.
Select Copy.
OK The DR archive is opened.
See the chapter Copying recordings (pages 101 and 102)
for further steps.
7,0(5/,67 0RQ
0RQ 'DV(UVWH ۪%ULVDQW
7XH'5)X¡EDOOOLYH
۰57/8QWHUXQV
ܱ=')KHXWH
7XHVDWZLVVHQVSH]LDO
:HG '5ט$9 :HOWGHU:XQGHU
'HOHWHUHFRUGLQJ1HZHQWU\
&KDQJHUHFRUGLQJ
Memo Copy
NEW TIMER ENTRY
Recording
OK
Via teletext Manual
RECORDING WIZARD
Via EPG
OK
Copy
NEW TIMER ENTRY
Memo
OK
Rec
o
ording
NEW TIMER ENTRY
Copy
OK
Recording Vorme
rM
emo
External devices
(1
only for devices with an integrated hard disc (DR
+
) or a connected external hard disc
(USB recording), see page 92 onwards..
- 128
english
Timer recording with external devices
The recording of HDTV stations with external devices is only possible
to a limited degree. The HD transmission is scaled down to SD quality
and output at the AV output for the recording.
Recorder with Digital Link Plus
If you use an externally connected recorder with Digital Link Plus or a
similar system, the TV set and connected recorder exchange data (e.g.
compare station lists TV set/recorder or timer data of analogue stations).
Please consult the operating manual of your recorder to find out of your
recorder is Digital Link Plus compatible. In addition use only Euro-AV
cables for the connection between TV set and recorder.
Analogue stations
The timer data are transmitted automatically from the TV set to
the recorder after programming is complete. (For DVD recorders
in addition the recording quality SQ or EQ is also transmitted.)
The recording is then controlled by the recorder and the recorder
tuner is used for reception of the programme.
The recording data are not saved in the timer overview of the TV
set. Consequently if you want to change or delete the timer data
then you must do so on the recorder.
Digital stations
If you want to record digital stations with an externally connected
recorder, then the DVB tuner is used and the TV device takes over
control of the recorder. Then the station on the TV set is locked
during the timer recording.
It is not possible to switch over to another DVB station.
If using devices with DVB-T/C Twin-Tuner (Equipment variants see
page 146), analogue stations can be viewed on the TV set paral-
lel to the recording with the external device.
Copy protection
Copy-protected programmes will not be output on the EURO AV sockets
for legal reasons.
External devices
129 -
english
Operating Loewe equipment
Using the remote control for the TV mode of the TV set
Press the TV button, the display above it will light for
approx. 5 seconds.
Using the remote control for a Loewe recorder
Press the REC button, the display above it will light for
approx. 5 seconds.
Using the remote control for a Loewe player
Press the DVD button, the display above it will light for
approx. 5 seconds.
Using the remote control for the radio mode of the TV set
Press the AUDIO button, the display above it will light for
approx. 5 seconds.
As long as a button is pressed, the display of the selected operating mode
lights up (TVRECDVDAUDIO). This allows you to check which op-
erating mode the remote control is set to every time you press a button.
The factory setting of the buttons is described above (see also table in
right hand column). The assignment of the buttons can be changed to
suit the existing accessory devices (see right hand column).
Set unit for sound control function on the remote control
The buttons for the sound control functions Volume (
10
), Sound on/off
(
1
) and Sound mode/Sound adjustment (
30
) have been programmed to
interact with the TV at the factory. The unit to be operated can be modified.
Press the TV button and the numeric button at the
same time for minimum 5 seconds. The LED above the
TV button flashes twice.
Function Buttons Unit
Audio
functions
TV + 3 Auro/AudioVision/MediaVision 3D
TV + 4 Mediacenter
TV + 5 Loewe TV
TV + 6 Loewe TV with sound projector without
system connection
Setting the remote control for other Loewe devices
You can operate various Loewe devices with the remote control. The
device keys RECDVDAUDIO can be reassigned to operate various
Loewe devices.
Press the required device buttons and the Stop button
simultaneously for 5 sec. until the corresponding LED
display flashes twice.
Then enter the two-digit device code from the list below.
The associated LED display flashes twice.
Device Code Factory setting
Loewe ViewVision 8106 H 10
Loewe Viewvision, Centros 21x2 12
Loewe ViewVision DR
+
DVB-T 13 REC
Loewe Auro 2216 PS/8116 DT 14
Loewe BluTech Vision 15
Loewe Soundprojector 17
Loewe TV - Digital radio 19 AUDIO
Loewe Mediacenter 20
Loewe BluTech Vision Interactive 21 DVD
HDMI CEC mode 22
Loewe AudioVision 24
Loewe Individual Sound Projector SL 25
Apple IR codes 26
Apple IR codes (Apple TV-2G) 27
Loewe Soundbox 28
Loewe SoundVision 29
Loewe Air Speaker 30
Loewe MediaVision 3D 35
Resetting to factory setting 99
The codes shown here only apply for direct operation of the acces-
sory device.
For operation of the connected accessory device via the TV set, e.g.
with concealed installation (Code 22), see page 117. The remote
control’s signal is transmitted from the TV set to the accessory device
with concealed installation.
The codes that are available may vary depending on the status of the
firmware that the remote control has.
External devices
- 130
english
Software download for updates over USB
Software download from the Loewe Internet site
Where available, you can download new software for your TV set from
our homepage.
To do this, visit our homepage at:
http://support.loewe.tv (International),
http://support.loewe.tv/uk (United Kingdom and Republic of Ireland),
http://support.loewe.tv/au (Australia) or
http://support.loewe.tv/nz (New Zealand)
Choose Register now or Register free-of-charge on the support homepage.
Follow the individual registration process instructions.
After the successful registration process and subsequent login to the
support homepage you have to register your set (have the article number
and serial number ready – both of these are on a label stuck to the back
of the set or can be seen under TV equipment in the index of the TV set
(see page 15).
Then you will get a list of downloadable contents for your TV set includ-
ing the software. Download the data and unpack all the files in this ZIP
archive into the main directory of your USB stick.
Then carry out the software update as described below.
Basic information
You can update the software on your TV set. In the software update
(package update) all the software versions in the TV are scanned and
updated as required.
Here you can load up a new piece of software from different sources
(where present):
Current software versions can be downloaded from the Loewe Internet
site (see right-hand column) and installed on your set using a USB stick
(see page 131).
If your TV set is connected to the internet, the TV set can be updated
directly over the internet (see page 132).
USB stick
Requirements of USB stick
USB sticks tested by Loewe and compatible in type and format can be
ordered from the Loewe dealer using the article no. 90456.900.
If you would like to use your own USB stick, please follow these tips/
conditions:
m Formatting in FAT32.
m Only one partition.
m Do not use encrypted USB sticks.
m Do not use USB sticks that simulate a CD ROM drive.
m There may be no hidden files on the device.
m For some types of device, the construction of the USB stick is significant.
Maximum dimensions in mm: 70x20x10.
m If in doubt, the USB stick should be formatted as “FAT32” without
“extended attributes”.
Software update
131 -
english
Software update via USB storage device
To do this, insert the USB stick with the downloaded software (see
page 130) into a free USB port on the TV set (see connections page 11).
Calling Software update
MENU: Call TV menu.
 Select Settings,
go to the menu line below.
 Select Miscellaneous,
go to the menu line below.
 Select Software update,
go to the menu line below.
 Select Via USB storage device,
OK Call Software update Wizard.
The version of the software package that is current-
ly installed will be displayed.
OKProceed.
The TV set searches for a new software package on
the USB stick.
If a new software version is available after the search, the
following on-screen message appears (see right-hand
column).
If several different software packages are found on the
USB stick, the latest software package is always used.
If no new software package was found in the search:
OKExit wizard.
New software package found
OKProceed.
OKStart loading the new software.
Or:
END: Exit wizard.
The update will then not be carried out.
Load new software package
The software is loaded in several steps. The total loading
and programming process can take up to approx. 50
minutes in total.
Please do not switch off your TV set at the mains during
the entire loading and programming process.
You will be informed at the end of the update.
To make your TV set completely ready for use again, please
turn it off and on again at the mains.
Software update
OK
V6.1.0
SOFTWARE UPDATE WIZARD
Current software package:
To load a new piece of software, you first need to search for said software on a
USB storage device that is connected (e.g. USB stick). Press the key to start
the search.
OK
Proceed
OK
SOFTWARE UPDATE WIZARD
Software package: current V6.1.0 new V6.2.0
If you want to load the new software now please press . Otherwise you can
stop it with .
OK
Proceed
SOFTWARE UPDATE
The "TV base software" is being programmed, please wait ...
Note: The loading and programming process can take up to approx. 50 minutes
in total. Please do not switch off your TV set at the mains during this time.
- 132
english
Software update via the internet
If an internet connection is available, new software can be downloaded
directly and installed onto the TV set.
Calling Software update
MENU: Call TV menu.
 Select Settings,
go to the menu line below.
 Select Miscellaneous,
go to the menu line below.
 Select Software update,
go to the menu line below.
 Select Via the internet,
OK Call Software update Wizard.
The version of the software package that is current-
ly installed will be displayed.
OKProceed.
You will see a message on the screen regarding data
protection.
If you are not in agreement with the relevant data being
passed on,
END: leave the update process.
The update will then not be carried out.
Otherwise: Confirm that you are in agreement with the
data protection message.
OK Proceed.
The TV set connects to the internet and searches
the update server for new software.
If a new software version is available after the search, an
on-screen message appears (see below).
If no new software package was found in the search:
OKExit wizard.
New software package found
OKProceed.
OK Start loading the new software (see page 133).
Or:
END: Leave the update process.
The update will then not be carried out.
OK
V6.1.0
SOFTWARE UPDATE WIZARD
Current software package:
To load a new piece of software, you first need to search for said software on
the update server. Press the key to start the search.
OK
Proceed
OK
SOFTWARE UPDATE WIZARD
Software package: current V6.1.0 new V6.2.0
If you want to load the new software now please press . Otherwise you can
stop it with .
OK
Proceed
OK
SOFTWARE UPDATE WIZARD
We would like to inform you that information on your device number and the
country in which your TV set is being used will be processed and stored on a
computer, as will be information on the software version that you are using.
This is carried out in accordance with the local laws and regulations, and will
occur if you confirm that you are in agreement by pressing . This data
ensures that we are always able to provide you with the best possible repair
services should you ever require them. All data will be treated as confidential
and will not be disclosed to third parties.
If you do not want this to happen, please press the button.
Proceed
OK
Software update
continued on the next page
p
133 -
english
Load new software package
Only the parts of the software package that are not up to
date will be automatically downloaded from the internet
and updated.
Each part of the software is downloaded individually from
the internet and is then programmed.
The total time required for all the software parts to be
downloaded from the internet is dependent on the speed
of data transfer that is being used.
The total loading and programming process can take up
to 50 minutes in total.
Please do not switch off your TV set at the mains during
the entire loading and programming process.
You will be informed once the loading and programming
process is complete.
To make your TV set completely ready for use again, please
turn it off and on again at the mains.
SOFTWARE UPDATE
The "TV base software" is being programmed, please wait ...
Note:
The total time required for the loading process from the internet is dependent
on the type of data transfer that is being used:
- up to 125 minutes over a modem (56k)
- up to 110 minutes over ISDN (64k)
- up to 5 minutes over DSL (DSL2000).
The loading and programming process can take up to approx. 50 minutes
in total.
Please do not switch off your TV set at the mains during the entire loading
and programming process.
SOFTWARE UPDATE WIZARD
The software package has been loaded successfully.
Please switch the TV set off and back on at the mains switch to ensure it is fully
operable.
Software update
- 134
english
USB keyboard
You can connect a USB keyboard to one of the USB ports of your TV set
and use it in place of a remote control. With it, you can type internet
addresses more comfortably into the browser and you can type char-
acters more easily when changing the names of channels or inputting
lists of favourites.
The keyboard can completely replace the remote control. An overview of
the button assignment is on the right hand side of the table.
Button combinations
Keyboard Remote control No.
Left and right
switching
button
Keyboard layout between Standard (Latin) and
Greek or Russian (only for the menu languages
Greek and Russian)
-
F1 Red button 13
F2 Green button 12
F3 Yellow button 21
F4 Blue button 20
F5 RECORD button 15
F6 PAUSE button 16
F7 STOP button 17
F8 PLAY button 19
F9 Button
ܓ 14
F10 Button
ܒ 18
Alt + ESC END button 24
Ctrl + End In the browser: Stop input, leave input field -
Enter OK button 11
0 ... 9 Number buttons 28, 29
Pg
ח/ י P+ / P- buttons 23
Alt + B / V V+ / V- buttons 10
Alt + F TV button 3
Alt + R AUDIO button 32
Alt + P PIP button 26
Alt + T TEXT button 8
Alt + O Place the TV set into standby mode 33
Alt + A MEDIA button 27
Alt + I INFO button 25
Alt + M MENU button 9
Alt + E EPG button 7
Alt + S Sound off/on 1
Alt + W TIMER button 5
Alt + D One Touch Recording 15
Alt + Z Picture format button 6
Alt + H Sound mode / Sound adjustment 30
Arrow button Directional keys
 22
Input of characters
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
32
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
33
17
135 -
english
Character table
Key assignment for text input via the remote control
For certain functions the input of letters or characters is required. As with
a cell phone press the numeric button (0-9) repeatedly until the desired
character appears.
The characters available are language dependent.
Here the key assignment is for the menu language English.
Key Character (uppercase - lowercase)
11
2 A B C 2 - a b c 2
3 D E F 3 - d e f 3
4 G H I 4 - g h i 4
5 J K L 5 - j k l 5
6 M N O 6 - m n o 6
7 P Q R S 7 - p q r s 7
8 T U V 8 - t u v 8
9 W X Y Z 9 - w x y z 9
0 0 [space] . / \ - + _ , ; : ? ! = & # % ~ @ $ * ´ | ( )
Input of characters
- 136
english
Tilting the TV set
You can set the tilt angle of your TV set on the table stand to 0° or 2.5°.
Tools required: Torx screwdriver T 20
Allen key 5 mm
First, loosen the topmost of the three retaining screws of the table stand
to get to the adjustment screw for the tilt angle (see illustration).
Then put the Allen key into the adjustment opening.
By screwing in the adjustment screw, you can adjust the tilt angle of the
TV set (turned to the left as far as it will go: 2.5°, to the right as far as
it will go: 0°).
When adjusting the tilt angle, position the TV set in the desired tilting
direction.
Please only use the tilt angle 0° or 2.5°. Intermediate positions are not
permitted and could damage the TV set.
The table stand is delivered set at an angle of 2.5°.
To adjust the tilt angle (turned to the left as far as it will go: 2.5°, to
the right as far as it will go: 0°), turn the screw with the Allen key
approx. 1.5 times.
Do not overtighten the adjustment screw. This could damage the
TV set!
Screw the retaining screw back in again. Tighten it with a torque of ap-
prox. 2 Nm (hand-tight).
Tilting the TV set
137 -
english
Problem Possible cause Remedy
All menus are displayed in the wrong
language.
The menu language was set incorrectly. Set the menu language:
Press the MEDIA button in TV mode. In the MediaPortal,
highlight the last menu item (Index) in the upper half and
call up with OK. Mark the first key word and call it with
OK. Then select the language and confirm it with OK.
In the TV menu, Connections cannot be
called (displayed in grey).
A timer recording is in progress. Wait until the timer recording ends or delete the
timer recording (page 127).
The control functions of the Loewe
Recorder and the Timer are not working
or are not working properly
a) The Digital Link function is not activated or
not possible in the recorder.
b) EURO-AV cable is not connected.
a) Activate Digital Link in the recorder (see operat-
ing instructions of the recorder).
b) Connect EURO-AV cable (page 115).
General problems when connecting
external devices via an AV input.
a) The AV standard is set incorrectly.
b) The signal type is set incorrectly.
a) Set the correct standard (page 112).
b) Set the correct signal type (page 112).
If AV standard or AV signal is set to Automatic”
then this can cause errors to be detected with
signals that do not comply with standards. In this
case standard and signal must be set according to
the information in the operating manual of the
external device.
The connection of a decoder does not
function or does not function properly.
a) The signal is not decoded because the correct
decoder stations are not selected in the menu.
b) The sound is missing in decoder mode becau-
se the wrong decoder sound is assigned in the
menu.
a) Select the right decoder stations in the menu (TV
menu ט Connections ט Miscellaneous טDecoder
stations טSelect decoder station(s) (see page 113).
b) Select the right sound code (always, never, automa-
tic) in the menu (TV menu ט Connections
ט
Miscellaneous טDecoder stations טSound encodig),
see also decoder instructions.
Digital Link Plus does not work. a) EURO-AV cable is not fully wired (pin 10 not
wired).
b) Some recorders can only adopt stations
during the initial installation of the TV set.
a) Replace the EURO-AV cable.
b) Restore the recorder to the as-delivered state
(see recorder’s operating manual).
With Teletext various characters are
displayed incorrectly.
The wrong character set has been set in the
Teletext menu.
Set the right character set: Select Teletext menu ט
Settings ט Character set ט Standard or the
appropriate character set.
Errors occurred when running a CA
module.
Switch the TV set off. Remove the CA-module from
the TV set. Wait a few seconds. Reinsert the CA-
module. Switch the TV set on again.
Troubleshooting
- 138
english
Problem Possible cause Remedy
No sound via the external digital audio
amplifier.
a) The external digital audio amplifier does not
support the selected sound format (Dolby
Digital, dts, MPEG).
b) TV set and external digital audio amplifier are
not connected with each other.
a) Set PCM stereo on the DVD player in the
sound selection. For DVB stations on the TV
set switch to stereo in the Status display
(INFO) – Language/sound (green button).
b) Connect AUDIO DIGITAL OUT from the TV set
to a digital input of the external digital audio
amplifier and select the appropriate input to
this.
A programmed recording was not made. Recording of analogue stations with VPS data:
The programme to be recorded was not (no longer)
in the programmes offered by the station via VPS.
Recording of DVB stations with automatic time
control:
The provider deleted the programme from the
EPG data, for example due to a programme
change.
The stations are exclusively responsible for the
transmission of VPS data (for analogue stations)
or for the use of the automatic time control (for
DVB or MHEG-5 stations). The availability of the
appropriate data cannot be guaranteed.
The picture format cannot be adjusted. A HbbTV application is loaded but is not active
(not displayed).
End the HbbTV application with the END
button (see page 82).
The free capacity of the external hard disc is
essentially indicated smaller than expected in
the OSD.
The hard disc has been formatted on FAT32 on a
PC with Microsoft Windows (see also page 108).
Format external hard disc on TV set again via
TV menu ט Settings ט
Miscellaneous
ט
Format
external hard disk
.
Troubleshooting
139 -
english
Troubleshooting
Problem Possible cause Remedy
If a desired IP address has been specified then
no IP address will be automatically issued to
your TV set.
No DHCP server is working on your network. Set up a DHCP server.
Assign the IP addresses for the TV set manually.
Despite video or music file being played back,
no sound can be heard.
a) The TV set is set to mute or the volume has
been turned down too far.
b) An audio device that does not exist or that is
not connected is registered in the TV menu
under Connections ט Sound components (e.g.
HiFi/AV amplifier).
a) Increase the volume by pressing the V+
button on the remote control for longer.
This will also cancel any mute setting.
b) Connect up the audio device and switch it
on.
In the Sound components wizard change
back to TV speakers.
Although the file is visible on the media
server, it is not displayed in the MediaPortal.
The file is not made available by your media
server.
Change to your media server. For this, read the
section Media server software on page 143.
A media file that is displayed can not be
played back.
The format of the file is not supported (see also
limitations in section File formats supported on
page 143).
No remedy.
Characters received in the WLAN code of the
wireless router cannot be entered for the
network configuration at the TV set.
The device does not support all special cha-
racters.
Change the WLAN key of the router.
When searching for wireless routers, no
device is found.
The router is not ready for wireless communica-
tion.
Check your wireless router.
Try to make the connection again a few
minutes later.
If with wireless operation there should be any interference such as disruptions during playback or slow reactions by devices to commands, you could
try the following:
- Keep at least three metres distance from microwave ovens, bluetooth devices, mobile telephones and Wi-Fi compatible devices such as printers
and PDAs.
- Change the active channel on the WLAN router.
- 140
english
General data
Type Connect 40 LED 200 Connect 32 LED
Article number 50404xxx 50402xxx
Dimensions for device without stand (W x H x D) in cm
Dimensions for device with stand (W x H x D) in cm
100,2 x 63,9 x 6,6
100,2 x 66,6 x 26,0
81,4 x 53,4 x 6,1
81,4 x 56,0 x 26,0
Weight for device without stand (approx.) in kg
Weight for device with stand (approx.) in kg
22,4
24,7
17,3
19,6
Display technology Full-HD LCD with Edge-LED backlight
Screen diagonal (in cm) / Picture format 101 / 16:9 80 / 16:9
Resolution (in pixels) / Motion Response 1920 x 1080 / 200 Hz 1920 x 1080 / 100 Hz
Contrast (static / dynamic) 5.000 : 1 / 5.000.000 : 1
Viewing angle (horizontal / vertical) 178° / 178°
Power consumption On-Mode max. (W)
(Audio output 1/8 of the maximum value) without / with DR
+
Power consumption On-Mode Home (W) without / with DR
+
Power consumption in Standby Mode (W) without / with DR
+
Power consumption when set is switched off (W)
113 / 117
86 / 90
0,36
0
93 / 97
71 / 76
0,36
0
Ambient temperature (Celsius) 5° – 35°
Relative humidity (non-condensing) 20 – 80%
Air pressure 800 – 1114 hPa (0 – 2000 m above sea level)
Technical data
141 -
english
Electrical data
Chassis designation: SL 150
Power supply: 220 V – 240 V/50–60 Hz
Tuner: terr./cable:
satellite
(1
:
VHF/hyperband/UHF
4 levels: 13/18V/22kHz
16 levels: DiSEqC 1.0
Single cable system: EN 50494
Range: terr./cable:
satellite
(1
:
45 MHz to 860 MHz
950 MHz to 2150 MHz
Station storage locations
incl. AV and radio:
5000
TV standards: analogue:
digital:
B/G, I, L, D/K, M, N
DVB-T/T2
(1
, DVB-C
DVB-S
(1
/ S2
(1
Colour standards: SECAM, PAL, NTSC,
NTSC-V, PAL-V (60 Hz)
Sound standards: analogue:
BG, DK, MN:
BG, I, DK:
L, L1:
digital:
mono, stereo, dual-channel
FM-A2
FM-Nicam
AM-Nicam
mono, stereo, dual-channel, PCM
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Virtual Speaker
DTS
Dolby Digital AAC
+
Audio output power
(music/sine):
2 x 40W / 2 x 20W
Teletext: TOP/FLOF Level 2.5
Page memory: 2000
Signals via PC IN / HDMI
The following table lists the compatible signals which your TV set can
show via the PC IN connection and the HDMI connections (HDMI1,
HDMI2, HDMI3).
Set the output signal on your PC, HDMI or DVI device so that it matches
one of the signals in the table.
Format Horizontal x Vertical Image
frequency
Connection
480i60 720 x 480i 60Hz PC IN, HDMI
576i50 720 x 576i 50Hz PC IN, HDMI
480p60 720 x 480p 60Hz PC IN, HDMI
576p50 720 x 576p 50Hz PC IN, HDMI
1440 x 480p 60Hz HDMI
1440 x 576p 50Hz HDMI
720p50 1280 x 720p 50Hz PC IN, HDMI
720p60 1280 x 720p 60Hz PC IN, HDMI
1080i50 1920 x 1080i 50Hz PC IN, HDMI
1080i60 1920 x 1080i 60Hz PC IN, HDMI
1080p24 1920 x 1080p 24Hz PC IN, HDMI
1080p25 1920 x 1080p 25Hz PC IN, HDMI
1080p30 1920 x 1080p 30Hz PC IN, HDMI
1080p50 1920 x 1080p 50Hz PC IN, HDMI
1080p60 1920 x 1080p 60Hz PC IN, HDMI
VGA 640 x 480 60Hz PC IN, HDMI
SVGA 800 x 600 60Hz PC IN, HDMI
XGA 1024 x 768 60Hz PC IN, HDMI
WXGA 1360 x 768 60Hz PC IN, HDMI
SXGA 1280 x 1024 60Hz PC IN, HDMI
Technical data
(1
Equipment and upgrade options, see page 146.
- 142
english
Connections (max. equipment)
Designation Type Function / Signal
Mains socket 220-240V ~ 50/60 Hz Supply voltage
HDMI type A (3x) Digital Video/Audio IN: Digital video
(2
and audio
D-SUB 15-pole Video IN: PC/STB video signal
(2
EURO-AV
Video IN:
Video OUT:
Audio IN:
Audio OUT:
Y/C (S-VHS/Hi 8)
CVBS (VHS/8 mm)
RGB
CVBS (VHS/8 mm)
Y/C (S-VHS/Hi 8)
L/R
L/R
RJ-45 Ethernet / Fast Ethernet: Network interface
USB type A (2x) USB 2.0 (max. 500mA): Multimedia files/software update
Jack 3,5 mm Audio IN: L/R
Cinch (yellow) Digital Audio OUT (SPDIF): Digital audio
Cinch (red) Digital Audio IN (SPDIF): Digital audio
Cinch (white) Audio IN: max. 2Vrms: Centre
Mini-DIN Service/L-Link
IEC socket 75 Ohm / 5 V / 80 mA: Antenna/cable/DVB-T/C
F socket (2x)
(1
75 Ohm 13/18 V / 450 mA: ANT-SAT DVB-S/S2
D-SUB 26-pole Audio OUT: Multi-sound
RJ12
(1
Data I/O: serial interface
Mini-DIN
(1
Rotating stand control (Positioning accuracy 1.5°)
Jack 3,5 mm
(1
Connection for IR station
CI slot (2x) Common Interface: Slot for CA module
Jack 3,5 mm Headphones 32–2000 Ohm
Cinch (white/red) Audio IN: L (white) / R (red)
Cinch (yellow) Video IN: CVBS (VHS/8 mm)
Mini-DIN
Video IN:
Y/C (S-VHS/Hi 8)
CVBS (VHS/8 mm)
Technical data
(1
Equipment and upgrade options, see page 146.
(2
For compatible picture signals, see table on page 141.
143 -
english
MediaHome
File formats supported
Pictures: JPG, PNG, GIF
Audio: MP3, M4A (AAC LC), WMA (without lossless), FLAC, WAV (PCM)
Video: AVI (MPEG-1/2, DivX, XviD, AC3, MP3), WMV (WMV9, VC-1,
WMA9, WMA Pro), MP4 (DivX, XviD, H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, AAC
LC), MOV (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, AAC LC), MKV (H.264/MPEG-4
AVC, AC3), FLV (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, H.263, MP3, AAC LC),
MPG (MPEG-1, MPEG Audio), TS/PS (MPEG-2, H.264/MPEG-4
AVC, MPEG2 Audio, AC3), VOB (MPEG-2, MPEG2 Audio, AC3)
DivX up to a resolution of 720p
H.264/MPEG-4 AVC up to Profile High (Level 4.2)
Ethernet (wired network)
Standards supported: 10 Mbit/sec Ethernet (10Base-T), 100 Mbit/sec Fast
Ethernet (100Base-T)
WLAN (wireless network)
Standards supported:
IEEE 802.11b/g/n
Frequency range used:
2400-2483.5 MHz and 5180-5730 MHz
Types of encoding that are supported:
WEP 64 and 128 Bit (ASCII and HEX), WPA PSK, WPA2 AES
Supported home network standard
Universal Plug and Play Audio / Video (UPnP AV)
Media server software
To play multimedia contents from devices in your home network, you
require media server software which makes the relevant files available
to you. Handling of individual files depends on the technical properties
and also on the media server software used.
You can download a test version of the TwonkyMedia Mediaserver from
our homepage. With your TV set, you have also acquired the option of
obtaining a free licence for the currently available version of the Twonky
media server. Alternatively, you can also use other media servers, e.g. the
Windows Media Player (WMP) from Version 11.
For communication with your PC, certain port addresses of the network
connection are required. They may not be blocked by a firewall if there
is one, otherwise this could cause serious connection errors.
Windows Media Player 11 requires the port addresses 1900 and the block
of 10280 up to and including 10284 (all for UDP) as well as 2869 and
10243 (both for TCP). For TwonkyMedia the port addresses 1030, 1900
and 9080 (all for UDP) and 9000 (for TCP) must be available.
Other ports to be kept free depend on the operating system you are using.
Contact your network administrator about configuring the firewall.
Technical data
- 144
english
Loewe DVD recorder:
The DVD recorders from Loewe are characterised by form and colour,
which match Loewe TV sets, adapted user guidance and technology.
Combined these devices form a system that offers many advantages.
Loewe Blu-ray player:
With the Loewe Blu-ray player BluTech Vision Interactive you are ideally
equipped for the successor format to DVD. With the Loewe system in-
tegration you control BluTech Vision Interactive and your Loewe TV set
simultaneously with the Assist remote control.
Loewe 3D Blu-ray player:
With the Loewe Blu-ray player BluTech Vision Interactive 3D you’re fully
kitted out to watch Blu-ray discs with 2D and 3D material. With the Loewe
system integration you control BluTech Vision Interactive 3D and your
Loewe TV set simultaneously using the Assist remote control.
Loewe Audiovision:
Audiovision with integral 5.1 decoder creates impressive surround sound,
even for televisions without a surround sound decoder.
As well as FM radio and CD/DVD player, Audiovision offers a connection
for your iPod or your iPhone. Plus, thanks to video upscaling 1080p, you
can also experience DVDs in full HD resolution.
Loewe Vesa adapter bolts:
You can purchase adapter bolts for wall holders in line with the VESA
standard from your dealer or the Technical Customer Service (see service
addresses on page 160). Four items are required.
Spacer bolts (1 item) Loewe order no. 70873.001.
Accessories
The following accessories are obtainable from your Loewe dealer.
Installation options:
A large range of options for floor, table or wall installation are available
for your TV set.
An overview of the available options can be found on page 147.
Loewe Individual Sound Projector SL:
With the Loewe Individual Sound Projector SL you can enjoy digital Sur-
round Sound without expensive installation and connection of several
speakers. The Sound Projector is easy to set and operate.
Loewe Individual Sound:
The TV sets can be perfectly enhanced with the Individual Sound speaker
system. Numerous options for loudspeaker combinations can be realised
with floor-standing loudspeakers, satellite loudspeakers and a subwoofer.
Individual housing and trim colour designs are possible here too.
Loewe Individual Mediacenter:
With the Loewe Mediacenter you can play all radio sources, DVDs, CDs
and audio data from the network, USB or NAS. You can connect an iPod or
an iPhone via an integrated interface. The Mediacenter can be integrated
into the home network via LAN, Powerline or WLAN. It forms the heart
of the Loewe Multiroom systems.
Accessories
Subject to availability.
145 -
english
Upgrade kits / conversion kits / cables
Module DVB-S2 Single (Art.No. 70622.080):
You can receive digital satellite and HDTV stations with the upgrade kit.
The tuner is integrated in the TV set and is operated with the remote
control/menu control.
The retrofit possibilities for your set can be found in the table on page 146.
Module DVB-S2 Twin (Art.No. 70286.080):
You can have two digital satellite tuners installed in sets with Digital
Recorder. This enables reception of digital satellite and HDTV stations
and extends the display of PIP and the recording possibilities of Digital
Recorder for two digital satellite stations.
The retrofit possibilities for your set can be found in the table on page 146.
Module WLAN SL 150 (Art.No. 70830.082):
With the upgrade kit you add the WLAN function to the connection
possibilities of your TV set with the home network.
The retrofit possibilities for your set can be found in the table on page 146.
Module RJ12 / Motor Unit / IR-Link (Art.No. 70493.080):
The TV set can be connected to a home network system via the RS-232C
(RJ12) interface.
The infrared function enables pieces of auxiliary equipment of other
manufacturers to be operated, even if they are covered up. You oper-
ate the auxiliary equipment with its respective remote control via the
Loewe TV set.
The retrofit possibilities for your set can be found in the table on page 146.
Module DVB-T2/C Single (Art.No. 70913.080):
With the DVB-T2/C Single conversion kit you add the Standard DVB-T2
to the reception possibilities of your TV set.
The Standard DVB-T2 is not available in all countries at the moment
The retrofit possibilities for your set can be found in the table on page 146.
Module DVB-T2/C Twin (Art.No 70914.080):
For sets with a Digital Recorder (DVB-T/C Twin) you add the Standard
DVB-T2 to the reception possibilities of your TV set with the DVB-T2/C
Twin conversion kit.
The Standard DVB-T2 is not available in all countries at the moment
The retrofit possibilities for your set can be found in the table on page 146.
Adapter and Cables:
AUDIO LINK adapter cable 0,25 m Loewe Art.No. 89954.001
AUDIO LINK cable 1,5 m Loewe Art.No. 89952.001
AUDIO LINK cable 6 m Loewe Art.No. 89952.002
AUDIO LINK cable 10 m Loewe Art.No. 89952.003
Cubic connector cable 6 m Loewe Art.No. 90418.930
USB extension (Art.No. 70167.080):
To ensure easy accessibility of the USB connection or enable USB sticks
to be inserted with a large casing, the TV set can be connected to a
USB extension.
This upgrade kit is available from your Technical Customer Service (see
service addresses on page 160).
Accessories
Subject to availability.
- 146
english
Equipment variants
The equipment of the individual set variants and their upgrade/conversion possibilities is listed in the table below.
Accessories
Set variants Connect 40 LED 200 DR
+
Connect 40 LED 200 Connect 32 LED DR
+
Connect 32 LED
DR
+
z
z
USB Recording
z
z
DVB-T/C Single
z
z
DVB-T/C Twin
z
z
Digital audio decoder
zzzz
HbbbTV
zzzz
DVB-T2/C Single
Art.No. 70913.080

DVB-T2/C Twin
Art.No. 70914.080
DVB-S2 Single
Art.No. 70622.080
{
{
DVB-S2 Twin
Art.No. 70286.080
{
RJ12 / MU / IR-Link
Art.No. 70493.080
{{{{
WLAN SL 150
Art.No. 70830.082
z{z{
z
ex factory
{
optionally available as an upgrade kit
optionally available as a conversion kit
not available
TV set equipment
See the rating plate on the rear of the set for the precise product desig-
nation. The precise features are listed in the Integrated features item in
the index of the TV set (see page 15).
147 -
english
Setup possibilities Individual
Connect 40 LED 200
nTable Stand (scope of delivery)
nWall Mount WM62
nWall Mount Flex 52 L
(1
nFloor Stand C40 (Equipment Board optionally available)
nFloor Stand 8 32-40
(1
nScreen Lift Plus
(1
nRack 110.30
(1
nRack 110.30 SW
(1
nRack 165.30
(1
nRack 165.45 CS
(1
nRack 165.45 SP
(1
Connect 32 LED
nTable Stand (scope of delivery)
nWall Mount WM62
nFloor Stand C32 (Equipment Board optionally available)
nFloor Stand 8 32-40
(1
nScreen Lift Plus
(1
nRack 110.30
(1
nRack 110.30 SW
(1
nRack 165.30
(1
nRack 165.45 CS
(1
nRack 165.45 SP
(1
(1
Only in connection with appropriate adapter to be ordered separately.
Accessories
Table Stand
Screen Lift Plus
(1
Wall Mount (WM62)
Wall Mount Flex 52 L
(1
Floor Stand 8 32-40
(1
Rack 165.45 CS
(1
Rack 165.45 SP
(1
Rack 165.30
(1
Floor Stand C40
Floor Stand C32
Rack 110.30
(1
Rack 110.30 SW
(1
- 148
english
Environment
Environmental protection
Energy consumption
Your TV set is equipped with an eco-standby power supply. In the standby
mode, the power consumption drops to low power (see Technical data
on page 140). If you want to save even more energy then switch the
device off with the mains switch. Please also note that the EPG data
(Electronic Programme Guide) is lost under certain circumstances and pos-
sibly programmed timer recordings cannot be carried out via the TV set.
The power consumed by the TV set during operation depends on the
energy efficiency preset in the initial installation (see page 22) or the
setting in the TV menu (see page 38).
If you activate the automatic dimming (see page 38), your TV picture
will adapt to the ambient brightness. This reduces the power consump-
tion of the TV set.
If the TV is not operated for 4 hours (adjustment of volume, programme
change, etc.) the TV will automatically switch to stand-by mode to save
energy. A prompt to terminate this shutdown process appears one min-
ute before expiry of the 4 hours. The automatic shutdown is only active
in the energy efficiency mode Home Mode. Automatic shutdown does
not occur when using the radio without screen display (screen off).
Packaging and box
You have made a decision to purchase a high-quality technical product
with a long service life. For disposal of the packaging, in accordance
with national legislation we have paid a fee to a commissioned recycler
to pick up the packaging from the dealer.
The set
The EU directive 2002/96/EC regulates the proper way
to recycle, handle and utilise used electronic devices.
Old electronic devices consequently must be disposed of
separately. Please do not dispose of this device in normal
household trash!
You may return your used set free of charge at designated
recycling centres or at your specialist dealer whenever you purchase a
new, comparable set. Other details about reacceptance (also for non-EU
countries) are available from your local administration.
Batteries
The batteries supplied as initial equipment do not contain
any pollutants such as cadmium, lead, or mercury.
Used batteries should no longer be disposed of in the do-
mestic waste according to the Battery Ordinance. Dispose
of your batteries at no charge in the collection containers
which are set up for this purpose in retail stores.
149 -
english
Legal notes
Trademarks
Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro
Logic” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674;
5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents
issued & pending. DTS and DTS Digital Surround are registered trademarks
and the DTS logos and Symbol are trademarks of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2007
DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
The screen font “LoeweL2700” is based on the “Tavmjong Bah Arev
(tavmjong.free.fr)” font, which in turn is based on “Bitstream Vera”.
Bitstream Vera is a trademark of Bitstream Inc.
This set contains a software which is based partly on the work of the
Independent JPEG Group.
DivX and the corresponding DivX logos are registered trademarks of
DivX, Inc.
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use
in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/).
This software is provided by the OpenSSL project “as is“ and any expressed
or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties
of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no
event shall the OpenSSL project or its contributors be liable for any direct,
indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (includ-
ing, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss
of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on
any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including
negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of this software,
even if advised of the possibility of such damage.
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@
cryptsoft.com).
This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
This product contains software which was developed by third parties
and / or software which is subject to GNU General Public License (GPL)
and/or GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL). You can pass on and
modify them in accordance with Version 2 of the GNU General Public
License or optionally every later version which is published by the Free
Software Foundation.
Loewe publishes this programme WITHOUT ANY GUARANTEE OR SUP-
PORT especially without an implicit guarantee of MARKET MATURITY or
APPLICABILITY FOR A CERTAIN PURPOSE. Details can be found in the
GNU General Public License. You can order the software from Loewe
Customer Service.
You can download the GNU General Public License here:
http://www.gnu.org/licenses/.
The code number cancels an access
code and thus the parental
lock. Please keep
in a safe place.
- 150
english
0-9
24p movie display: Films released on Blu-ray Disc support presentation of
24p cinema films. The Blu-ray player transfers the original film format to
the television with 24 frames per second. The DMM (DigitalMovieMode)
set in the factory calculates and inserts additional intermediate pictures,
which suppress film jerking typical for the cinema, thereby providing for
a smooth motion sequence.
A
Active antenna: An antenna with its own power supply or amplification
which can improve the reception is areas with a poor coverage.
Administrator: Person who administers the network, i.e. takes care of
setting up and maintaining all components belonging to the network.
Automatic time control: Similar to VPS for analogue stations the automatic
time control monitors the start and end times of programmes from DVB
stations. If these times deviate from the data programmed in the timer
data the running time of the recording is adapted automatically. The
automatic time control is not supported by all DVB stations.
AVI: Abbreviation for Audio Video Interleave, a video container file format
developed by Microsoft. A single AVI video file can contain several audio,
video and text data streams (thus the name container format).
AV socket: Socket for audio and video signals.
AV sources: Audio/video source.
AVS: Audio/video sockets on the side of the TV set (cinch and mini-DIN).
B
Band: Name for a transmission range.
Blu-ray Disc: The follow-up format of DVD. The contents of about five
DVDs fit onto one Blu-ray Disc (abbreviated BD). Therefore, the Blu-ray
disc provides enough space for high-resolution images and multi-channel
sound formats.
BMP: Abbreviation for Bitmap, a grid graphics format designed for Micro-
soft Windows and OS/2 that is wide spread and therefore supported by
almost every popular graphics software package without any problems.
C
CA module: The Conditional Access module contains the coding system
and compares the transmitted code with the one on the Smart Card. If
they match, the appropriate stations or programmes are decoded.
CEC: Abbreviation for Consumer Electronics Control. CEC provides uni-
versal component control functions for entertainment electronics devices
(e.g. System standby, One Touch Play). CEC is also known as Digital Link
HD at Loewe.
Channel (WLAN): The channel is a certain part of the WLAN frequency
band. Devices that want to communicate with each other have to use the
same WLAN channel. In Europe the WLAN frequency band is currently
divided into 13 channels.
Cinch cable: Cable for transmitting audio or video.
CI slot: See Common Interface.
Client: Also referred to as network client; describes an end device such
as your TV set that is connected to the network and gets data from a
(media) server to make it accessible to the user.
Common Interface: The Common Interface (CI slot) is a standardised
interface. By inserting suitable decoding modules (CA modules) and a
Smart Card coded digital programmes can be used.
Common Interface Plus: CI Plus is an advanced development of the Com-
mon Interface standard. CI Plus slots are in principle downward compatible
to the previous CI standard, i.e. CA modules and Smart Cards according
to the past CI standard can continue to be used in CI Plus slots, as far as
the programme provider permits this. Additionally, extended regulations
apply however to CI Plus.
Component: See Component connection.
Component connection: Also referred to as Component. Connection where
the video signal is transferred via three separate (Cinch) connections. It
comprises the brightness signal Y as well as the colour difference signals
Pb (blue component) and Pr (red component).
Conditional Access module: See CA module.
D
Decoder: Analogue, coded TV signals are passed through a decoder and
made visible again.
DHCP: Abbreviation for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. DHCP al-
lows automatic assignment of IP addresses with the aid of a DHCP server.
DHCP server: Network service which takes care of automatic assignment
of IP addresses to clients.
Digital Link: System for controlling recorders (for video and DVD recorders
from Loewe) via the Euro AV sockets of the Loewe TV set with concealed
setup. Controlling the recorder for timer recordings.
Digital Link HD: System for controlling devices via the HDMI connection
of the Loewe TV set in the case of concealed installation.
Digital Link Plus: System for controlling recorders according to protocol
50. For analogue stations the station and timer data are transmitted via
the EURO-AV socket to the recorder. The timer recording is executed
exclusively by the recorder. There is a different designation with different
manufacturers.
DivX: Video Codec which allows even large files to be relatively highly com-
pressed in their file size without having to tolerate important quality losses.
Glossary
151 -
english
DNS: Abbreviation of Domain Name System. Readable names (e.g. www.
loewe-int.de) are assigned to numerical IP addresses. DNS servers are
responsible for the resolution of readable addresses into the correspond-
ing IP addresses.
Dolby Digital: Digital multi-channel audio. The digital standard for high
quality home movie systems. The individual channels are broadcast sepa-
rately in this standard. The three front channels right, left and centre,
the two surround channels right and left and the external subwoofer
channels are called a 5:1 signal.
Dolby Pro Logic: Analogue multi-channel audio. Converts a Dolby-
coded stereo signal into a surround sound. This usually contains four
channels (front left, centre, front right, surround channel). A special
subwoofer channel is not generated in this method.
Dolby Pro Logic II: Analogue multi-channel audio. Dolby Pro Logic II is a
further development of Dolby Pro Logic. This method generates a 6-chan-
nel spatial sound from a stereo or Pro-Logic signal (front left, centre, front
right, surround left, surround right, subwoofer).
Dolby Surround: Analogue multi-channel audio system that brings four
audio channels down to two audio tracks with the aid of a matrix coding.
Dolby Virtual Speaker: The Dolby Virtual Speaker technology simulates the
surround playback of a real 5.1-channel playback with only two speakers.
DRM: Digital Rights Management. Processes to control copyright pro-
tected data. To be used correctly, DRM protected contents require not
only a DRM capable device but also the possession of a license issued
by the provider (to be paid for).
DTS: Digital Theater Systems; Digital multi-channel audio.
DVB-C/-S/-T: Digital Video Broadcasting stands for digital television.
Technical DVB is the standardised process for transmitting digital content
(television, radio, multi-channel audio, room sound, EPG, Teletext, and
other supplemental services) through digital technology. C stands for
transmission via cable, S for distribution via satellite and T for terrestrial
or antenna distribution.
DVD: Abbreviation of Digital Video Disc and later Digital Versatile Disc.
DVD preceiver: Combi-device of DVD player and radio without integrated
amplifier.
DVI: Digital Visual Interface, is an interface for transmitting digital video
and graphic data (without audio).
Dynamic contrast ratio: Here the light intensity of the display is adapted
in case of a high black portion in the picture. The so-called backlights
are dimmed automatically and the contrast ratio increases temporarily,
i.e. dynamically.
E
Electronic Programme Guide: See EPG.
EPG: Electronic Programme Guide is the electronic variant of a printed
TV guide. Using the EPG you can watch the TV programme of the TV
station, transfer the appropriate data. The list of programmes contains
the title, beginning and end and duration of the programme. In addition
brief descriptions of the content of the programmes is also displayed.
Ethernet: Cable linked data net technology for local networks (LANs). Also
covers standards for e.g. plug connectors and transfer speeds.
Euro AV socket: Interface for connecting video devices to a TV set. This
socket is also referred to as Scart socket.
F
FLOF: Full Level One Facilities. Teletext system in which names and
numbers of the jump destinations are transmitted in the bottom line
on every page. This guides the reader to related topics for example. An
information about which pages exist and which pages have sub-pages
is not available in FLOF.
G
Gateway: Transfer into another network; in this case connection from
home network to internet.
The network device is usually used as the standard gateway which
produces this connection. The DSL router generally also represents the
internet gateway.
H
HbbTV: HbbTV (Hybrid broadcast broadband television) is an industry
standard that offers an open platform for technology that is not dependent
on manufacturers. HbbTV combines TV programmes with online services
seamlessly over broadband internet (DSL).
HDCP: High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection. Coding system pro-
vided for the DVI and HDMI interfaces for secure transmission of audio
and video data.
HDMI: High Definition Multimedia Interface is a newly developed interface
for full digital transmission of audio and video data.
HDTV: High Definition Television is an umbrella term that covers a number
of high resolution television standards.
HD-Ready: A quality seal that is awarded to products that are capable of
displaying high-definition television (HDTV).
High band and Low band: Transmission ranges for satellites.
Host: Computer that the server services are provided from, i.e. that makes
data available. Refer also to media server.
Glossary
- 152
english
I
ID3 tags: Additional information for MP3 and WMA audio files. Informa-
tion about the singer, title, album and album cover can be saved here
among other things. These data are edited on the PC by an ID3 tag editor.
IP address: IP addresses (Internet Protocol Addresses) are used to identify
devices in an Internet Protocol (IP) network. IP addresses are made up of
four groups of numbers of three digits each.
IR-Link: The IR-Link function allows the operation of accessory devices
with concealed installation made by other manufacturers via the Loewe
TV set. The infrared sensor required for this is available as an accessory
and can be connected to the IR-Link connection of the TV set.
J
JPEG/JPG: Joint Photographic Experts Group is a committee which has
developed a standard method for the compression of digital photos. This
method JPEG (JPG for short), named after the committee, is a commonly
used graphic format for photos.
L
LAN: Abbreviation for Local Area Network. Mainly used as a designation
for networks with wiring (Ethernet).
LCD: Liquid Crystal Display.
LCN: Logical Channel Numbers. In stations with LCN, the channel loca-
tion number belonging to the station is also transmitted by the provider.
The stations are sorted according to these channel location numbers.
L-Link: Intelligent system connection between Loewe devices for the
automatic exchange of information. Makes the operation of TV and
Loewe system components even more convenient.
LNB/LNC: The crucial electronic component of a satellite antenna is
referred to as an LNB (Low Noise Block Converter). It is mounted in the
focal point of a parabolic antenna. The designation LNC (Low Noise
Converter) indicates that conversion to lower intermediate frequency
takes place. The supplemental block in the LNB refers to the fact that a
whole frequency range (a block) is converted in each case.
M
MAC address: Hardware address of a network adapter, e.g. the network
card in the PC. It is permanently assigned by the manufacturer and is
used to uniquely identify devices in networks.
Mbit/sec: Information about the transfer rate in networks in megabits,
i.e. millions of characters per second. With WLAN the maximum speed
is 11 (IEEE 802.11b), 54 (IEEE 802.11g) or 300 (IEEE 802.11n) Mbit/sec,
in wired networks 10 Mbit/sec or 100 Mbit/sec (Fast Ethernet).
Media server: Stands for the device which multimedia contents are stored
on, but is also the name for the service provided by the device that makes
this data available to the network.
MHEG-5: Digital teletext standard of the Multimedia and Hypermedia Ex-
pert Group. At the moment only available in United Kingdom and Ireland.
Modulator: Transmitter in the video or DVD recorder so that the devices
can receive signals via the tuner of the TV device.
Mono: Single-channel audio.
MPEG: Digital compression process for video.
MP3: Data format for compressed audio files.
Multimedia contents: Videos, music files and photos are grouped together
under this term.
N
NAS: Abbreviation for Network Attached Storage. The term describes a
hard disc which is independently linked to the network (i.e. without a PC).
Network ID: NID refers to the so-called programme ID number, also known
as network ID – a number between 0 and 8191. This specification is
necessary in specific cable networks of some countries. Then only DVB
signals of this station network are searched for.
NICAM: Audio standard. Is used in Denmark, England, France, Sweden,
and Spain.
NTSC: American colour standard.
P
Page Catching: For teletext, refers to going to and calling a page
number.
PAL: European standard.
PCM: Pulse Code Modulation for digital sound.
Picture in Picture: See PIP.
PIP: Picture in Picture; a function which displays two pictures on the
screen.
Pixel: Denotes both the smallest unit of a digital graphic grid and its
display on a screen with grid control.
Pixel error: A pixel error is a defective pixel, usually on an LCD. Pixel errors
may be caused by production errors. They are expressed for example by
a constantly lit pixel or a constantly black pixel. Single defective pixels
however are excluded from a guarantee.
PNG: Abbreviation for Portable Network Graphics, a freely available grid
graphics format for loss-free compression.
Port: A port is part of a network address (or also IP address). It allows
assignment of data packages to various services which are running on
one device under the same network address.
Powerline: Powerline refers to a type of wired network connection in
which data can be transmitted via the domestic power supply using the
optionally available adapters.
Glossary
153 -
english
Glossary
Progressive JPEG: Progressive JPEGs are built up gradually. The quality of
the picture increases progressively during the loading process.
ProScan/Progressive Scan: Progressive Scan (abbr. PS) or full picture
method is a technique in the picture build-up of monitors, TV sets,
beamers, and other display devices in which the output device is not
sent line interlaced half pictures – unlike in the interlace technique – but
real full pictures.
PSK: Stands in connection with WLAN encoding for Pre-Shared Key.
Clients, who want to connect up to a wireless network secured with
PSK have to know this key.
R
RGB: Colour signals red, green and blue.
Router: Device for connecting up several networks, e.g. home network
and internet.
S
Satellite tuner: Receiver for satellite programmes.
SDTV: Standard Definition TeleVision.
SECAM: French colour standard.
Set-Top-Box: Set-Top-Box (STB for short) refers to a device in entertain-
ment electronics which is connected to another device, usually a TV set,
and offers the user additional functional options.
Signal input groups: Depending on the applied signal, the signal sources
are divided into different groups. All signal input groups with their cor-
responding signal types and the possible inputs are listed below.
TV analogue:
Signal type: FBAS, YC, RGB-SD (480i/576i), Component-SD (480i/576i)
Input: Tuner analogue, AV, AVS
TV digital:
Signal type: DVB-SD, HDMI-SD (480i/576i)
Input: Tuner digital, HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3
HD analogue:
Signal type: RGB-HD (video mode: e.g.1920x1080, 1280x720),
Component-HD (video modes: e.g. 1920x1080, 1280x720)
Input: PC IN
HD digital:
Signal type: DVB-HD, HDMI-HD
Input: Tuner digital, HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3
Signal input groups (continuation):
PC:
Signal type: RGB
(PC modes: e.g. 800x600, 1024x768, 1280x1024, 1360x768)
Input: PC IN
PhotoViewer:
Input: USB
Signal strength: Strength of the received antenna signal.
Signal quality: Quality of the incoming antenna signal.
Smart Card: The Smart Card is an electronic chip card issued by the respec-
tive programme provider or by the certification-free Pay-TV operators. It
contains the code which is decoded by the CA module.
Static contrast ratio: Describes the difference between the brightest and
darkest picture display.
Stereo: Dual-channel audio.
Switch: Device for connecting several computers to a network.
Switch voltage: Video devices specify this voltage to switch the TV device
to playback.
Symbol rate: Describes the transmission speed for data transmission.
T
Terrestrial: In data transmission a wireless transmission that does not use
satellites as intermediate station is referred to as terrestrial.
TFT: Thin Film Transistor. One widely distributed application is control of
liquid crystal flat screens, for which a signal transistor is used for each
pixel. This design of display is also referred to as active matrix, however
it is frequently also referred to as TFT display.
TOP: Table of Pages. Teletext system in which the individual pages are
divided into topics. The blocks stand for a higher hierarchy level (e.g.
News, Sport, Programmes) and the groups for the level below (e.g. Home/
Abroad, Football/Tennis). Abbreviations can be assigned to the pages
which are displayed in colour on the bottom line and can be selected
with the four coloured buttons on the remote control. Information is also
transmitted about which pages exist and which of them have sub-pages.
Tuner: Another term for receiver.
U
UPnP AV: Abbreviation for Universal Plug and Play Audio / Video. Is used
to control network devices from all manufacturers. Has become a wide
spread standard for home networking.
USB: Universal Serial Bus. Serial bus system for connecting external devices
(USB card reader, USB stick).
- 154
english
Glossary
V
VGA: PC interface for connecting a monitor.
VPS: The Video Programming System (VPS) is a signal which some (but
not all) analogue TV stations transmit in the blanking gap. The signal is
used by video and DVD recorders when recording programmes to react
to delays in start time, programme changes and excesses of the planned
programme time.
W
WEP: Abbreviation for Wired Equivalent Privacy. Former standard process
in the WLAN encryption, now outdated.
Wired network: see LAN.
Wireless network: see WLAN.
WLAN: Abbreviation for Wireless Local Area Network. Also referred to in
brief as wireless network.
WMA: Abbreviation for Windows Media Audio, Microsoft’s own audio
data format. The contents are compressed as in MP3 files.
WMV: Abbreviation for Windows Media Video, Microsoft own video
data format.
WPA: Abbreviation for Wi-Fi Protected Access. Replaced WEP as standard
encryption for wireless networks.
Y
Ycc/Ypp: Colour standards for Set-Top-Boxes.
YCbCr: Digital colour model, informally also incorrect designation for sig-
nals in standard resolution (SDTV). The YCbCr colour model, in which e.g.
DVDs are coded, has been developed from the YUV colour model used
in analogue television technology. With YCbCr, the data is transferred via
digital interfaces such as DVI or HDMI without being converted.
YPbPr: Analogue colour model, see also Component connection. The
analogue YPbPr signal is generated from the YCbCr signal by a converter
in the source player and then output at the 3 component outputs of the
source player.
YUV: The YUV colour model is used for analogue television in accordance
with the standards PAL and NTSC. YUV is often informally referred to when
YPbPr (for analogue connections/cables) or YCbCr (in digital applications)
is actually meant. YUV only occurs in quadrature modulation during PAL
or NTSC transfer and is not otherwise used.
155 -
english
ɌɨɡɢɭɪɟɞɨɬɝɨɜɚɪɹɧɚɨɫɧɨɜɧɢɬɟɢɡɢɫɤɜɚɧɢɹɢɪɚɡɲɢɪɟɧɢɬɟɫɴɨɬɜɟɬɧɢɩɪɟɞɩɨɫɬɚɜɤɢȾɢɪɟɤɬɢɜɚȿɋɊɚɡɪɟɲɟɧɨ
ɟɢɡɩɨɥɡɜɚɧɟɬɨɦɭɜɴɜɜɫɢɱɤɢɞɴɪɠɚɜɢɨɬȿɋɢɨɫɜɟɧɬɨɜɚɜɂɫɥɚɧɞɢɹɇɨɪɜɟɝɢɹɢɒɜɟɣɰɚɪɢɹȼɴɜɎɪɚɧɰɢɹɢ
ɂɬɚɥɢɹɢɡɩɨɥɡɜɚɧɟɬɨɦɭɟɪɚɡɪɟɲɟɧɨɫɚɦɨɜɡɚɬɜɨɪɟɧɢɩɨɦɟɳɟɧɢɹ
.
7RWR]DĜt]HQtMHYVRXODGXVH]iNODGQtPLSRåDGDYN\DRVWDWQtPLRGSRYtGDMtFtPLXVWDQRYHQtPL6PČUQLFH(*.
0ĤåHEêWSRXåtYDQYHYãHFK]HPtFK(8GRGDWHþQČWDNpQD,VODQGXY1RUVNX DYHâYêFDUVNX9H)UDQFLLDY,WDOLLMH
SRXåLWtSĜtVWURMHGRYROHQpMHQRPYLQWHULpUX.
Dieses Gerät entspricht den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den weiteren entsprechenden Vorgaben der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG.
Es darf in allen Ländern der EU sowie zusätzlich in Island, Norwegen und der Schweiz betrieben werden. In Frankreich und Italien ist
die Nutzung nur in Innenräumen zulässig.
Dette udstyr er i overensstemmelse med de væsentlige krav og andre relevante bestemmelser i Direktiv 1999/5/EF. Det må kun
anvendes i EU-landene samt i Island, Norge og Schweiz. I Frankrig og Italien er det kun tilladt at anvende det indendørs.
Este equipo cumple con los requisitos esenciales así como con otras disposiciones de la Directiva 1999/5/CE. Puede operar en todos
los países de la UE y adicionalmente en Islandia, Noruega y Suiza. En Francia e Italia, su uso está permitido únicamente en espacios
interiores.
Tämä laite täyttää direktiivin 1999/5/EY olennaiset vaatimukset ja on siinä asetettujen muiden laitetta koskevien määräysten mukai-
nen. Laitetta saa käyttää kaikissa EU-maissa sekä Islannissa, Norjassa ja Sveitsissä. Ranskassa ja Italiassa laitetta saa käyttää vain
sisätiloissa.
Cet appareil est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la Directive 1999/5/EC. L‘utilisation est
possible dans tous les pays de l‘UE, en Islande, en Norvège et en Suisse. En France et en Italie l‘utilisation est autorisée uniquement
dans des espaces fermés.
This equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. It may be
operated in all countries in the EU and also in Iceland, Norway and Switzerland. In France and Italy it may only be used indoors.
ǹȣIJȩȢȠİȟȠʌȜȚıȩȢİȓȞĮȚıİıȣȩȡijȦıȘİIJȚȢȠȣıȚȫįİȚȢĮʌĮȚIJȒıİȚȢțĮȚȐȜȜİȢıȤİIJȚțȑȢįȚĮIJȐȟİȚȢIJȘȢȅįȘȖȓĮȢ
(&ǼʌȚIJȡȑʌİIJĮȚȘȜİȚIJȠȣȡȖȓĮIJȘȢıİȩȜİȢIJȚȢȤȫȡİȢIJȘȢǼǼțĮșȫȢțĮȚıIJȘȞǿıȜĮȞįȓĮıIJȘȞȃȠȡȕȘȖȓĮțĮȚıIJȘȞǼȜȕİIJȓĮ
ȈIJȘȞīĮȜȜȓĮțĮȚıIJȘȞǿIJĮȜȓĮİʌȚIJȡȑʌİIJĮȚȘȤȡȒıȘȝȩȞȠıİİıȦIJİȡȚțȠȪȢȤȫȡȠȣȢ.
Questo apparato é conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed agli altri principi sanciti dalla Direttiva 1999/5/CE. Può essere messo in funzione
in tutti i paesi dell‘UE e inoltre in Islanda, Norvegia e in Svizzera. In Francia e in Italia è consentito l‘uso solo in ambienti chiusi.
Dette utstyret er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og andre relevante bestemmelser i EU-direktiv 1999/5/EF. Det kan brukes i
alle EU-land og dessuten i Island, Norge og Sveits. I Frankrike og Italia er kun innendørs bruk tillatt.
Dit apparaat voldoet aan de essentiele eisen en andere van toepassing zijnde bepalingen van de Richtlijn 1999/5/EG. Het gebruik is
toegestaan in alle landen van de EU en ook in IJsland, Noorwegen en Zweden. In Frankrijk en Italië is het gebruik slechts binnenshu-
is toegestaan.
Denna utrustning är i överensstämmelse med de väsentliga kraven och andra relevanta bestämmelser i Direktiv 1999/5/EC. Appara-
ten får användas i alla länder inom EU liksom på Island, i Norge och i Schweiz. I Frankrike och Italien får apparaten användas endast
inomhus.
EC Declaration of Conformity
- 156
english
EC Declaration of Conformity
157 -
english
Index
0-9
24p format ..............................................116
A
Access code ...............................................60
Active loudspeakers .................................121
Adjusting the picture ..................................38
Adjusting the sound ...................................36
Alarm ........................................................61
Allow switching voltage ...........................112
Antenna DVB ...........................................112
Archive playback ........................................98
Assign digital audio input .........................113
TCHN@LOKHÆDQR .......................................124
AUDIO button ................................... 21, 129
Audio commentary ....................... 23, 36, 37
Audio commentary volume ........................36
Auto dimming - Room ...............................38
Auto dimming - Video (VBD+) ....................38
Auto format ...............................................38
Automatic speech detection .......................37
Automatic time control ............................109
AV audio signal ..........................................37
AV selection ...............................................35
AV standard .............................................112
B
Balance ......................................................37
Batteries ....................................................20
Blu-ray player ...........................................116
Bookmarks
Delete all ..................................... 101, 103
Delete individual .....................................98
Jumping to .............................................98
Setting ...................................................98
Brightness ..................................................38
Bundling the Cables ...................................20
Button combinations ................................134
Button functions ........................................40
C
Call Digital Recorder menu .........................88
Camcorder ...............................................114
CA module ................................................63
CA module selection ..................................43
Change favourites lists ...............................49
Add station ............................................49
Delete station .........................................49
Change favourites lists ...............................49
Move station ..........................................49
Rename list ............................................49
Change station ..........................................46
Delete station .........................................46
Move station ..........................................46
Rename station ......................................47
Restore station .......................................47
Changing the title of a recording ..............104
Character Table ........................................135
Checking the hard disk .............................108
CI slot ........................................................63
Cleaning and care ........................................9
Code number .............................................60
Coloured buttons .......................... 40, 43, 54
Colour intensity ..........................................38
Colour temperature....................................38
Common Interface Plus ................... 110, 111
Component connection ...........................118
Connecting antennas .................................18
Connecting the TV Set ...............................18
Connections ..............................................11
Contrast .....................................................38
Control unit ...............................................10
Copy protection .......................................128
Copy recordings
from an accessible TV set .....................107
onto an external hard disc ....................102
to a connected recorder .......................101
D
Data capture ..............................................53
Decoder ...................................................113
Decoder stations ......................................113
Delete Manager .........................................97
Set delete protection in the Timer data
menu ....................................................96
Setting/cancelling delete protection ......105
Delete programmed descrambling ............102
Deleting ...................................................100
All bookmarks ............................. 101, 103
Individual bookmarks..............................98
Parts of the recording ...........................100
Recording .............................................103
Deleting timer entries .................................97
Descramble scrambled recording ..............102
Descrambling at DR continuous operation ..88
Device at connection AV ..........................112
Digital audio input ...................................125
Digital camera ..........................................114
Digital Link HD (HDMI CEC) ......................117
Digital Link Plus ............................... 113, 128
Digital Noise Control ..................................38
Direct recording .........................................92
One Touch Recording .............................92
Display .......................................................21
DR archive view .........................................88
DR continuous operation ...........................88
DR+ Streaming .........................................106
Copy from accessible TV set .................107
Extended standby mode .......................106
Follow me ............................................107
Play via network ...................................106
DR+ Streaming settings ..............................89
DR device group name ...........................89
DR device name .....................................89
DR standby after switch-off ....................89
IP port number .......................................89
Share the DR archive with other TVs .......89
Using the DR archives of other TVs .........89
DVB character set ......................................43
DVB subtitles .............................................40
DVD button .............................................129
DVD player ..............................................116
DVD recorder ...........................................116
DVI/HDMI ................................................116
E
Encrypted stations ............. 23, 24, 29, 44, 63
$MDQFXDEÆBHDMBX ................................. 15, 22
Environmental protection .........................148
EPG ...........................................................52
F
Factory settings picture/sound ....................39
Fast forward and rewind ..................... 91, 99
Favourites ..................................................35
Film quality impr. (DMM) ............................38
First installation wizard ...............................22
FLOF ..........................................................54
Formatting the hard disk ..........................108
G
Game console ................................. 113, 116
Gaming mode ..........................................113
- 158
english
Index
H
HbbTV .......................................................82
HDMI .......................................................116
HDMI CEC ...............................................117
Headphone volume....................................36
Help ...........................................................15
Hiding sections ........................................100
'H%H 5@LOKHÆDQ ............................. 119, 124
Highlight function ......................................91
I
Index in the TV set .....................................15
Info display ................................................15
Inform about hidden sections.....................88
Installing the TV set ....................................18
Internal WLAN antenna ..............................64
iPIP ............................................................50
J
Jump distance ............................................88
Jumping .............................................. 90, 99
Jumping to bookmarks ...............................98
Jump to automatically set bookmarks .........90
L
Language .................................... 22, 61, 137
Language/sound ........................................43
Last station ................................................40
LNC/LNB ....................................... 25, 27, 28
Locking/unlocking a movie .......................104
Logical Channel Number ............................30
Loudness ...................................................36
M
Mains switch....................................... 10, 21
Manual station search ................................45
Maximum volume ......................................37
Max. switch on volume ..............................37
Media
Access ....................................................65
Overview ................................................65
Quit .......................................................65
MediaHome ...............................................70
Media menu ..............................................66
MediaMusic ...............................................78
MediaNet ..................................................73
Favourites ........................................ 73, 76
Internet ..................................................74
Personal area ..........................................75
MediaNet ..................................................73
Recommendations ..................................73
Settings ..................................................77
Topic selection ........................................73
MediaPhoto ...............................................79
Full-screen mode ....................................79
Rotate picture ........................................79
Slide show ..............................................79
MediaPortal ...............................................14
MediaText ..................................................82
MediaUpdate .............................................64
MediaVideo ...............................................80
Jump by entering a time .........................81
Jump by using the directional arrows ......81
Select language/sound ...........................81
Wind ......................................................81
Memorise ..................................................52
Menu language .........................................15
Menu operation .........................................12
MHEG-5 ....................................................84
Mobile phone keypad ................................12
Move picture vertically ...............................39
Muting ......................................................36
N
Network selection .......23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28
Numeric buttons ........................... 12, 15, 34
O
On/Off button ............................................10
On-screen displays .....................................62
OPC ...........................................................38
Overview diagram ......................................16
P
Page selection ............................................54
Parental lock ..................................... 60, 104
PC IN .......................................................118
Personal text pages ............................. 40, 55
Picture .......................................................38
Picture adjustment .............................. 38, 39
Picture format ..................................... 38, 39
PALplus ..................................................39
Panorama ............................................... 39
Zoom .....................................................39
Picture in Picture ........................................50
PIN ............................................................60
PIP .............................................................50
Playing highlights .......................................99
Programme info .........................................40
Proxy server ...............................................68
R
Radio menu ........................................ 17, 57
Radio mode .................................. 21, 56, 58
REC button ..............................................129
1DBNQCBNMÇHBS ...........................................97
Recording ................................................126
Recording capacity .....................................88
Recording quality .......................................88
Recording subtitles .....................................88
Recording wizard .............................. 95, 126
Remote control ............................. 3, 20, 129
Remote TV switch on via Digital Link ........113
Repeat .......................................................81
Repeat initial installation ............................22
Replay function ..........................................91
Reset picture/sound ...................................39
Reset to factory settings .............................68
RS-232C interface ....................................125
S
Safety ......................................................8, 9
Scope of delivery ..........................................7
Search wizard ............................................44
Selecting audio/video source ......................35
Select memory medium .............................88
Select satellite installation ...........................24
Select station .............................................34
via favourites lists ...................................35
with P+/P- ..............................................34
with the numeric buttons .......................34
with the station list .................................34
Serial interface .........................................125
Serial recording tolerance ...........................88
Service .....................................................160
Set Covers ..................................................18
Setting pre-record time and post-record time 89
Set-Top-Box .............................................116
Sharpness ..................................................38
Signal type ...............................................112
Slow motion ....................................... 91, 99
Smart Card.................................................63
Smart Jump............................. 81, 88, 90, 99
Software download .................................130
Software update ......................................130
Sound ........................................................36
159 -
english
Sound components wizard .......................119
Sound mode ..............................................36
Sound off ..................................................36
Sound-picture synchronisation ...................36
Sound system ..........................................120
Standard PIP ..............................................50
Standby mode ...........................................21
Station list ..................................................34
Station search/update ................................44
Status display ...................................... 42, 93
Stop recording early ...................................93
Subtitles .............................................. 40, 43
Switching off .............................................21
Switching off the TV set during recording ...93
Switching on ..............................................21
Switch on TV when marked .......................53
Switch to live picture ..................................90
T
Teletext ......................................................54
Teletext functions .......................................40
Teletext subtitles ........................................40
Tilting the TV set ......................................136
Time ..........................................................41
Time and date ............................................62
Timer data ........................................ 96, 126
Automatic time control.................. 96, 126
Date .............................................. 96, 126
Decoding overnight ....................... 96, 126
Descrambled recording .................. 96, 126
Lock movie .............................................96
Programme provider PIN ................ 96, 126
Recorder ....................................... 96, 126
Recording time .............................. 96, 126
Recording type .............................. 96, 126
Record subtitles ............................. 96, 126
Set delete protection ..............................96
Station ...................................................96
VPS ............................................... 96, 126
Timer functions ..........................................61
Timer list ............................... 94, 95, 97, 127
Timer recording..........................................94
manually ................................................95
via EPG ...................................................94
via teletext .............................................95
Timer recordings ......................................126
TOP ...........................................................54
TOP table ...................................................54
TV button ......................................... 20, 129
TV menu ....................................................16
TV set equipment .....................................146
TV viewing with time shift ................... 90, 92
U
UPnP..........................................................64
USB keyboard ..........................................134
USB stick ..................................................130
V
Videotext subtitles .....................................55
Viewing a locked movie ...........................105
Viewing another movie from the archive
during archive recording ...........................93
Viewing highlights from the archive .........103
Volume ......................................................36
Volume adjustment ....................................37
VPS ..........................................................109
VPS times ...................................................55
W
Watching other stations during archive
recording ..................................................93
Wired connection ......................................64
Wireless radio connection ..........................64
Y
YPbPr .......................................................118
YUV .........................................................118
Index
- 160
english
Loewe Austria GmbH
Parkring 12
1010 Wien, Österreich
Tel +43 - 810 0810 24
Fax +43 - 1 22 88 633 - 90
E-mail: loewe@loewe.co.at
Audio Products Group Pty Ltd
67 O’Riordan St
Alexandria NSW 2015, Australia
Tel +61 - 2 9669 3477
Fax +61 - 2 9578 0140
E-mail: help@audioproducts.com.au
Loewe Opta Benelux NV/SA
Uilenbaan 84
2160 Wommelgem, België
Tel +32 - 3 - 2 70 99 30
Fax +32 - 3 - 2 71 01 08
E-mail: ccc@loewe.be
SOFIA AUDIO CENTRE
138 Rakovski St.
6RÀD%XOJDULD
Tel +359 - 29 877 335
Fax +359 - 29 817 758
E-mail: sac@audio-bg.com
Telion AG
Rütistrasse 26
8952 Schlieren, Schweiz
Tel +41 - 44 732 15 11
Fax +41 - 44 732 15 02
E-mail: lgelpke@telion.ch
Hadjikyriakos & Sons Ltd.
121 Prodromos Str., P.O Box 21587
1511 Nicosia, Cyprus
Tel +357 - 22 87 21 11
Fax +357 - 22 66 33 91
E-mail: savvas@hadjikyriakos.com.cy
BaSys CS s.r.o.
Sodomkova 1478/8
10200 Praha 10 - Hostivar,
ýHVNR
Tel +420 2 34 70 67 00
Fax +420 2 34 70 67 01
(PDLORIÀFH#EDV\VF]
Loewe Opta GmbH,
Customer Care Center
Industriestraße 11
96317 Kronach, Deutschland
Tel +49 180122256393
Fax +49 926199500
E-mail: ccc@loewe.de
Kjaerulff1 Development A/S
C.F. Tietgens Boulevard 19
5220 Odense SØ, Denmark
Tel +45 - 66 13 54 80
Fax +45 - 66 13 54 10
E-mail: info@loewe.dk
Gaplasa S.A.
Conde de Torroja, 25
28022 Madrid, España
Tel +34 - 917 48 29 60
Fax +34 - 913 29 16 75
E-mail: loewe@maygap.com
Tedra Trading Oy
Kuusemetsa 3
Saue 76506, Estonia
Tel +372 - 50 14 817
Fax +372 - 67 09 611
(PDLOLQIR#IXWXUHKLÀFRP
Loewe France SAS
Rue du Dépôt,
13 Parc de l l‘Europe, BP 10010
67014 Strasbourg Cédex, France
Tel +33 - 3- 88 79 72 50
Fax +33 - 3- 88 79 72 59
E-mail: loewe.france@loewe-fr.com
Karevox Oy
Museokatu 36
00100 Helsinki, Finland
Tel +358 - 9 44 56 33
(PDLONDUH#KDORUDGLRÀ
Loewe UK Limited
Century Court, Riverside Way
Riverside Business Park, Irvine, Ayrshire
KA11 5DJ, UK
Tel +44 - 1294 315 000
Fax +44 - 1294 315 001
E-mail: enquiries@loewe-uk.com
Issagogiki Emboriki Ellados S.A.
321 Mesogion Av.
152 31 Chalandri-Athens, Hellas
Tel +30 - 210 672 12 00
Fax +30 - 210 674 02 04
E-mail: christina_argyropoulou@
isembel.gr
Basys Magyarorszagi KFT
Tó park u.9.
2045 Törökbálint, Magyar
Tel +36 - 2341 56 37 (121)
Fax +36 - 23 41 51 82
E-mail: ertekesites@basys.hu
Galerien und PartnerPlus
Kings Tower 28D, 111 King Lam Street
Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel +852 -92 60 89 88
Fax +852-23 10 08 08
E-mail: info@loewe-cn.com
Plug&Play Ltd.
Bednjanska 8, 10000 Zagreb
Hrvatska (Kroatia)
Tel +385 1 4929 683
Fax +385 1 4929 682
E-mail: info@loewe.hr
Loewe Italiana S.r.L.
Largo del Perlar, 12
37135 Verona (VR), Italia
Tel +39 - 045 5281690
Fax +39 - 045 82 51 622
E-mail: info@loewe.it
Clear electronic entertainment Ltd
13 Noah Mozes St.
Agish Ravad Building
Tel Aviv 67442, Israel
Tel +972 - 3 - 6091100
Fax +972 - 3 - 6092200
E-mail: info@loewe.co.il
Salem Agencies & Services Co.
Hamad Al Haqueel Street, Rawdah,
Jeddah 21413
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Tel +966 (2) 665 4616
Fax +966 (2) 660 7864
E-mail: hkurkjian@aol.com
Service
A Cappella Ltd.
Ausros Vartu 5, Pasazo skg.
01129 Vilnius, Lithuania
Tel +370 - 52 12 22 96
Fax +370 - 52 62 66 81
E-mail: info@loewe.lt
Loewe. service center
Brivibas gatve 332,
Riga, Latvia, LV-1006
Tel +371 673 105 68
E-mail: dom332@dom332.lv
Doneo Co. Ltd
34/36 Danny Cremona Street
Hamrun, HMR1514, Malta
Tel +356 - 21 - 22 53 81
Fax +356 - 21 - 23 07 35
E-mail: service@doneo.com.mt
Somara S.A.
377, Rue Mustapha El Maani
20000 Casablanca, Morocco
Tel +212 - 22 22 03 08
Fax +212 - 22 26 00 06
E-mail: somara@somara.ma
Pce. Premium Consumer
Electronics as
Ostre Kullerod 5
3241 Sandefjord, Norge
Tel +47 - 33 29 30 46
Fax +47 - 33 44 60 44
E-mail: service@pce.no
Mayro Magnetics Portugal, Lda.
Rua Professor Henrique de Barros
Edifício Sagres, 2º. C
2685-338 Prior Velho, Portugal
Tel +351 - 21 942 78 30
Fax +351 - 21 940 00 78
E-mail: geral.loewe@mayro.pt
Tele Radio Video
Ul. Boh. Getta Warszawskiego 18
81-609 Gdynia
Tel. 58 624-50-09
E-Mail: loewe@trv.com.pl
Avitech Co. SRL
1/II Pipera Tunari St.
007190 Voluntari, Ilfov, Romania
Tel +40 - 21 200 64 64
Fax +40 - 21 200 64 65
E-mail:gina.surghila@avitech.ro
Service Center Loewe
per. Aptekarsky, dom 4 str. 2
105005 Moscow, Russia
Tel +7 - 495 730 78 00
Fax +7 - 495 730 78 01
E-mail: service@loewe-cis.ru
Kjaerulff 1 AB
Ridbanegatan 4, Box 9076
200 39 Malmø, Sverige
Tel +46 - 4 06 79 74 00
Fax +46 - 4 06 79 74 01
E-mail: loewe@loewe.se
Atlas Sound & Vision Pte Ltd
10 Winstedt Road #01-18
Singapore 227977
Tel +65 - 6334 9320
Fax +65 - 6339 1615
E-mail: michael.tien@atlas-sv.com
-$'5$1GG6HèDQD
3DUWL]DQVNDFHVWD
6HèDQD6ORYHQLMD
7HO
)D[
(PDLOLQIR#MDGUDQVL
BaSys SK, s.r.o.
Stará Vajnorská 37/C
83104 Bratislava, Slovakia
Tel + 421 2 49 10 66 18
Fax + 421 2 49 10 66 33
E-mail: loewe@basys.sk
SERVISPLUS GENEL MERKEZ
ÖRNEK MAH. ATES SOK. NO:1
34704 ATASEHIR, ISTANBUL, TÜRKIYE
Tel +90 - 216 315 39 00
Fax +90 - 216 315 49 50
E-mail: info@servisplus.com.tr
Dubai Audio Center
P.O. Box 32836, Sheikh Zayed Road
Dubai, UAE
Tel +971 - 4 343 14 41
Fax +971 - 4 343 77 48
E-mail: service@dubaiaudio.com
The Soundlab (Pty) Ltd
P.O. Box 31952, Kyalami 1684
Gauteng, Republic of South Africa
Tel +27 - 1 14 66 47 00
Fax +27 - 1 14 66 42 85
E-mail: loewe@mad.co.za
© by Loewe Opta 19.01.11
161 -
14

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Loewe Connect 32 LED bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Loewe Connect 32 LED in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 4,71 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Loewe Connect 32 LED

Loewe Connect 32 LED Gebruiksaanwijzing - Nederlands - 162 pagina's

Loewe Connect 32 LED Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 162 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info